SmartPlant P&ID

User’s Guide
June 2004 Version 4.1

DPID2-PE-200004E

Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2004 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software--Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, PDS, and MARIAN are registered trademarks Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Customer Support and Documentation Comments........................................................9 Introducing SmartPlant P&ID .......................................................................................10 SmartPlant P&ID Program Group ..............................................................................11 What's New in SmartPlant P&ID?..............................................................................12
SmartPlant P&ID Help Command.................................................................................... 12 Printable Guides Command .............................................................................................. 12 SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command ......................................................................... 12 SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command ........................................................................ 13 About SmartPlant P&ID Command.................................................................................. 13 Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID................................................... 13

Navigating in the Software: An Overview .....................................................................14 Working With the Design Window: An Overview ....................................................15
Show Command................................................................................................................ 17 Options Command ............................................................................................................ 17 Previous Command........................................................................................................... 22 Save Settings Command ................................................................................................... 22 Zoom Area Command....................................................................................................... 22 Zoom In Command ........................................................................................................... 23 Zoom Out Command ........................................................................................................ 24 Fit Command .................................................................................................................... 24 Pan Command................................................................................................................... 25 Display Command ............................................................................................................ 26 Toolbars Command........................................................................................................... 26 Properties Command......................................................................................................... 28 New Command ................................................................................................................. 34 Cascade Command............................................................................................................ 36 Tile Horizontally Command ............................................................................................. 36 Tile Vertically Command ................................................................................................. 36 Active Window List.......................................................................................................... 36

Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview..............................................38
Engineering Data Editor Command.................................................................................. 39 Stockpile Menu: An Overview ......................................................................................... 41 Edit Menu: An Overview.................................................................................................. 43 Claim Command ............................................................................................................... 44 Release Claim Command.................................................................................................. 44 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................... 45 View Menu: An Overview................................................................................................ 45 Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview ......................... 59

Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.......................................................................65
Catalog Explorer Command ............................................................................................. 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview ............................................................................................ 68 View Menu ....................................................................................................................... 77 Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) ............................................................................... 79

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents
Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview .................................................................. 82

Working With the Properties Window: An Overview ...............................................83
Properties Window Command .......................................................................................... 84

Customizing the Software: An Overview...................................................................91
Customize Command........................................................................................................ 92 Custom Commands Command ......................................................................................... 97

Working with Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................102 Open Command ........................................................................................................104
Open Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 104 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box ................................................................................... 105 Filter Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 106 Customize Current View Dialog Box ............................................................................. 107 Open an Existing Drawing.............................................................................................. 108 Open a Drawing in a Different Database ........................................................................ 109 Customize the Open Dialog Box .................................................................................... 110

Recent Drawings.......................................................................................................111
Access a Recently Open Drawing................................................................................... 111 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View..................................................................... 111

File Properties Command .........................................................................................112
File Properties Dialog Box.............................................................................................. 112 View Document Properties ............................................................................................. 115 Set Document Properties................................................................................................. 116

Close Command........................................................................................................117
Close an Active Drawing ................................................................................................ 117

Exit Command ..........................................................................................................118
Close the Program........................................................................................................... 118

Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview ............................................................119
New Template Command ............................................................................................... 120 Create a Drawing Template ............................................................................................ 121 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border..................................................................... 122

Saving Drawings: An Overview...............................................................................124
Save Command ............................................................................................................... 125 Save As Command.......................................................................................................... 125

Re-creating Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................127
Recreate a Drawing......................................................................................................... 129 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition ............................................................... 129

Using Filters: An Overview......................................................................................130
Add Filter Command ...................................................................................................... 131 Filter Tab Cut Command ................................................................................................ 138 Filter Tab Copy Command ............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Paste Command.............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Delete Command............................................................................................ 139 Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command............................................................. 140 Filter Tab Properties Command...................................................................................... 140

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview ................................................141 Understanding Database Constraints........................................................................143 Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview...................................................................144 4 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Select Tool Command..................................................................................................... 145 Select Tool Ribbon ......................................................................................................... 146 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ..................................................................................... 146 Select an Item.................................................................................................................. 147 Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool............................................. 148 Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ............................................... 149

Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview.....................................................................150
Show Grid Command ..................................................................................................... 150 Snap Grid Command....................................................................................................... 151

Placing Equipment: An Overview ............................................................................152
Place Equipment ............................................................................................................. 153 Place Multiple Representations....................................................................................... 154

Routing Lines: An Overview....................................................................................156
Line Routing Ribbon....................................................................................................... 157 Route a Line.................................................................................................................... 158 Start a Line in Free Space ............................................................................................... 159 Start a Line from a Connect Point................................................................................... 160 Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line .................................................................... 161 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line .............................................................................. 161 Branch from an Existing Line......................................................................................... 162 Branch to an Existing Line ............................................................................................. 162 Add a Manual Gap to a Line........................................................................................... 163 Assign Heat Tracing ....................................................................................................... 164

Break Run Command ...............................................................................................165
Break a Pipe Run ............................................................................................................ 165

Join Runs Command.................................................................................................166
Join Pipe Runs ................................................................................................................ 166

Using Piping Components: An Overview ................................................................167
Place a Piping Component .............................................................................................. 167 Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview ...................................................................... 169

Placing Instrumentation: An Overview ....................................................................174
Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window)................................................................... 175 Place an Inline Instrument .............................................................................................. 175 Place an Offline Instrument ............................................................................................ 177 Add Instruments to a Loop ............................................................................................. 178 Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) .............. 179 Remove an Instrument from a Loop ............................................................................... 180

Labeling: An Overview ............................................................................................181
Placing Labels: An Overview ......................................................................................... 182 Using the Types of Labels: An Overview....................................................................... 191 Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview .................................................. 201 Calling Item Tag Validation ........................................................................................... 208

Using Annotations: An Overview ............................................................................210
Place an Annotation ........................................................................................................ 211 Place an Area Break........................................................................................................ 212 Place a Package............................................................................................................... 213 Place a Revision Cloud ................................................................................................... 214

Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview ...............................................215
Undo Command .............................................................................................................. 216 Move Command ............................................................................................................. 217

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 5

Table of Contents
Move To Drawing Command ......................................................................................... 222 Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview.................................................... 225 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview....................................... 238 Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview........................................................................ 245 Copying Items: An Overview ......................................................................................... 253 Selecting Connected Items: An Overview ...................................................................... 254 Modifying Item Properties: An Overview ...................................................................... 258

Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview ................................................263
Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box........................................................................ 264 Place an Item from the Stockpile .................................................................................... 264 Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing......................................... 265 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile........................................................... 265 Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet..................................................................... 267 Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile................. 268

Gapping Lines: An Overview...................................................................................269
AutoGap Command ........................................................................................................ 269 Gap Now Command ....................................................................................................... 270

Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview.................................................271
Update Symbology Command........................................................................................ 271 Update Symbology ......................................................................................................... 272 Update Line Settings....................................................................................................... 272

Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview ......................................................273
Image Command............................................................................................................. 275 Object Command ............................................................................................................ 276 Paste Special Command.................................................................................................. 280 Links Command.............................................................................................................. 281

Working With Assemblies: An Overview................................................................284
Save As Assembly Command......................................................................................... 285

Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview ....................................................288 Claiming Items: An Overview..................................................................................289
Claim Command ............................................................................................................. 291 Release Claim Command................................................................................................ 300 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................. 301 Show Claims Command ................................................................................................. 303

Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview ................................................304
Compare and Refresh Command .................................................................................... 305

Consistency Checking: An Overview ...........................................................................313 Show Inconsistencies Command ..............................................................................314
Show Inconsistencies ...................................................................................................... 314

Properties Command ................................................................................................315
Consistency Check Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 316 Review an Inconsistency................................................................................................. 317 Resolve an Inconsistency................................................................................................ 319

Reapply Rules Command .........................................................................................321
Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency.................................................. 322

Importing Drawing Data: An Overview ......................................................................323 6 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents Import Data File Command ......................................................................................324
Import Log Dialog Box................................................................................................... 324

Import SmartSketch Command ................................................................................325
Using the SmartPlant Migrator ....................................................................................... 325 Import a SmartSketch File .............................................................................................. 328

Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .......................................................................329
Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .................................................................................. 329

Generating Reports: An Overview...............................................................................331 Plant Reports Command ...........................................................................................333
Plant Reports Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 333 Generate a Report ........................................................................................................... 334

My Reports Command..............................................................................................335
My Reports Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 335

Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview............................................337
Tabular Format Report.................................................................................................... 338 Fixed Format Report ....................................................................................................... 340 Composite Format Report............................................................................................... 341 New Command ............................................................................................................... 343 Edit Command ................................................................................................................ 345 Delete Command ............................................................................................................ 350 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar............................................................................................ 351

Printing Drawings: An Overview .................................................................................361 Print Command.........................................................................................................363
Print Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 363 Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 364 Print a Drawing ............................................................................................................... 365 Print a Selected Area....................................................................................................... 366 Set Print Options ............................................................................................................. 367 Change Printer Properties ............................................................................................... 368 Print to a File................................................................................................................... 368

Page Setup Command...............................................................................................369
Page Setup Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 369 Set up a Page Layout....................................................................................................... 370

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview ......................................371 Publishing to TEF: An Overview .............................................................................373
Publish Command........................................................................................................... 375 Find Documents to Publish Command ........................................................................... 379 Browser Command ......................................................................................................... 381

Retrieving from TEF: An Overview.........................................................................382
Retrieve Command ......................................................................................................... 385

Correlating Items: An Overview ..............................................................................387
Correlate Command ........................................................................................................ 387

Using the To Do List: An Overview.........................................................................390
To Do List Command ..................................................................................................... 391 Open the To Do List ....................................................................................................... 391

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 7

Table of Contents
To Do List Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 392

Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview ............................................406 Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists....................................................................407 Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID ...............................................................408 Setting Construction Status.......................................................................................409 Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation ........................................................410 Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID ...........................412 Using Filters Versus Levels......................................................................................413 Glossary ..........................................................................................................................414 Index................................................................................................................................436

8 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Customer Support and Documentation Comments

Customer Support and Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.intergraph.com/ppm/services/support.asp. Send documentation comments or suggestions to PPMdoc@intergraph.com.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 9

to provide integration with existing data and other systems. 10 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . all of which allow users to share data with third-party software. and standards compliance. Running on Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000. and drag-and-drop capabilities. The strong data import and export facilities of SmartPlant P&ID allow users to populate the system with relevant plant data. The design rule-base confirms data consistency and compliance with plant and engineering standards. such as process data from process simulation databases based on Aspen Zyqad from Aspen Technologies. such as Intergraph PDS. Intergraph INtools. more efficient design with less iteration. SmartPlant P&ID does not require a traditional. expensive CAD engine for P&ID creation. As a data-centric. You can then use this information in the SmartPlant P&ID Stockpile to design the P&ID. SmartPlant P&ID incorporates the latest Microsoft technologies. and Aspen Zyqad. userdefinable rule-based system that assists the engineer during the design phase of the plant and subsequent life cycle phases. SmartPlant P&ID features a comprehensive. and feedback is immediate. or equipment and line lists. such as OLE automation. Inc. SmartPlant P&ID helps users improve design quality. Data is entered directly into the database. rule-based solution for the P&ID life cycle. All data from the P&ID is stored in the plant database and adheres to plant standards. automatic checks. SmartPlant P&ID significantly cuts design and modification time and increases accuracy with its exclusive data-centric approach and use of design rules.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID creates intelligent P&IDs by populating the database with relevant plant data. rules are executed. This method provides valuable information throughout the plant life cycle. SmartPlant P&ID is vastly different from graphic-driven P&ID solutions of today. The graphical representation of the P&ID is a view or a report of the data. The open architecture of SmartPlant P&ID permits integration with other systems. The rule-based and automation capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID also differentiate it from other P&ID systems. data consistency. allowing faster. With quick access to supporting engineering data.

SmartPlant P&ID provides the design environment for SmartPlant. For more information about SmartPlant Engineering Manager. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. unified data structure that represents the plant model. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide. Drawing Manager allows you to create and delete P&IDs and drawing versions and print multiple drawings. including all plant components and their relationships. By manipulating model views. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. Options Manager defines plant-wide graphic standards for symbology. SmartPlant Engineering Manager performs higher-level data management tasks. and formats. Rule Manager defines rules for placement and property copying on placement. Insulation Specification Manager allows you to create and modify lookup tables for insulation specifications and thicknesses. designing plant hierarchies. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 11 .and project-specific commands. heat tracing. Drawing Manager allows you to perform Workshare. and so forth. or the SmartPlant P&ID Upgrade Guide. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. such as specifying user permissions. SmartPlant has several programs and utilities for running and managing your plant data. gapping.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Program Group SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. Options Manager also defines paths to SmartPlant files and directories.

SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Activates your web browser and opens the SmartPlant P&ID World Wide Web page. You can print it if necessary. The user's guides contain the same information as the online Help. provides a list of all inconsistencies. and other items to help you use SmartPlant P&ID more efficiently. procedures. dialog boxes. learning tools. and the guide opens in the appropriate application.xls. Inconsistency Report .A tabular report.Functionality changes provide a variety of display options using the Fit command. Printable Guides Command Help > Printable Guides Opens a page in your default browser that includes links to the user's guides in portable document format.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID What's New in SmartPlant P&ID? This version of SmartPlant P&ID contains the following new functionality and changes. and so forth. 12 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • SmartPlant P&ID Help Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Help Opens the Help viewer where you can read topics about commands. The report is available in the Engineering Data Editor by selecting View > Plant Reports. On this page. • Fit Command . Click a link. Inconsistencies Report. you can access registration and support information.

Follow the instructions and links on this web page to find your information. On this page you can learn about international and regional conferences.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Opens your web browser to the Intergraph Process & Power Client Community web page. Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID On your desktop. informal networking. Note • Programming with SmartPlant P&ID is the method by which you can use the Automation layer to customize the software to meet your own particular requirements. About SmartPlant P&ID Command Help > About SmartPlant P&ID Displays information about your copy of the software. online forums. structured product feedback. including the version number and the copyright. click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. and licensing notices. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 13 . This documentation consists of a programmer's guide and reference guides for placement automation and the logical model. legal. and more.

This view is exactly the same tabular view that you can display in the Design window. Properties Window When you select an item in a plant model. and the Properties window. The Engineering Data Editor allows you to see the same information in a tabular format.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Software: An Overview The drawing interface is divided into four distinct parts: the Design window. the Engineering Data Editor. and organizing data. Each part provides specific features that you need to create drawings in the software. view and modify the properties associated with that item in the Properties window. Your system administrator defines customized properties and their defaults for each item in Data Dictionary Manager. editing properties. you can see the traditional diagram of a plant containing equipment. the Catalog Explorer. page 264 • 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In addition. you can enter. and piping in a graphical representation. In the Drawing view. instrumentation. Each of these views provides a way for you to enter information for the plant model into the database. You can navigate through the nodes in a catalog by clicking the + or – icons by the selected node. Catalog Explorer The Catalog Explorer displays all available catalog items for you to use in drawings and plant models. The two views also provide a way for you to view information in the database in different ways. Related Topics Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. Design Window The Design window displays Drawing views and the Engineering Data Editor. you can double-click nodes in the tree view to open them. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. Engineering Data Editor The Engineering Data Editor is a modification of the stockpile display. The Catalog Explorer contains a hierarchical representation of the selected catalog. with the same capabilities for modifying the display. page 67 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. and it can also display items in the plant and drawing stockpiles.

using vertical and horizontal scroll bars as well as Zoom and Pan commands to change the center point for the Drawing view. You can open as many windows as needed to support a design. Each window has its own independent set of properties defining view range. much like a Properties window. A tab scroll provides a way to view tabs hidden from display by the horizontal scroll bar. too. You create your drawing In the Drawing view. By using commands on the Window menu. The title bar identifies the drawing name. In the Engineering Data Editor. displays the model information for a design in a Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Design Window: An Overview The Design window itself consists of several parts. The Engineering Data Editor displays drawing information in a table. Filter tabs provide a quick and easy way to choose what appears in the Drawing view. too. and so forth. The Design window. display properties. you can cascade or tile views to more easily navigate among them. or Modeler. You can add new tabs for additional filters as needed. You can define one or more Engineering Data Editors for a drawing. you can specify filters and layouts to define the table information and even edit some item properties. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 15 .

page 108 • 16 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the software can end in an abnormal way. (B) Engineering Data Editor . the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database and displays a message: One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • (A) Drawing view . for example. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. due to power outage. the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing. page 53 • Open a New Drawing View. This view displays the common idea of a model: a diagram containing items such as equipment. but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. • SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. page 35 • Open an Existing Drawing. As a result. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. piping. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. By manipulating model views. Occasionally. and instrumentation. unified data structure that represents the plant model. Caution • The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. see Using the Properties Glossary: An Overview Related Topics Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (when you click File > Save or when you quit the program). The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. page 138 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View.A tabular view that presents the plant data in a tabular format.A graphical representation of the plant model. however. When you re-open the drawing. including all plant components and their relationships. For more information about the data model.

Opens the Options dialog box. you can set the number of recently used files that appear on the File menu. Update links automatically at open . the Show command allows you to choose to display drawing elements. the status bar. Recently used files list . such as notes. and so forth. see Related Topics. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. page 273 Options Dialog Box Sets options for the current drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Command Available on the Drawing View Shortcut menu. labels. page 21 General Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for updating links in the drawing and displaying the drawing. Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options on the main menu bar. screen appearance. For example.Sets the number of entries for the recently used files list on the File menu.Updates links automatically when a drawing is opened. page 33 Options Command Tools > Options Changes settings that control recently used files. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 17 . page 21 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 91 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. grids.Displays the drawing as it appears when you print it. export formats. placement information. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Display as printed . and recently used files. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options. For more information about linking. and so forth.

Sets the default background color for all Drawing views in the active drawing. the line weight and color) for item types throughout a plant structure. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object.Sets the highlight color.Displays the status bar at the bottom of the main window. the description appears in the status bar at the bottom of the window.Sets the color of handles when an item is selected. Also. page 278 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) Allows you to select options for the background. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. selection. Selected items . highlight. Related Topics • Break a Link. Use Defaults . Handles . page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. use Options Manager. prompts that explain what to do at each step of the command appear in the status bar. and messages about the operations the software is performing appear in the status bar. Background . The connect points in the drawing appear in this color.Sets the color of selected items. Note • To set the symbology. page 17 18 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 21 • Options Command. page 21 • Embed a New Object. When you point at the command button on the toolbar. (for example. Highlight .Sets all the colors listed above to the default display value. page 283 • Change a Link.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show status bar . The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options. too. and handle colors in the drawing.

you drag the valve.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets the default construction status for the active drawing. If you are not placing an item but only selecting drawing items. a pipe run can be a candidate item. The pipe is highlighted when the valve is within the locate tolerance.Indicates that when a new off-page connector. the partner OPC is automatically stored in the Stockpile. called the locate zone. A candidate item is any item in the drawing that meets the placement rules of the approaching item. the locate tolerance defines how close that the pointer must approach in order to select the item. Existing. and tolerances for locating items and moving around in the drawing. you can indicate the drawing in which the partner OPC is stored until you place it in that drawing. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector. page 21 • Options Command. If you keep the pointer within the break-away tolerance from the line. the construction status can be set for individual drawing items by changing its value in the Properties window. the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box appears after you place a new OPC. Default construction status . but this option allows you to change the default on a drawing-by-drawing basis. If you clear this option. the valve does not disconnect from the line.Specifies the range. Break-away . For example. at which a candidate item is highlighted when another item approaches. and Future. Also. to move a valve. OPC. Place partner OPC in Stockpile .Assigns the selected construction status to all placed items. is placed. This list contains the following options: New. and a valve can be an approaching item to that pipe run. The construction status for an item appears in the Properties window when the item is selected. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options. For example. Locate . Using this dialog box.Sets the number of pixels at which an item disconnects from its parent item. page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 19 . page 204 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. The plant administrator sets the plant-wide default at setup.

Drawing list . Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. ready to be placed in the drawing. much like a catalog item during placement mode. Select Scale . For a 2:1 ratio. page 202 • Store a Partner Connector. the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object. page 206 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector.Imports a reference file. This setting causes the reference file to appear temporarily in the lower left of the drawing and determines a drawing scale that fits the reference file within the drawing. the drawings associated with that node appear in the Drawing list area. page 204 • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. Coincident (1:1) .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC Dialog Box Opens after you place a connector on a drawing. Scale reference files .Sets a scale option for importing a drawing. unless you have selected the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option on the Placement tab of the Options dialog box. 20 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . also known as an inserted object. The reference file is at the end of the pointer. Note • The Fit to Sheet option in the Select Scale list determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet but allows you to specify where the file is inserted by clicking on the drawing sheet. These settings take effect in your next drawing session. page 204 • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile. page 204 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for inserting objects in the drawing. When you select a node. This tab is part of the Options dialog box. which opens when you click Tools > Options on the main menu bar.Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree. at full scale (1:1).Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box allows you to select the drawing stockpile into which the partner of the new connector is placed. Choose a stockpile from this view to associate your partner connector with.Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. Plant Hierarchy .

page 18 Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box).Lists the drives that are currently active on your computer. 2.Opens the Browse dialog box. the scale of the foreign drawing is one and one half times its original size. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 21 . page 21 • Options Command.Sets the scale for a drawing that you insert. Related Topics • Break a Link. page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. On the Options dialog box. Select options on the dialog box to make the appropriate changes. Select a different drive in order to see directories that reside on that drive in the Look in box. click the tab containing the information that you want to customize. page 19 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box). • • • • General Tab (Options Dialog Box). page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options > Files Tab > Browse. page 17 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box). Browse . page 17 Customize the Software With the Options Command 1. page 278 Browse Dialog Box Allows you to select a directory that contains your reports.Specifies the folder where your user-defined. page 283 • Change a Link. page 21 • Edit an Embedded Object. My Reports . Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 20 3. Look in . Click Tools > Options. page 282 • Embed a New Object. when you type 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes.Displays the currently selected folder and the available folders in the active drive. For example. or personal. which allows you to select a local or network folder to store your user-defined reports and report templates.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Scale . Drives . Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. report templates are stored.

Related Topics • Save the Settings for the Active View. and the software does not remember more than one view. Notes • To stop the repainting of items in the window. page 15 Save Settings Command View > Save Settings Stores all display filters for the active Drawing view. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Previous Command View > Previous Restores the previous view. This action is convenient for large drawings. press F5. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View. page 15 Restore a Drawing View Click View > Previous. page 15 Zoom Area Command View > Zoom Area Enlarges the display of an area in the active window by allowing you to draw a fence around that arbitrary area of the drawing. To refresh the window. page 15 22 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 22 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 37 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. if you zoom in and then click View > Previous. the view changes to the view present before you zoomed in. press Esc. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. For example.

2. To stop the repainting of items in the window. press Esc or right-click in the drawing. press Esc. right-click or press Esc. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. 3. The selection then fills the view. 2. page 15 Zoom In on the Drawing 1. click View > Previous. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. click Zoom In: . This action is convenient for large drawings. click View > Previous. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 23 . page 15 Zoom In Command View > Zoom In Enlarges the display of items around a specified point in the active window. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. To quit the command. To refresh the window. On the main toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom In on an Area 1. To refresh the window. press F5. Click the view at the center of the area you want to zoom in on. click Zoom Area: . To stop the repainting of items in the window. press F5. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. This action is convenient for large drawings. use the pointer to fence the area that you want to zoom in on. press Esc. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. On the main toolbar. To quit the command. On the Drawing view.

This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To quit the command. the command fits only the selected items in the active view. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. page 24 Zoom Out from an Area 1. page 15 Fit Command View > Fit Fits all items in the active view if no items are currently selected. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. click View > Previous. press F5. the command zooms to the selected item. right-click or press Esc. page 15 • Zoom Out from an Area. To stop the repainting of items in the window. Related Topics • Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View. click Zoom Out . This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. page 15 24 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This action is convenient for large drawings. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. press Esc. If only one item is selected in the drawing. 2. Click the Drawing view at the center of the area you want to zoom out from. On the main toolbar. if any items are selected in the drawing. However. To refresh the window.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom Out Command View > Zoom Out Reduces the display of items around a specified point in the active window.

Click in the view that you want to pan. page 15 • Pan a Drawing View 1. click View > Previous. 2. page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To stop the repainting of items in the window. Related Topics Pan a Drawing View. press Esc or right-click in the Drawing view. too. press F5. To refresh the window. To quit the command. Notes • • • You can click and drag the hand pointer to pan the view. press Esc. On the main toolbar. click Pan: . page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 25 . This action is convenient for large drawings. To go back to the previous view. page 15 Pan Command View > Pan Allows you to move the display in any direction from a specific point in a drawing to see other areas of the drawing by dragging the pointer across the view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View On the main toolbar. 3. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. click Fit . Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. Click in the view again to define how far you want to pan.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Command View > Display Allows you to specify the windows you want to see in your design session: • • • Catalog Explorer Properties Window Engineering Data Editor Related Topics • Display the Engineering Data Editor. too. page 85 Toolbars Command View > Toolbars Opens the Toolbars dialog box. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. You can select the box next to the toolbar that you want to display. which allows you to create new toolbars and display or hide selected toolbars. Customize . page 28 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Toolbars on the main menu bar. Toolbar Name . You can change toolbar color schemes and button sizes. Reset . page 66 • Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off. hiding. or changing toolbars. Color Buttons . page 28 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons. Clearing this option causes toolbar buttons to appear in black and white.Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected.Adds color to the toolbar buttons. New . or change.Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box. Toolbars . 26 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 91 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. page 15 Toolbars Dialog Box Sets options for displaying.Lists the available toolbars.Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize dialog box. hide. page 41 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off.

Click Tools > Customize. page 95 Create a New Toolbar 1. Open this dialog box from the main menu bar by clicking View > Toolbars > New. 6. 2. click New. 3. On the New Toolbar dialog box. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. 7. You cannot choose a name for your new toolbar that is already used for another toolbar. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. Toolbar Name . Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. page 95 New Toolbar Dialog Box Creates a new toolbar. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the new toolbar. 4. Show ToolTips . page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 27 . Click View > Toolbars. 5.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Large Buttons . type the name of the new toolbar.Type the name of the new toolbar in the box. page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar.Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. On the Toolbars dialog box. Click OK.Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses over one of them. click the category that contains the command that you want to add.

On the Toolbars tab.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add a Button to a Toolbar 1. Click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. page 314 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Drag the command button from the Buttons area to the toolbar. which lets you define and control settings for the active view. Click View > Toolbars. drag the button that you want to remove from the toolbar into the Buttons area. 2. 2. page 37 • Show Inconsistencies. 3. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View. 2. page 91 Remove a Button From a Toolbar 1. On the main menu bar. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. select the toolbar that you want to restore. page 15 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. click the category that contains the command that you want to add. These tabs logically organize the properties into sets that you can use for manipulating special view qualities. click Tools > Customize. The set of property tabs that are available in the View Properties dialog box depends on the active view. Click the Reset button. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. In the Toolbars dialog box. Note • If you create a new toolbar. you cannot reset it. page 91 Properties Command View > Properties Displays the View Properties dialog box. On the Toolbars tab. page 91 Restore a Customized Toolbar to Its Default Settings 1. 3. page 22 • Save the Settings for the Active View.

Filter Name .Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items. Note • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor. Alternate symbology . • Related Topics Properties Command. Properties . which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view. Browse . page 138 View Properties Dialog Box Controls the display of information in the Drawing view.Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view. then View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box.Opens the Select Filter dialog box. This dialog box allows you to edit a filter for your drawing. Scroll down the list to choose a line width.Opens the Filter Properties dialog box. Filter . This information is read-only. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Properties on the main menu bar. you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology.Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items.Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. Width .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Properties from the shortcut menu. In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing. Color .Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. Scroll down the list to choose a color. You can name the new filter appropriately. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it. page 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 29 . You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

Prevents the display of labels in filtered views of the design. in any view.Allows you to name the Drawing view.Displays the type of view. type. and inconsistency indicators. Notes .Toggles the display of the drawing border on or off.Includes other options for the selection of items in your drawing. then the Do not show labels options is not available since all labels are no longer displayed regardless of the view tab that you are using.Allows you to enter a description of the Drawing view. if you insert a file using Edit > Insert Object and do not want to accidentally select that file in the drawing. Inconsistency indicators . When you select the check box. a Microsoft Word file. View name . Show . for example. Drawing borders .Navigating in the Software: An Overview General Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Displays miscellaneous information about a Drawing view. description. Notes can contain links to a file. grids.Turns the display of inconsistency indicators on or off.Turns the grid display on or off. including the name. drawing borders. page 29 Display Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of items in a Drawing view.Toggles the display of all labels on or off. Select . Related Topics • Properties Command. For example. Prevent selection of inserted objects . Grids . This information is read-only. Do not show labels for filtered items . and readout category. notes. Items that you can display include labels. View type . 30 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Makes inserted foreign data non-locatable in a drawing. Labels . page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box. Description . Claims . the display toggles on for that item.Turns the display of notes on or off. The inserted file appears gray in the drawing.Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view. select this box.Turns on the display of the options selected on the Claims tab. If the display of labels is turned off here.

When you zoom in or out. page 29 Grid Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the behavior of the grid in the view.Allows you to specify fine. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out.Turns the grid display and grid snapping on or off. The choice of grid style affects the option that is available in the Spacing or Density box and the availability of the Index options.Specifies the grid index. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker. page 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 31 . medium.Turns the snap-to-grid feature on or off. the grid lines for a dynamic grid change with the level of magnification. Related Topics • Properties Command. solid grid lines. which is the number of minor grid lines. page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box. page 33 • Properties Command. Grid lines are not printed. This option is available only with the Static grid style.Turns the grid display on or off. Density . You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it. Snap grid . Style . View . Index . Show grid . When you select this option. For a dynamic grid display the number of index lines varies depending on the zoom level.Allows you to specify the space between the grid lines when you choose the Static grid style from the Style list. or coarse levels when you choose the Dynamic grid style from the Style list. page 28 • Show Grid Command. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. too. and so you cannot change the Index list when using the Dynamic grid style.Specifies either Static or Dynamic grid style.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • You can access the View Properties dialog box by right-clicking in space in your drawing and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Spacing .

which appears when you click View > Properties.Displays the possible claim states for all items except invalidly claimed items.Turns the display of warnings on or off. Choose the indicators and severities that you want to view in your drawing.Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view. 32 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For example. The software verifies in real-time if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules defined in Rule Manager. Errors are marked with a Warnings above severity . Not claimed . If you specify a special display for invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view. Again. Open the View Properties dialog box by clicking View > Properties. Approved warnings are marked with . You can specify the severity level. which signify the suitability of design work that you perform while creating the drawing. you can specify the severity level and control the warnings that you see. Invalidly claimed items are items which differ from the Plant items and which you cannot modify and check into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim. page 314 Claims Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Sets options for the display of items in the Drawing view according to their claim states. Related Topics • Properties Command. Approved warnings .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Inconsistency Indicators Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of inconsistency indicators. Claim . page 28 • Show Inconsistencies. Warnings are marked with a . if you specify a severity level of five. Invalid claims .Specifies the display of invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view. Errors above severity . This tab is part of the View Properties dialog box. then these display options override all other options designated in the Claim area of this dialog box. severity of five or above appear.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are not claimed at all. all errors with . Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support shared claiming of database items.Turns the display of approved warnings on or off.Turns the display of errors on or off. Show .Displays the possible claim states and combination of claim states for drawing items. Status .

page 301 • Change the Properties of a Drawing View 1. you can select from any of the Errors. 2. see Related Topics. you can choose special display colors for drawing items according to their claim status. On the Inconsistency Indicator tab. Widths . and Inconsistency indicators options. select the items that you want to display in the view. 4. project status. select the General tab. and options specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Drawing Manager. and Approved warnings options.Allows you to select a color for items with the corresponding claim state. Click View > Properties. if needed. Tip • Claiming items is governed by projects. 3. On the Claims tab. Colors . For more information about claiming items. and you can enter a view name and description.Specifies the special display of drawing items to which this project has the sole claim. 6.Specifies the special display of drawing items when the active project shares a claim on with another project or the Plant. On the Grid tab. On the View Properties dialog box. Warnings.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are claimed solely by other projects or the Plant. Also on the Display tab. select the Prevent selection of inserted objects option if you want to prohibit the selection of linked or embedded objects in the drawing. page 302 • Release a Claim. errors with severity level of 5 or greater are displayed. For example. If your Plant is configured so that it honors only exclusive claiming. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 33 . Claimed only by this project . Shared claims . and the properties of the grid. The View type box is read-only. then these display options will have no effect in the Drawing view. 7. Related Topics Claim a Drawing Item. you can choose the Show grid or Snap grid option. You can select any of the Labels. page 292 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. Notes. Density.Allows you to select a line width for items with the corresponding claim state. and Index options. 5. if you specify 5. For errors and warnings. Filter labels. in the Style. you can specify the severity level of the displayed inconsistencies. On the Display tab. Drawing borders.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claimed only by others . Grids.

the graphical Drawing view is opened on top of the Engineering Data Editor when you select Window > New > Drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor. page 35 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. • Related Topics Open a New Drawing View. then clicking View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box. Related Topics Claiming Items: An Overview. This command copies the contents of the active Drawing view into a new window and displays the contents as graphical items. The new view has the same filters as the previous Drawing view. page 34 New Drawing Window Command Window > New > Drawing Creates a new Drawing view within the active drawing. page 289 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 91 • New Command Window > New Allows you to open a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor window within the Design window. page 35 • New Drawing Window Command. The same drawing data simply displays in the different views. Notes • If only the Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing is open. page 15 • 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can change the view features for the new Drawing window using the commands on the View menu. Creating a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing does not create a new copy or version of the drawing. Related Topics • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu).

and then open the Windows Task Manager. 2. For more information on the Windows Task Manager. In Task Manager search for an extra draft.pid) the new view is named Pipeline. You create new drawings in Drawing Manager. Tip A new Drawing view is not the same as a new drawing. see Microsoft Windows Help. • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. which you can access from the Help > Printable Guides command.pid:3. Edit the drawing as needed. see SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. and so forth. Pipeline.pid:2.exe process. page 34 • Open a New Drawing View 1. quit all SmartPlant applications. For more information. and subsequent new Drawing views are Pipeline. If the software gives indications that a drawing is in use when it is not. • Notes • • You can have as many Drawing views open for a drawing as needed.pid:1. Click Window > New > Drawing. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 35 . Related Topics New Drawing Window Command. Select it and click End Task. Pipeline. When you open a new Drawing view (for example.Navigating in the Software: An Overview New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu) Window > New > Engineering Data Editor Opens the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window and allows you to view and edit model data for a drawing in a tabular format.

page 23 • Zoom In on the Drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Cascade Command Window > Cascade Overlaps windows diagonally across in the Design window. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 24 Tile Horizontally Command Window > Tile Horizontally Arranges windows to fit horizontally in the Design window. page 15 36 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 23 • Zoom Out from an Area. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. You can easily access another open document by clicking one of the window names on the list. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 • Zoom In on an Area. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 Active Window List Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands on the Window menu. page 15 Tile Vertically Command Window > Tile Vertically Arranges windows to fit vertically in the Design window.

Notes • • This command saves all display filters for the active Drawing view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save the Settings for the Active View Click View > Save Settings or right-click a tab at the bottom of the active view and select Save Settings. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 37 . Your settings are automatically saved upon quitting the software.

of the type chosen in the list. which allows you to define the items that you want to see in the EDE. You customize a filter and layout for the display on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. and you can also open the EDE to appear in the Design window. initially only the Active Drawing and Active Drawing Stockpile buttons are selected. The menu buttons are found here: • • • Stockpile Edit View Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to expose the available commands. You can re-query and thereby refresh the EDE display by clicking the Refresh button . If you want to list all items select Plant Item from the list. The EDE is automatically displayed in the lower left of the main window. Finally a summary box displays a comparison between the number of items in the view and the total number of items. that exist in the database. Customizing the EDE Commands on the Edit menu allow you to customize the display of the EDE further.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview The Engineering Data Editor (EDE) uses a grid or tabular format to display the query results for the database. to color code items according to the stockpile that they are currently in. You can use the Display Settings command. The EDE Toolbar At the top of the EDE is the EDE toolbar. for instance. The list on the toolbar contains filters that query the database and display the corresponding items in the EDE. You can also filter the display by using the buttons that correspond to different stockpiles and drawings: • • • • Active Drawing Active Drawing Stockpile Stockpile Other Drawings By default. Use Edit View to display the Table Properties dialog box. 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics Display the Engineering Data Editor. page 41 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. too. The contents of cells can be copied to other cells. If the property has a select list associated with it. Notes • The maximum number of items that can be displayed in the EDE is 65.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Editing Properties in the EDE You can edit some of the properties viewed in the table by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. you cannot edit that cell. The EDE is where you view items in the Stockpile or in a drawing stockpile. page 54 • Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. You can select a entire row by clicking the corresponding icon in the left-most column of the table. If your database query results in more than this number. page 263 Engineering Data Editor Command View > Display > Engineering Data Editor Turns on or off the display of the Engineering Data Editor. • Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. click Related Topics. page 38 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 39 . page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. the Query Results dialog box opens. You can then choose to refine your query in order to generate fewer items or to enter report-only mode and run a report on your query results.537. If the cell is populated by a readonly property or a property that is only automatically generated by validation. For more information. then you choose the value from the select list. if the cell contents are compatible. Then you can view the properties in the Properties window and edit item properties there.

equal to.Allows you to choose between refining your query or entering report-only mode. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Rows Returned . Edit . Match any .Allows you to use the Additional Filter Criteria list in this dialog box to refine your query in order to display an allowed number of items in the view. Property . Save view. Delete . and so forth. and Plant Reports. Options . Operator . Continue with this query so that I can generate a plant or personal report Causes the Engineering Data Editor to enable only these commands: Edit view. This option is useful when creating a report for large data sets such as an entire plant database.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. an operator.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. Delete view. Additional Filter Criteria . for example. Add . Relationships include.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Match any is the default matching method. <>.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. >. and Estimated Length. Instrument Loop Item Tag. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. Refine Query Definition . 40 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . greater than.Displays the number of items that your query returned. and a value. Examples of properties include Equipment Type. My Reports.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.Displays the currently allowed number of items in the Engineering Data Editor. You can either refine your query or run a report with your query results. =. Match all . not equal to. Maximum Allowed .Displays all new criteria to add to the current filter.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Query Results Dialog Box Displays options for continuing your work in the Engineering Data Editor when you have requested more information than can appear in the interface. To add to or modify the definition list.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.

page 38 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 154 • Remove an Item from a Drawing.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. page 15 • Stockpile Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile Contains commands for moving and deleting items. %. Do not use an asterisk. as a wildcard character for a single character. ?. page 251 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 41 . page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. which can be free text. page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. you must type a value. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 59 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor again. You can type a percent sign. Tip • To close the Engineering Data Editor. or choose null. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. Click the down-arrow next to the Stockpile menu to display the available commands. page 265 • Place Multiple Representations. *. in the Value box. page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model. Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Value . Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. or type a question mark. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 58 Display the Engineering Data Editor Click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor.

The Move to Different Stockpile dialog box opens. page 38 • Place Multiple Representations. Multiple representations are available only for some types of equipment. That is the item and its properties are deleted from the database and can no longer be placed in a drawing. page 251 Move to Different Stockpile Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Move to Different Stockpile Allows you to move a stockpile item from one stockpile to another. page 154 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. you can move an item from the Stockpile into the stockpile for your active drawing if you know the item belongs in that drawing but are not yet ready to place the item. regardless of symbol settings in Options Manager or Catalog Manager. page 38 42 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Similarly you can move an item in the Drawing Stockpile to the Stockpile so that it can be used in other drawings. For instance. page 152 Delete Stockpile Item Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Delete Stockpile Item Removes the stockpile item from the plant model completely.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Place Multiple Representation Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Place Multiple Representation Allows you to place a second instance of an equipment item in a second drawing. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. This multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. page 265 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. You can even move items from one drawing stockpile to another. page 245 • Remove an Item from the Model. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing.

You can also invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project. page 87 Paste Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Paste Places the value from the Clipboard into the selected cell.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Edit Allows you to copy and paste values from one cell to another cell in the Engineering Data Editor and to select all the items in the view in order to create a select set. Values placed on the Clipboard remain there until newer values are copied over them. then the Paste command is not available. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. If the cell is read-only. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project. You must have previously placed a value on the Clipboard in order to paste it. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 87 • Select All Command. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 44 • Select an Item. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 43 . You can also release a claim at any time and you can determine the validity of a claim. page 289 • Copy Command. Click the down-arrow next to the Edit menu button to display the available commands. page 147 Copy Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Copy Places the value in the currently selected cell onto the Clipboard so that you can paste it somewhere else. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. This command does not remove the value from the selected table cell. page 43 • Paste Command. page 43 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties.

allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments. The Claim dialog box opens. page 144 • Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project. A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. Related Topics Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. page 289 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 289 • Release a Claim. Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed. page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview. You can create a select set using this command.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Select All Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Select All Chooses all the items in the active Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 87 • Select an Item. page 301 44 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes.

page 61 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 45 . page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. page 54 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. and so forth. page 57 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to display the commands. release the claims to items. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. page 56 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. page 64 • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. page 58 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. page 302 View Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > View Displays the commands that help you customize and manipulate the layout and content of the Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box.

page 38 Table Properties Dialog Box Enables you to select the item types. Filter . Item type . and you can further modify the layout and create custom filters for your Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View.Displays the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items are displayed. where you can define and save filters or layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View.Lists all the item types that you can select (for example. This dialog box appears when you right-click an existing table and select Edit View. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor.Lists all of the layouts that have been saved for the selected item type. equipment or motors). page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. For a list of default layouts. page 46 • 46 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If you click Advanced on this dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Edit View Opens the Table Properties dialog box. Brief and bulk properties appear in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties. where you can access options to specify the tabular display. Copy Bulk Properties. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 50. filters. Advanced . see Default Table Layouts. page 53 • Edit View Command. Specify brief and bulk properties in this dialog box.Lists all of the filters that have been saved for the selected item type. You can specify the default filter and layout for a certain item type also. the Advanced Table Properties dialog box opens. too. Layout .

Examples of properties include revision number and name.Includes areas to add. Match all . Add . This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. as it is defined in Filter Manager. Base filter . and a value. page 46 Filter Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to define.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. which allows you to select a base filter. Related Topics • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. Property . select. This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. Definition . and save a filter for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. Delete . page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. and save filters and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property.Indicates if the named filter is the default filter for the item type selected on the Table Properties dialog box. or edit filter criteria. select.Displays options that allow you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. Default . Match any is the default matching method.Displays the name of a saved filter. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 47 . Edit . Name .Opens the Select Filter dialog box.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. remove.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Match any .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box Allows you to define. Browse . an operator.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. page 53 • Edit View Command.Displays the name of the filter. You can change a filter to the default by selecting this box.

Lists the property display types associated with the Properties window.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. Default . Layout names must be unique. Note • Saving a layout is not the same as saving a view in the Engineering Data Editor. select.Indicates whether the named layout is the default layout for the item type on the Table Properties dialog box. Relationships include. <>. as a wildcard character for a single character.Displays the name of a saved layout. Copy Bulk Properties. *. and Brief/Bulk. Bulk. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. The selected item type and display properties define what appears in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties. which can be free text. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. not equal to. You can type a percent sign. In order for your choice in the Usage box to take effect. %. you must exit and reenter the design software. For more information about saving views.Saves the data in this dialog box as a named layout. You can designate a layout as the default by checking this box and then clicking Save. or choose null.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. greater than. ?. =. for example. Save . Name . and save a layout for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. Options include a blank value. in the Value box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Operator . as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. page 52 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View.Removes the named layout. Brief. Value . you can select any of the layouts in the list. Delete (Name) . You can enter a new layout name and then click Save to save the layout for re-use. Or. see Save an Engineering Data Editor View 48 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you must type a value. >. Do not use an asterisk. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. equal to. or type a question mark. Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. Usage . page 54 Layout Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Define. and so forth.

Sort Property . Moving a row down either moves a display column to the right or moves a sort order down. its order. Moving a row up either moves a display column to the left or moves a sort order up. page 54 • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu).Displays a list of all the properties that apply to the item type defined in the Table Properties dialog box. the Edit group allows you to edit the property and the caption. Delete (Definition) . The buttons to the right act upon the active list view. If you select an entry in the Sort Property view. Property .Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor. you can specify the property. depending on the row you have selected. depending on the row you have selected. order and type. Display Property . This group contains two list views.Lists the sort orders Ascending and Descending. the Edit group allows you to edit the property. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. Related Topics • Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box.Adds a new entry at the end of the existing entries and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 47 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Caption (Definition) . In order to add to or modify either list. Type . You can select one. If you select an entry in the Display Property view. you can specify the property and its caption. You select one.Removes the currently selected entry.Moves the currently selected entry up one line. Up .Moves the currently selected entry down one line. If you select an entry in the Sort Property view. To edit an entry. Insert . Edit . If you select an entry in the Display Property view.Lists the columns that appear in the Engineering Data Editor. Caption (Edit) . Add . select it and modify the property in the Edit group.Places a new entry above the currently selected entry and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. page 35 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 49 .Displays all defined criteria associated with the selected layout.Allows you to edit a single entry selected in either the Display Property or Sort Property list views.Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor.Lists the sort types Numeric and Alphanumeric. Order .Lists the properties that apply to the item type specified in the Table Properties dialog box. Down .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Definition . and its type.

You can use them to base your own layouts on by changing the layout name.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Default Table Layouts The software includes several default layouts. and saving under a new name. Different layouts are included with SmartPlant Electrical and SmartPlant P&ID. adding or deleting properties. SmartPlant Electrical • • • • • • • • • • • • Default Battery Bank List Default Bus List Default Cable List Default Circuit List Default Circuit Breaker List Default Control Stations List Default Document List Default Generator List Default Load List Motor List Default PDB List Default Reference Cable List Area Break Drawing Equipment Equipment Component Exchanger Mechanical Equipment Other Vessel Instrument Instrument Loop Item Note Nozzle OPC Package SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 50 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 51 . page 53 Define a New Engineering Data Editor View 1. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. Select a filter from the Filter list. 4. On the Table Properties dialog box. you can define a filter on the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. select an item type from the Item Type list. 2. If you do not find a layout that you want under Layout. Notes • If you do not find a filter that you want under Filter. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. The Table Properties dialog box opens. Click Window > New > Table. right-click the table and select Edit View. you can define a layout on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. To modify an existing table. 3. Select a layout from the Layout list.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • • • • • • • • Pipe Run Piping Component Plant Item Plant Item Group Other Representation Safety Class Signal Run System Related Topics • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box.

Click OK on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box and again on the Table Properties dialog box so that the software can populate your table. 9. populate the Definition box with properties and values. To add more entries. Select a property. 3. • 4. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. operator. repeat steps 4 and 5. if necessary. 6. such as greater than and not equal to. 8.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View 1. you can save that definition: Save an Engineering Data Editor View. On the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. • Tip Check Default if you want this filter to be the default for the item type that you selected on the Table Properties dialog box. 2. To further define a filter. Click either Match all or Match any. the Operator list displays all the possible relationships. Tip The Property list displays properties that apply to your item type. page 56 52 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Browse if you want to search for a filter or create a new filter (either simple or compound) using the Select Filter dialog box. • 7. Click Delete if you want to delete the current row in the Definition box. You can click Add to add another line to the Definition box. 5. Tip You can open the Table Properties dialog box by right-clicking the Engineering Data Editor and choosing Edit View from the shortcut menu. specify a name for the filter in the Base filter box. the Value list displays the specific properties that you can filter for. Tip • After you have defined a specific filter for your Engineering Data Editor. and value in the Edit group.

click Delete if you want to delete the layout. 5. order. Click Add to add a blank line to the Display Property list. 7.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. • Tip Select Default if you want this layout to be the default table layout for the item type. Tip You can right-click an existing Engineering Data Editor and select Edit View to open the Table Properties dialog box. click Add to add an entry. In the Sort Property list. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 53 . However. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager environment. 3. and then specify the property and caption in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. page 91 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. populate the Definition box with display and sort properties. you lose that information. On the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. and type in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. Tip • To change the sort order of the properties in the Engineering Data Editor. Then select the property. To add and define more display properties. select a row in the Sort Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. Project Filters should not be created at a satellite site because when you synchronize reference data. Tip To change the display order of the columns in the Engineering Data Editor. • 8. which you specify on the Table Properties dialog box. To add and define more sort properties. select a row in the Display Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. Click Save if you want to save the layout in order to apply it to another Engineering Data Editor. page 38 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor 1. specify a name for the layout. To further define a layout. 6. • 4. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 2. repeat step 7. repeat step 5.

you lose that information. page 38 Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View 1. If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. page 38 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Review and edit the item type. For more information. filter. 2. which can be either Display Property or Sort Property. see Save an Engineering Data Editor View. 3. page 53 4. If you want to customize a filter or layout click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. and Move Down buttons apply to the active list view. you should not store custom layouts for the Engineering Data Editor because when you synchronize reference data. layout and all. In the Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • The Add. • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. For more information. To save the view layout. and layout on the Table Properties dialog box. you can save it if you want to apply it to another view of the Engineering Data Editor. specify a name in the Name box and click Save on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. click the View menu and select Edit View. Insert. page 56 • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. see Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. page 52 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Move Up. You can also name and save the entire Engineering Data Editor. Notes • After defining a layout. Click OK to display the modified view. Delete.

These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. which applies to the currently active EDE. page 55 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 55 .Provides space for you to type in the name of your custom view. Name . page 56 • Save View Command.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Save View Opens the Save View dialog box. This name. page 56 Save View Dialog Box Allows you to specify a name for your custom Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Save View in the EDE. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. is displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar with other saved views. which allows you to name and save the current Engineering Data Editor. page 38 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. Related Topics • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save an Engineering Data Editor View 1. you can change a layout that applies not only to a standard view but also to a saved view. You can change filters and layouts by using the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. That is. There are several ways to customize your EDE: Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 38 56 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For more information. After you customize the Engineering Data Editor (EDE). and layout. too. and this action applies to any EDE that refers to those table properties. Notes • An EDE view is a combination of item type. page 64 • • • The EDE is where you can display stockpile items. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. see Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. click View > Save View on the EDE toolbar. filter. page 54 Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. Tip • You can reactivate your saved view any time from the bottom of the filter list on the EDE toolbar. You can delete a saved view. 2. page 57. and the new layout is reflected in both views of the EDE. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Enter a name for your view in the Name box.

• Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items can be displayed. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Click View > Delete View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 57 . These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineer Data Editor toolbar under Saved Views. page 57 • Delete View Command. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Delete View in the EDE. The Delete View dialog box opens. Name . 2. Select the view that you want to delete from the Name list in the Delete View dialog box. Tip Saved views are displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. and you can choose the view that you want to delete from a list of saved views. page 57 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. It no longer appears in the filter list in the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Delete View Allows you to delete a view if you have stored a custom Engineering Data Editor view.Lists the saved views. page 38 Delete View Dialog Box Lets you choose a saved custom Engineering Data Editor and delete it. page 57 Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View 1. Choose one and click OK to delete that view.

page 58 • Update the Engineering Data Editor Click Refresh Note • on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. The Engineering Data Editor is not updated automatically: you must update it by using the Refresh command manually. The database can change all the time. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 38 58 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. This command queries the database and builds a new view with new results.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Refresh Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Refresh Updates the display in the Engineering Data Editor.

page 61 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 59 . By specifying the display settings. and you can create unique layouts with exactly the properties that you want to see. page 64 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. for instance. in exactly the order that you want to see them. you can define the font that Stockpile items appear in.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview You can change the content and layout of the Engineering Data Editor rather extensively. too. You can create your own filters to narrowly define the contents of the view. Once you have defined and edited a view. You can control the scrolling of the Engineering Data Editor with the Freeze Panes command. if necessary. By using the AutoFilter feature. Related Topics Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. you can quickly limit the number of items that are displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Several methods to customize the look of the Engineering Data Editor exist. you can save it and also delete it later. page 54 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. You can clarify the cells that are read-only and the cells that allow you to enter new property information or modify existing information.

and so forth. arrows appear at the top of each column. Select this command again to deactivate it. you need to use the Edit View command and enter options on the Table Properties dialog box and the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. use the AutoFilter command (click the arrow at the top of the Eq Subclass column and choose vertical drums). Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. if the Engineering Data Editor displays Equipment: Vessels. To create more elaborate filters and displays. Click the arrow at the top of the column that contains the data that you want to filter on and choose the value from the list that appears. The Boolean or is less restrictive than the and. equals.Allows you to add another comparison using the Boolean operator sense of and: this means all criteria must be met. page 60 • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. is greater than. Open this dialog box by clicking View > AutoFilter > Custom in the EDE. And . page 61 Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box Sets options for the behavior of the AutoFilter as it controls the display of items in the Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview AutoFilter Command Engineering Data Editor > View > AutoFilter Allows you to filter the items displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. begins with.Lists the available comparisons: for example.Lists the available values currently stored in the column. Or . Comparison operator . Value . page 64 • 60 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For instance.Allows you to add another comparison in the Boolean sense of or: this means any one of the criteria must be met. Related Topics AutoFilter Command. does not equal. When you click AutoFilter. page 38 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. but you want to see only vertical drums.

page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. To display rows that meet either one condition or another condition. The Custom AutoFilter dialog box opens. choose that criterion from the list that is displayed. In the second comparison operator and value boxes. You can choose Blanks or NonBlanks from the list in order to display items that either have no value in the column or do have a value in the column. enter the comparison operator and value that you want. Do one of the following: • • To match one criterion. and then click the Or button on the Custom AutoFilter dialog box. To display rows that meet two conditions. Enter the comparison operator and value that you want. • • • Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. 2. Turn AutoFilter on by clicking View > AutoFilter on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. enter the operator and value that you want. In the second comparison operator and value boxes. and then click the And button. respectively. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 61 . Click the down-arrow at the top of the column you want to filter values for. choose Custom from the list. Tip Click View > AutoFilter again to turn the AutoFilter feature off.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor 1. enter the operator and value that you want.

page 38 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For example. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. but you want to always see the item tag as you scroll to the right end of the rows to view the supplier. the first column can contain the item tag. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. You can choose that read-only cells are filled with a special background color. and you can specify the font that items in the Stockpile are listed in. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. You can accomplish this layout by using the Freeze Panes command.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Freeze Panes Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Freeze Panes Allows you to scroll through the Engineering Data Editor while keeping the display of specified rows and columns constant. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. which allows you to specify various display options for the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. page 38 Display Settings Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Display Settings Opens the Display Settings dialog box. you can choose the size of icon that is displayed in the view. For instance.

respectively. or Other Drawings. When you select one of these options. page 64 • Display Settings Command. these settings apply to item properties.Allows you to specify either the font or background color.Contains settings that apply to rows in the view.Causes large icons to appear in the view. Icon size in table . depending on Color whether you are specifying this property in the Row area or the Column area. these settings apply to individual items.Causes the font to be bold for items selected from the Item list. .Causes the font to be italicized for items selected from the Item list.Allows you to specify large or small icons for the display in the far left column of the view. that is.Allows you to choose a background color for read-only table cells. Italic Bold . Open this dialog box by clicking View > Display Settings in the EDE.Causes small icons to appear in the view. the remaining options in the Row area then pertain to that location. that is.Contains settings that apply to columns in the view. Row . page 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 63 . .Lists the different locations of items: Active Drawing.Sets the font for the items selected from the Item list. Stockpile. Small . You can subsequently select another option from the Item list and define fonts and colors for those items and so on until you have specified the appearance for all locations in the Item list. Read/write properties .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Settings Dialog Box Sets options for the display of icons and rows and columns in the Engineering Data Editor. Font . Active Drawing Stockpile. Large . Item . Column .Allows you to choose a background color for the table cells that you can edit in the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. Read-only properties .

select the row below where you want the split to appear. To do so. select the column to the right of where you want the split to appear. 4. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. and the specify font. page 54 • • Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. For more information. page 38 64 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can totally redefine the content and layout of your Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor 1. • 5. To freeze the top horizontal pane. Specify a special background color for read/write properties. 2. too. Click View > Display Settings on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. To freeze the left vertical pane. Choose an item type in the Item list. Tip You can specify this display information for each of the four types of items in the Item list. follow these steps: 1. and color that you want these items to be displayed in. too. click the cell below and to the right of where you want the split to appear. 3. Specify a special background color for read-only properties. Notes • You can also customize the Engineering Data Editor by using the AutoFilter feature. page 61 You can use the Freeze Panes feature. style. Click View > Freeze Panes on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. 2. see Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. On the Display Settings dialog box. For more information. And by clicking View > Edit View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. see Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. To freeze both the upper and left panes. if you want. choose large or small icons.

Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 66 Catalog Explorer Command View > Display > Catalog Explorer Turns the display of Catalog Explorer on or off. In the List view. You can browse the catalog tree view for drawing items that you need and create bookmarks for important categories. You also use the List view to select catalog items before placing them in a drawing or in a stockpile. page 65 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 65 . page 66 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Catalog Explorer replaces the paper catalog with an electronic equivalent. These toolbar buttons are located at the top of the tree view. You can create a navigation bar in the region between the tree and list views for shortcuts to places throughout the catalog. the Catalog Explorer resembles a manufacturer catalog with pictures of parts to build a plant.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview Catalog Explorer is an interface to view and manipulate an electronic catalog containing drawing symbols and their associated properties. page 66 • Rename a Catalog Node. Catalog Explorer consists of two main views: the Tree view and the List view. page 80 • Create a Custom Catalog. you can search for items or browse through the catalog and bookmark certain pages and sections. you can view the nodes of the catalog file system and open or close the nodes to see the contents. page 75 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. page 72 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. Related Topics Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. The paper catalog contains many items arranged in sections. Conceptually. Toolbar buttons carry out commands and allow you to customize the tree and list views to suit your work session. In the Tree view. you see the contents of the opened node.

Tip Or. Click View > Display > Catalog Explorer. Use Catalog Explorer to view the symbol catalog and its contents and manipulate catalog items. Find the catalog node in the Tree view. whereas. Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. you can drag the required item from Catalog Explorer into the Drawing view. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. You can place labels with one-point placement or two-point placement. You can enter values for properties of the placed item by clicking the item. click the symbol that you want to place. items placed from the Catalog Explorer list view remain in that view. click View > Toolbars and select Catalog. to select the appropriate placement for the item. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 2. depending on the label. page 186 Place a Two-Point Label. or PickQuick. Or. and then selecting Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. 3. page 188 • • • 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . However. Place a One-Point Label. • Notes • The procedure for placing items from the Catalog Explorer list view is similar to that of placing items from a stockpile. they disappear from the stockpile. Select and place the item in the appropriate place in the drawing. In the Catalog Explorer list view. when you place items from the stockpile. If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. you can use the Configuration tool. 2. Click Esc to quit placement mode. 4.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off 1. page 65 Place an Item from Catalog Explorer 1. Tips • You can also right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Catalog from the shortcut menu.

page 14 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. For more information. page 265. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. see Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. From the shortcut menu. page 187 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. choose either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. For more information. right-click the symbol that you want to add to the stockpile. page 238 • One-Point Label Placement. Tip Or you can double-click a node name in the Catalog Explorer tree view to expand the node. Select the appropriate node in the symbol library in order to display catalog symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. page 150 • Two-Point Label Placement. page 267. In the Catalog Explorer tree view. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 67 . In the Catalog Explorer list view. 2. click "+" by the node containing the appropriate symbol library. page 65 Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer 1.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. too. 4. • 3. page 184 • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. page 146 • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. Items remain in the stockpile until you place them in a drawing or delete them from the stockpile. depending on the stockpile that you want to place the item in. Notes • You can import a spreadsheet in a recognized format into a stockpile to populate it. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing.

and cancel the selection of the Catalog Explorer option. Also. page 70 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. page 75 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. Note • The list of commands that are available on the Catalog menu depends on whether the Tree view or the List view is active. page 82 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Close the Catalog Explorer Window Right-click the main toolbar area. you can search for catalog items. page 70 Find Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Find Displays the Find dialog box. Or toggle the display of Catalog Explorer back off by clicking the icon on the main toolbar: • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview Catalog Explorer > Catalog The Catalog menu in Catalog Explorer provides access to commands that allow you to manipulate list view items and tree view nodes in the Catalog Explorer. Tips • Or use the menu command Close when you right-click in the tree view of Catalog Explorer. page 65 68 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The Find dialog box allows you to search the catalog for a specific item or group of items. page 68 • Rename a Catalog Item. page 82 • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 76 • Rename a Catalog Node.

Specifies the class of item for which you want to search. You can type an asterisk. allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library to display in the Look In box. page 68 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. New Search . or type a question mark. "*".Starts a search of the symbol library defined in the Look In: box. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. You can drag catalog items from this area into a My Catalog set of items in the Catalog Explorer tree view. as a wildcard character for a single character.Opens the Explore Elsewhere dialog box. Results List . "%".Ends the current search. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. Class . or select a drive from this list and use the tree that is displayed below to find the location you want. Related Topics • Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box.Clears all search criteria in preparation for a new search. page 69 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. "?". Look in . page 70 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 69 . Find Now . You can type a percent sign. Look In . Related Topics Find Command. allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library.Enter the location from which you want to view symbol information.Lists the items that met the defined search criteria.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box Allows you to search the active catalog for a specific item based on user-defined search criteria. "?". Stop . Named . Browse .Specifies the name of the item for which you want to search. page 70 Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box Opens when you click Browse on the Catalog Explorer Find dialog box.Specifies the drive or folder that contains the symbol library that you want to search. as a wildcard character for a single character. Open this dialog box by clicking File > Find in the Catalog Explorer. or type a question mark.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer 1. However. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the File menu button accesses a list of the associated commands. Click Find Now to start the search with the defined criteria. 2. as a wildcard in either the Named or Class options to broaden the scope of your search. page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. • . On the Find dialog box. 3. page 69 • Catalog Menu: An Overview. • Note • Items found by the search appear at the bottom of the Find dialog box. Tip You can use the asterisk. On the Catalog Explorer Catalog menu Tip The Tree view must be the active view in Catalog Explorer for the Find command to be available on the File menu. you can save the set of current search results to use later by dragging them into a My Catalog folder or subfolder in the Catalog Explorer Tree view. *. Related Topics • Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box. page 74 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 82 • Delete a Catalog Item. page 68 New Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > New Creates a new item or adds a node under the selected node in the Catalog Explorer. You can select one or more items by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. fill in the Name & Class options. click Find. page 65 • 70 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Clicking the File menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the File menu. but you cannot place an item directly onto a design from this results window. Related Topics Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button.

page 71 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar 1. your symbol toolbars can streamline your work considerably. Tip • The new toolbar appears on the left side of the window. You can define up to two levels of toolbars. Plant-level symbol toolbars are created in Catalog Explorer. to create symbol toolbars. When you add all the new symbols you want to the new toolbar. 2. For example. 5. A divider appears in the symbol toolbar between levels. 4. You create plant-level toolbars in Catalog Manager. Notes • • You can dock the symbols toolbars on any side of the main window. you can create a Vessels node under Toolbars. • • Related Topics • Designing Symbol Toolbars. 7. Drag symbols from the list view and drop them into the new toolbar in the tree view. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 71 . Name the new toolbar. page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. In the Catalog Explorer list view. 6. right-click the tree view and click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. You must have the proper permissions. Click New on the shortcut menu. or piping symbols. In the Catalog Explorer tree view. With the most often used equipment. Right-click the Toolbars node under My Catalog. you create user-level toolbars in either Catalog Manager or SmartPlant P&ID. The symbol toolbars can be docked on any side of the main window. Symbol toolbars can be plant-level or user-level. for example. instrumentation. whereas. find symbols you want to place on your new symbol toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Designing Symbol Toolbars Symbols toolbars allow you to create toolbars that contain the symbols you use most frequently. and under Vessels you can create Vertical and Horizontal. page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. keeping them conveniently located for easy access. 3. open the My Catalog node. Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

From the shortcut menu. select it in the tree view and right-click. New Category is selected so that you can rename it. Use the My Catalog folder only for shortcuts to symbols in the plant catalog. click Rename. page 68 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the shortcut menu. You can drag selected items to a custom catalog from the Find dialog box. If the symbols reside on your computer.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Create a Custom Catalog 1. Notes • To rename a node. • Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. Right-click the tree view. 3. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. other users cannot view the symbols when they open that drawing on another workstation. • 5. Click the My Catalog node in the Catalog Explorer tree view. Type a new name for the node. Type a name for the category. click New. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. Caution • Do not move symbols to the My Catalog folder on your computer using Windows Explorer. 4. Navigate through the tree view to display in the list view a group of items that you want to add to the custom catalog. page 65 Open Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Open Opens the Catalog Explorer window. which opens when you click Find on the Catalog Explorer File menu. 7. Select the items that you want to add to the custom catalog from the list view. Tip The software adds a subcategory called New Category to the My Catalog node. 2. 6. Drag the selected items from the list view to the appropriate category or subcategory of the My Catalog portion of the tree view.

You can then modify the properties of the cloned symbol. page 73 Clone a Catalog Item 1.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clone Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Clone Creates a copy of the selected catalog item. Click the item you want to copy in the Catalog Explorer List view. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. The software places a copy of the selected item in the List view. the software copies all of the graphics and associated properties for the original symbol to the new. Related Topics • Clone Command. When you clone an existing symbol. page 73 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 73 . cloned symbol. When you create a new symbol. On Catalog Explorer File menu. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. you may or may not be able to clone items from certain catalogs. you must define all of the graphics and properties for the new symbol. 2. click Clone. Note • Cloning symbols differs from creating new symbols. Related Topics • Clone a Catalog Item.

On the File menu .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Delete Removes the selected item from the Catalog Explorer list view or catalog node from the tree view. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. click Delete. Important • Depending on your editing permissions. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 65 74 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you are able to delete nodes in certain catalogs. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. you are able to delete items from certain catalogs. Click the custom catalog node that you want to delete in the Catalog Explorer Tree view. Note • You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that reside under a node before you can delete the node itself. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected node. page 74 Delete a Catalog Node 1. 3. You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that populate a node before you can delete the node itself. • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Delete a Catalog Item. 2. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges.

2. Type the new name for the custom catalog node. Important • Depending on your editing permissions.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete a Catalog Item 1. you can delete items from certain catalog. 3. Click the custom catalog node that you want to rename in the Catalog Explorer tree view. click Rename. you can rename nodes in certain catalogs. click Delete. 2. Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 75 . See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected item. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. page 65 Rename a Catalog Node 1. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 65 Rename Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Rename Allows you to type a new name for the item or node. 3. click the custom catalog item that you want to delete. On the File menu . On the File menu . In the Catalog Explorer List view. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview.

Enter the new name for the catalog item. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. Related Topics Designing Symbol Toolbars. page 65 Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Refresh Symbol Toolbar Activates plant. click the custom catalog item that you want to rename. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Rename a Catalog Item 1. page 71 Activate Symbol Toolbars 1. page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. you can rename items in Catalog Explorer. click Rename. On the shortcut menu. Right-click in the Catalog Explorer tree view. page 71 • Designing Symbol Toolbars. click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. 3. page 65 • Close Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Close Closes the Catalog Explorer window. In the Catalog Explorer list view. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. 2. 2. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. On the File menu . Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars.or user-level symbol toolbars or updates the symbol toolbars to incorporate any modifications to a toolbar. page 68 76 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.

Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 213 Send to Drawing Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Drawing Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Active Drawing Stockpile. page 213 View Menu Catalog Explorer > View The Catalog Explorer View menu provides commands that allow you to control the display format of catalog items within the Catalog Explorer list view. page 78 Large Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Large Icons Displays larger icons and names horizontally in the list view and does not list details. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 77 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Send to Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Stockpile. page 178 • Place a Package. page 178 • Place a Package. This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing. This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop.

Options include • . and file location for an item. Choose the display of items in your list view. In Catalog Explorer click the down-arrow on the View menu 2. page 78 List Command Catalog Explorer > View > List Displays smaller icons with names vertically using multiple columns in the list view and does not list details. page 78 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.Displays the icon and name for an item in the list view in a simple list. page 78 Details Command Catalog Explorer > View > Details Displays smaller icons with names and source information vertically in a single column in the list view. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View.Displays the icon. List .Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a smaller format. page 77 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Details . Small Icons .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Small Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Small Icons Displays smaller icons with names horizontally in the list view and does not list file locations. name. page 65 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View 1. • • • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Large Icons . Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 65 • View Menu.Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a larger format.

These buttons reside on the navigation bar between the tree and list view in the Catalog Explorer window. you can use the symbol toolbar. Then when you open Catalog Explorer and click this shortcut button. you want to make a shortcut button to the Process Lines node.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) Catalog Explorer > Navigation The Navigation menu in Catalog Explorer provides commands that allow you to control the display and assignment of shortcut buttons within the Catalog Explorer. page 81 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 79 . Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. shortcut buttons are shortcuts to catalog nodes only. All of the commands for managing your shortcut buttons are found on the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu. you open the node for the piping and all the piping types appear in the list view. Also. if your workflow requires you to route a lot of piping. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. The software does not limit the number of shortcut buttons that you can create. Shortcut buttons provide shortcuts that bookmark a node in the active Tree view of Catalog Explorer. but you are limited by the size of the Catalog Explorer window. If you want to make a shortcut to a particular symbol that you use a lot. Consequently you save the time and effort of browsing the catalog node structure in the tree view in order to find the node that you want to open in the list view. For example. page 80 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer.

page 91 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer. click Add Button to create a shortcut button for the currently selected node. In the tree view. 3. page 65 Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar 1. remove. Clicking on the Navigation menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Add Button Adds a shortcut button to Catalog Explorer for the active tree view node. you can add a shortcut button to the nozzles node of the Catalog Explorer tree view by selecting Nozzles in the tree view and then choosing Add Button from the menu that appears when you click the downarrow of the Navigation menu. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the Navigation menu button above accesses a list of the associated commands. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. 2. For example. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Verify that shortcut buttons are set to appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views of Catalog Explorer by clicking the down-arrow on the Navigation menu and making sure that Show Buttons is selected. select the node that you want a shortcut to. On the Navigation menu. page 80 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 81 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Note • You can right-click any shortcut button to display options to add. page 65 80 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You must also select the Show Buttons option in the menu in order for your shortcut button to appear between the tree view and list view windows of Catalog Explorer. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. if you frequently select nozzles. and show buttons.

Related Topics • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Remove Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Remove Button Removes the active shortcut button from the list of shortcut buttons in Catalog Explorer. Tip • Or you can right-click any shortcut button and select Remove Button from its shortcut menu. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 81 . page 65 Show Buttons Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Show Buttons Causes shortcut buttons to appear on the navigation bar between the tree view and the list view of Catalog Explorer. click Remove Button to delete the active shortcut button from the navigation bar. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 65 Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu . page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.

After customization you can control the content and display of components in the Catalog Explorer window. click on the File menu button (not the down-arrow) and the Find command is carried out again. click Show Buttons. page 65 82 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 82 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 82 Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button 1. 2. For example. Click the toolbar button itself. see Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. A check mark next to the menu item indicates that shortcut buttons appear in Catalog Explorer. the Find command on the File menu. and that most recent command from the menu is carried out. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. For example. click an available command. you can control the display of icons in the list view and define shortcut buttons that allow you easy access to user-defined groups of catalog items. page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Note • You must first define a shortcut button in order to display it. page 80 • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). and Navigation menus.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu Tip • . 3. View. the icon located next to the menu button. For more information. Click the down-arrow portion of a Catalog Explorer toolbar button to open the associated menu. Related Topics • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview. The software assigns the selected command to the Catalog Explorer toolbar button. On the menu. The buttons appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views. page 80. for example. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. The commands on these menus allow you to customize the Catalog Explorer. page 65 Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview The Catalog Explorer toolbar buttons access the Catalog Explorer File.

then only the common properties appear. page 90 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 83 . An item and the properties that belong to it are associated when the item is created in Catalog Manager. Notes • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. You can display item properties by locating the appropriate item in the Selected Items list. component types. page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window. If your select set contains components of different types. If the selected items have different values for their common properties. • • • Related Topics Copy Bulk Properties. If you copy or paste values in the grid area. then the Selected Items list contains the choice Select Set as well as individual items in the set. or all components are of the same type. all the properties of that type of component appear. The active items always determine the content of the Properties window. You can use the Copy Bulk Properties and Paste Bulk Properties buttons to copy properties from one item to another. the value box is blank. but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. If only one component is selected. or Edit > Cut to modify property values in this grid. or when you must apply changes to more than one item. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window. You can modify the values for properties in the Properties window. as well as by selecting an item in the Design window. You can only have one Properties window open. When you pause your pointer over the buttons on the Properties window toolbar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Properties Window: An Overview The Properties window display is a two-column table that provides the common properties of the current selection in the active Design window. Edit > Paste. giving the name of the button. for instance. This action can be particularly useful when correcting inconsistencies. or assemblies. At the top of the Properties window is the Selected Items list. If more than one item is selected in the Design window. page 89 • Show Brief Properties. use Ctrl+C and Crtl+V. a ToolTip appears. page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. You can display and edit relationships that involve components. Do not use the Edit > Copy. which itemizes all of the selected objects individually and as a select set.

Displays properties grouped by specific categories. You must have previously selected an item or items and copied bulk properties.Pastes copied bulk properties onto the newly selected item or items. and so forth.Displays a list of case conditions. see Paste Bulk Properties. pressures. Paste Bulk Properties . Show Case Data . page 144 Properties Window Toolbar You can customize the display of the Properties window by using the following Properties window toolbar buttons: Alphabetic .Copies the bulk properties of a selected item. The applicable properties of an item are defined when it is created in Catalog Manager. pipe runs or instruments. temperatures. To see the case data that appears for corresponding items. This option helps avoid confusion between empty cells and cells containing a zero. see Copy Bulk Properties.Lists properties in alphabetical order.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Window Command View > Display > Properties Opens the Properties window and displays characteristics for a selected item or a select set. for example. according to relevance. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. You can review and edit the properties. which are displayed for equipment. Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties. Show Brief Properties . Copy Bulk Properties . For more information. 84 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 87 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.Displays those properties that have been previously specified as brief on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. look in Data Dictionary Manager. too. For more information. The properties are then available to paste onto other items. Case data includes both process cases and control cases. Display Null . Categorized .Displays a null value in blank properties that currently contain no value. Note • You can display the Properties window by clicking View > Display > Properties Window.

but you can change those properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Or right-click an item. page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. and select Properties. page 83 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 85 . Use the Properties window to view and edit item properties. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. The item characteristics appear in the Properties window. Tip • Another method for displaying the Properties window is to right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Properties from the shortcut menu. • Related Topics Properties Window Toolbar. 2. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 89 • Show Brief Properties. page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window. Click View > Display > Properties Window. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window. page 90 Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off 1.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • The software includes a default set of bulk and brief properties.

Display only brief properties by clicking Show Brief Properties 5. • 4. Display properties alphabetically or by categories by clicking the corresponding display mode button on the Properties window toolbar. Open the Properties window. • Tips • The properties that are subsequently displayed in the window belong to the chosen item or the select set. see Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off. If more than one item is selected in the Drawing view or in the Engineering Data Editor. Whenever you have constructed a select set. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window. Click to display properties alphabetically. Tip For more information on opening the Properties window. 6.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Properties Window 1. Consequently. . 3. Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. a ToolTip displays the name of the corresponding command. and only common values are displayed for those properties. page 85. For the select set. 2. Display a null character in empty property cells by clicking Display Null Note • . empty property values for a select set do not necessarily mean that no value has been assigned for any of the items in the set. only properties that all items have in common appear. only that either no value has been assigned or that the different items have different values for the property. use the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window choose a single item or the select set of all listed items. Display case data by clicking Show Case Data . page 83 86 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view. When you point to a button on the Properties window toolbar and pause over it. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. click to display properties by categories.

Tips • You can also display the Properties window by right-clicking the empty area of the main toolbar and then selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Review and Edit Item Properties 1. or you can select an item by clicking the icon in the left-most column and then edit its properties in the Properties window. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. such as estimated length or maximum operating temperature. at the beginning of your entry. Use a single quote. Or you can click View > Display > Properties Window on the main menu bar. Or you can right-click an item. In this way. • • Or you can click View > Toolbars and select Properties. Enter or edit information in the cell next to the appropriate property. '. too. and select Properties from the shortcut menu. you can enter free text into a formatted property and no units of measurement are assigned. • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation. • Tips • You can review and edit item properties in the Engineering Data Editor. you can enter a value without a format. Click Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. 3. page 271 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 87 . For formatted properties. Select the item or items whose properties you want to review. 2. page 144 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview.

For instance. You can now paste these properties onto another item. page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 83 88 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Select the item that you want to associate with a different plant group. In the Properties window. In the Design window or Engineering Data Editor. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. 2. select the plant group type in the Plant Group Type property box. Then modify the plant group name in the Plant Group Name property box. select the item whose bulk properties you want to copy. page 89. page 258 • Copy Bulk Properties 1. page 215 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. your item can already be associated with the plant group type of unit. 2. • Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Go to the last step if this is the case. 3. but you want simply to associate it with a different unit. Tips • The default plant group is the node in the plant hierarchy immediately under which the drawing resides. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Click Copy Bulk Properties Tip • . see Paste Bulk Properties. • Tip It is possible that you do not want to modify the plant group type.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Associate an Item with a Plant Group 1. For more information. Not all item types support the plant group property.

Select the item or items that you want to paste bulk properties onto. page 84 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 86 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. click Paste Bulk Properties Tip • . see Copy Bulk Properties. Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. or is empty. You must first have copied the bulk properties of a different item in order to paste them onto your current selection. page 88. 2. but you can change bulk properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Null Values in the Properties Window 1. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. 3. page 15 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 89 . Click the null button Note • to display a null value in blank properties. Select an item in your drawing. page 144 Paste Bulk Properties 1. Right-click and select Properties. For more information. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. 2. On the Properties window toolbar. Null means that the property is not defined. and is not the same as a zero value.

The software includes a default set of brief properties. page 86 • Properties Window Toolbar. according to relevance. click the Show Case Data button Tip • . Notes • If the Properties window is not displayed. To see the case data that appears for corresponding items. which are displayed for equipment. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. click the Show Brief Properties button Note • . • Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. Once you display case data in the Properties window. pipe runs. case data remains displayed for the current design session. you can select an item and click Edit > Properties. page 83 90 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Case data includes both process cases and control cases. but you can change that set on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Brief Properties On the Properties window toolbar. page 83 Show Case Data • On the Properties window toolbar. or instruments. page 86 • Show Brief Properties. page 90 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. look in Data Dictionary Manager. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window.

Some macros also are delivered with the software. which provides a complete reference to the objects. you can start by clicking View > Toolbars. and properties. such as Microsoft® Visual Basic®. The Previous View button is listed on the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. Several ways to customize the software are available: Customizing with Built-In Commands You can add commands to a menu or a menu command to a toolbar. you can click the Menu or Toolbars tab and click the options that you want. Or. the Customize dialog box automatically appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar. To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID to access the SmartPlant P&ID Programming User's Guide. For example. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications. You then click New and type the name of the new toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog box. From there. Customizing with Macros Not only can you add built-in commands or buttons to the software. and methods available with the product. you click Tools > Customize. The software includes a type library. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. After you click OK. you can run the macros directly by clicking Tools > Custom Commands and selecting the macro. Visual C++ Delphi. which contains all the objects. properties. You can view the type library with the type library browser of Visual Basic or the browser for an OLE-aware programming application. if you frequently use the View > Previous command. methods. If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software. The Tools > Customize command allows you to add macros to the standard menus and toolbars in the software. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 91 . Visual Basic. You can use standard Windows programming tools and languages that are OLE-aware. and so forth.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Software: An Overview Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your specific needs. see a list by using the Tools > Custom Commands command. you could add the Previous View button to the main toolbar. but you can also create your own macros and add them to menus and toolbars in the same manner.

page 91 92 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 27 • Run a Macro. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. see these examples Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 95 • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 138 Customize the Properties Window. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. page 71 Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. creating filter tabs. which allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow. creating shortcut buttons to access your most commonly used items. or you can create new toolbars and menus. page 27 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Some customization options include displaying small or large icons. and so forth. For more information about some of these options. page 78 Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 101 Customize Command Tools > Customize Opens the Customize dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing Interface Elements You can customize many of the various ways of interfacing with the software. page 80 • Create a New Menu. page 86 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. page 80 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. You can add commands to toolbars or menus. Related Topics • Create a New Menu.

This dialog box opens when you click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. Categories . double-click a menu name or click the "+" next to the SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 93 . Add Menu . you can select a macro from the Macros list. If you add a menu to an existing menu. If you select a macro. To see all the commands on a menu. Descriptions do not appear for macros. you can type the name that you want in the tree view and then enter it by clicking any other location on the dialog box. The Browse button appears only when you choose Macros in the Categories list. When you add a menu with this option.Places a menu at the level currently open on the menu tree. page 95 • Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from menus or the main menu bar. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. page 95 • Create a New Menu. you can click Browse to change the folder for macros. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. Add Command . you can click the title of a command in the Commands list.Displays a description of the command that you selected before you add it to a menu. you create a cascading menu.Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box. Description . When you select Macros in the Categories list. You can add a command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want. Or you can add a single command to the main menu bar. Then you can add the command or macro to the menu or main menu bar.Lists the menus and their associated commands or macros. Menu Tree . Commands . Macros .Allows you to specify the command that you want to add to the menu. Browse . Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar. After you click this button. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. the Macros list displays the macros for the folder that you selected.Allows you to specify the category that you want to select a command or macro from. you can add commands to the new menu later.Places a command on a menu. When you select the title of a group of commands in this box. When you select a folder and click OK. This button is available only when you select a command or macro in the Commands box or Macros box. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize Dialog Box Changes the display of toolbar buttons and menus according to your needs.Allows you to specify the macro that you want to add to the menu.

Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 28 • Toolbars Dialog Box.Describes the button selected in the Buttons area.Overrides the default placement and places a command or macro on the menu that is currently selected in the menu tree. Description . Reset All . page 95 • Create a New Toolbar. then the macros. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. or menus are added at the level that is currently open in the menu tree. page 95 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. the changes show up on the menu tree. Also. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar.Lists the buttons available in the active category. you edit menu and command names in this view. When you click Add Command. Place Into Selected Menu . page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu.Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings. page 95 • Create a New Menu. commands. Add Menu. If you do not set this option. Remove . Buttons .Navigating in the Software: An Overview menu name. You can drag a button from this area onto a toolbar.Lists the categories of the toolbars that you can customize. Categories . or Remove. Choose one and the corresponding buttons appear in the Buttons area.Removes the command or menu that you selected in the menu tree. Related Topics Add a Command to a Menu. page 27 • Remove a Command From a Menu. page 26 94 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 96 • Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from toolbars.

Displays the available icons. In the Commands or Macros box.Opens the Select Bitmap File dialog box. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove from the main menu bar or the existing menu. double-click the name of the existing menu that you want to add a command to. This dialog box opens when you drag a macro from the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box to the toolbar. Browse . 4. Click Remove. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu 1. the view contains the Commands box. Buttons . • 4. Tip The menu tree expands to show the commands on the existing menu. 2. click the name of the command that you want to add. Tip If you choose Macros from the Categories list. page 91 Add a Command to a Menu 1. 3. page 28 • Create a New Toolbar. 3. otherwise. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 95 . then the Macros box is displayed. select the command category that you want. In the menu tree. Click Tools > Customize. 2. Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar. which allows you to look for an icon on your local computer or on the network. double-click a menu in the menu tree. On the Menu tab. Assign .Specifies the icon for your button and closes the dialog box. In the Categories list on the Menu tab. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. Click Tools > Customize. • Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Button Dialog Box Allows you to assign an toolbar button icon to a macro.

Tip If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar. Right-click the empty area of the main toolbar and click Customize on the shortcut menu in order to open the Customize dialog box. Notes • If you remove Customize from the Tools menu. click the command category that you want. On the Menu tab. Select the Place Into Selected Menu option. 3.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip The menu tree nodes expand to show the commands on the existing menus. Click Tools > Customize. 4. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. • 6. 2. 7. 2. Click Add Command. Tips • The new menu is added after the existing menu that you selected in step 3. On the menu tree. you can restore the command. click the Reset All button. page 91 Create a New Menu 1. The software places the new command on the main menu bar after the existing menu that you select in the menu tree. clear the Place Into Selected Menu option. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to appear after. • Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview. 96 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Tools > Customize. Click the Add Menu button. In the Categories box on the Menu tab. page 91 Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings 1. click the name of an existing menu. 5.

page 96 Custom Commands Command Tools > Custom Commands Opens the Custom Commands dialog box. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. type the name of the menu. click anywhere away from the name. page 95. Related Topics • Customize Dialog Box. On the menu tree. page 13 • Run a Macro.Navigating in the Software: An Overview If you want to add a menu to an existing menu. Note • After you create a new menu. page 93 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. You can choose a macro and run it. You can also record your own macros and store them wherever you want to. you can add commands to it. select the Place Into Selected Menu option before you click the Add Menu button. • 6. thereby creating a cascading menu. For more information. generally in the C:\Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program directory. see Add a Command to a Menu. page 91 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. Some macros are delivered with the software. page 91 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. page 101 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 97 . 5. To enter the new menu.

Clean DB . Gaps . For more information. This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. page 100 98 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 100 Repair OPCs Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands to run DelOrpModItems.Opens the Repair OPCs dialog box. Delete . This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. OPC Types . You use this utility to delete obsolete model items from the database.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clean Data Dialog Box This utility opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run the DelOrpModItems.Fixes the reference to the mated OPC that you have selected in the OPC list.Cleans orphaned records from the plant database. which allows you to delete obsolete model items.dll.Allows you to choose to list either the repairable or the non-repairable OPC pairs that have lost links to their partner OPCs either one-way or both ways.Opens the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box.Deletes the non-repairable OPC pair that you have chosen in the OPC list. which allows you to fix or delete OPC pairs with incomplete reference information. You can choose OPCs to repair or delete from the plant database.Corrects gaps with the wrong representation in the database. OPCs .dll and click OPCs. see Related Topics. Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items. Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items. Fix . Model Items .

then the OPC is considered repairable. but the mated OPC still has the identity of the first OPC. • • Clean orphaned records from the plant database. Equipment Component. Delete . Nozzle.Removes the orphan items selected in the Item list from the plant database. Signal Run. You need to perform this operation if you have gapping problems in your drawings.Allows you to choose the type of orphaned model items that you want to display in the Item list. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 99 . This need occurs only in rare instances. and you are given the option to delete them. Update gaps in the representation record with the proper item type.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Orphan Model Items Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run DelOrpModItems. Find and repair off-page connectors (OPCs) that have lost their associations with the OPC that they were originally paired with. Find and delete any model item in the database that does not have a corresponding entry in the T_Representation table. Part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. you can select any or all of the items and choose to delete them. • • Item Type Names . Equipment: Other. The utility works on an item type basis and repairs the following model item types: Vessel. Piping Component. If one OPC has lost the identity of its mated OPC. the utility updates the identity information for the first OPC.dll and then click Model Items. Pipe Run. and OPC. this dialog box can be used to accomplish the following tasks. Area Break. Instrument. Mechanical. However. Once the orphan model items for an item type are found. then the OPCs are considered non-repairable. Exchanger. To repair the OPC. if both the OPC and its mated OPC have lost the identities of each other. You can choose the orphan model items that you want to delete from the plant database.

dll. T_Representation and T_ModelItem. • 2. click Clean DB. refer to your database documentation. In the list view. Tip You can also click Delete All to select and delete all the items in the list view. choose the model item type from the Item Type Names list. Open a drawing. Tip Repairable OPC pairs retain one link out of two between the mates. 7. Click Gaps to find and repair gaps that do not have the correct representation in the database. Browse the drawing software program directory and open DelOrpModItems. 9. • 4. Click OPCs.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete All . and click Fix if it is a repairable pair or Delete if it is non-repairable. The buttons on the utility are arranged appropriately. select the model orphan items to delete and click Delete. On the Repair OPCs dialog box. choose either repairable or non-repairable from the OPC Type list. 6. • 8. Click Model Items. and click Tools > Custom Commands to open the Custom Commands dialog box. Non-repairable OPC pairs retain neither link. Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items. • 10. Choose the OPC pair that you are interested in from the OPC list. Tip You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. page 100 Delete Orphan Model Items Important • Verify that the plant user has full permissions to the tables. 3. 5.Selects and deletes all the orphan model items of the type specified in the Item Type Names list. 100 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For information on setting table permissions. On the Clean Data dialog box. On the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box. 1. It is very important that you perform the steps in the sequence that they are presented.

The log file contains information about deleted items including the item type and sp_id. Click Close to return to the design software. On the Custom Commands dialog box. Click Tools > Custom Commands. Log messages are placed in SPDelOrpModItems. Note • You can create macros with any programming tool that supports OLE automation. such as Visual Basic. 2. • • Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. select the macro that you want to run. 3. page 127 Run a Macro 1. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview.log file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 101 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip Follow the prompts on message boxes if you see any. 11. Click Run. • Notes • The Delete Orphan Model Item Utility must be run from within the drawing environment.txt file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable. Log messages generated when orphaned records are deleted from the plant database are written to the DBCleanup.

A component is any piece of equipment. Drawings are graphical representations of plant models using standard symbols and conventions. A plant model consists of components. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. instrumentation. You cannot save a drawing as a template. Symbols represent components in Catalog Explorer and Engineering Data Editor. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. and styles used to produce a new drawing. You can save drawings in different formats. You can use the commands on toolbars and in menus to add information to your drawing. Several standard templates are delivered with SmartPlant P&ID. formats. and you can use edit commands to modify the information in your drawing. you enter appropriate values into the database for each property of the component.dwg and . dimensions.dxf for AutoCAD®. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. . The only way to use a template is to have a plant administrator select a template at drawing creation in Drawing Manager. You select symbols from Catalog Explorer and then select the appropriate placement location in the drawing.pid for SmartPlant.Working with Drawings: An Overview Working with Drawings: An Overview An administrator uses Drawing Manager to create a new drawing on a pre-formatted template. If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates.cgm for CGM Metafile. A template is a file that provides tools such as text. In the Properties window. When you create and open a drawing. The template that your plant administrator selects depends on the type of information that is wanted in the drawing. Any changes that you make to the drawing data are automatically saved in the database. as well as the additional custom properties that you need to manage your drawings. Your plant administrator can edit the property set of the template to include default values for some of the properties. including . You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID. . geometry. 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . instead of embedding it. and . units of measurement. and you can create new templates in SmartPlant P&ID.dgn for MicroStation®. use Intergraph SmartSketch. If you link a border file. piping. the drawing is displayed in a Drawing view in the Design window. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. Using Templates as a Starting Point You use a template as a starting point for creating the drawing. or other item used to create a plant model.

page 111 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 103 . Copy.Working with Drawings: An Overview Opening Existing Drawings The Open command on the File menu opens existing drawings. These properties include drawing statistics. you can select it from that list. the software updates statistics automatically. and save properties for a drawing. too. The drawing information is stored in a database associated with the drawings in a plant. These drawings appear at the bottom of the File menu. You can also change databases by using this command so that you can open drawings in other plants. Setting Up Properties for a Drawing An administrator sets up drawing properties such as units of measure in Options Manager and Format Manager. and Paste commands to move or copy information between the drawings or within one open drawing. You can use commands on the Window menu to arrange all the open drawings and views so that you can see them easily. page 116 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 108 • Review and Edit Item Properties. The Options command on the Tools menu allows you to set the number of entries displayed in that list. and keywords that identify important information. page 277 • Open an Existing Drawing. The software keeps track of the drawings that you worked on last. page 125 • Set Document Properties. the author. Note • Renaming a drawing file in Windows allows the drawing to be opened with all graphics pointing to the database. However. With the Properties command on the File menu. Each drawing can have more than one view. Working with Several Open Drawings Several drawings can remain open in the same session but only if they all belong to the same plant. Related Topics • Embed a New Object. and you can change the name of a drawing in Drawing Manager. To open one of these drawings. page 87 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. You can change the size of a drawing by using the Page Setup command on the File menu. renaming a drawing file in Windows does not update the drawing table in the plant schema where the drawing name is stored. edit. such as drawing size and the date that a drawing was created and last modified. You can use the Cut. Drawing properties can include the title. you can view.

which allows you to specify a different SmartPlant initialization file so that you can work in a different database. and allows you to open a drawing and to choose the database that you access.Opens the Filter dialog box. Cancel Filter .Displays the list view in the right-hand window. page 108 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. You cannot open two drawings from different databases at the same time. page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. see Filter .Opens the Open Plant Structure dialog box. You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. Pause over a toolbar button in order to display a ToolTip. which allows you to specify the drawings that are displayed in the list or detailed view. 104 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . An administrator creates the hierarchy of plants and projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. which lists existing plants and their drawings. The list view only displays one property for each drawing. Open Database . List .Working with Drawings: An Overview Open Command File > Open Opens the Open dialog box. the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view. The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box. For more information on the toolbar commands. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing.Deactivates any ad hoc filter you have applied to the list of drawings that appears in the list view of the Open dialog box. Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. This dialog box appears when you click File > Open on the main menu bar.Displays in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node. which names the corresponding command. Related Topics Customize the Open Dialog Box.Displays a detailed view in the right-hand window. page 102 • Open Dialog Box Displays the active plant hierarchy and lists its drawings. Details . Include Subnodes .

Allows you to specify the application that you want to associate with this plant structure.Connects you to the selected database. which allows you to specify the information about each drawing that is displayed in the report or list view of the Open dialog box.Lists those plant structures found on the network. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize View . allowing you to select a SmartPlant initialization file from local and network directories. Related Topics • Open a Drawing in a Different Database. page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 105 . Application Type . page 72 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 108 • Open Command. The Open command also checks to make sure you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software.Opens the Customize Current View dialog box. Site Server . You can select only one item from this list view at a time. This dialog box opens when you click Open Database on the Open dialog box. Available plant structure . Open . page 108 • Open Command. page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing.Opens the Open Site Server dialog box. page 111 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box Sets options for connecting to a site and plant structure and passes user access information to the application. Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. Plant structures that correspond to the initialization file that you choose are subsequently displayed in the list of available plant structures.

and a value. Value . which can be free text.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. an operator. <>. Operator . Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. you must type a value. You can type a percent sign. Match any . in the Value box. Property . Match all . box. or choose null. Examples of properties include revision number and name. not equal to. >.Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Relationships include. page 108 • Open Command. for example.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. ?.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Dialog Box Sets options for the display of drawings in the list or report view of the Open dialog on the Open dialog box. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. =.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing. equal to. and so forth. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. To add to or modify the definition list. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. Delete . *. greater than.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Match any is the default matching method. Do not use an asterisk. or type a question mark. page 72 106 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. as a wildcard character for a single character. Definition .Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. This dialog box opens when you click Filter Add .Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. Edit .Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. %.

Moves the selected property down in order in the list.Lists the properties that are available to be displayed in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. which changes the order of the display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. which changes the order of display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box.Displays the properties that are currently available for the detailed view in the Open dialog box. Add . Move Down .Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize Current View Dialog Box Allows you to specify what drawing property or properties are displayed in the list view of the Open dialog box. page 108 • Open Command. page 110 • Open a Drawing in a Different Database. page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing.Moves the selected property up in order in the list. page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 107 .Moves the chosen items in the Selected properties list back into the Drawing properties list so that they are no longer available in the detailed view.Moves the selected items in the Drawing properties list into the Selected properties list so that those properties are available in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. This dialog box opens when you click Customize View on the Open dialog box. Selected properties . Drawing properties . Move Up . Remove .

You can change the database you are working in. confirm that the plant hierarchy is correct. On the main toolbar. Your plant administrator has set the plant hierarchy and has identified user names and tasks for those plants and related drawings.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open an Existing Drawing 1. Notes • You can open one of the last edited drawings by selecting it from the list of recently opened files at the bottom of the File menu on the main menu bar. • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. User roles are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 102 108 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. page 109. click Open . Double-click the drawing that you want to open. Tip • If you do not see the drawing that you want to open. You need to have the correct permissions to open or save certain drawings. For more information. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database.

select the correct SmartPlant . On the Open dialog box. click Open Database Tip The Open Database command is not available if you already have a drawing open because you cannot open drawings from different databases during the same P&ID session. • . On the main menu bar. page 141 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. • Related Topics • Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview. On the Open Site Server dialog box. click File > Open. 5. 6. 2. 3. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 109 . Navigate to the correct drawing in the Open dialog box and double-click it. Select the correct plant on the Open Plant Structure dialog box and click Open. 4.ini initialization file and click OK.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open a Drawing in a Different Database 1. Tip The Open command checks to make sure that you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software. click Site Server. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box.

you can see Drawing Manager Help for more information. 6. the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view. 2. To cancel the display of subnodes. and you can change the order that drawing properties appear in. Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. To display a list view in the right-hand window. 4. click Clear Filter . • Tip • On the Customize Current View dialog box. you can add and remove drawing properties from the display. click Customize View . define your ad hoc filter criteria. To further manipulate the properties that are available to view in the right-hand window.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize the Open Dialog Box 1. You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. click Include Subnodes . click Filter . On the Filter dialog box. click Include Subnodes again. To display a detailed view in the right-hand window. The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box. 8. To display all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node. 5. Note • Because the Open dialog box is similar in nature to the Drawing Manager interface. click List Tip The list view displays only one property for each drawing. page 102 110 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . To apply a filter to the drawings displayed in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box. 3. 7. . click Details Tip • . To cancel a filter that you have already applied to the Open dialog box. Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview.

The file names are listed near the bottom of the File menu. Related Topics • Access a Recently Open Drawing. Or. The view then appears on top of other open views. page 102 Access a Recently Open Drawing 1. on the Window menu. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 111 . page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. 2. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. You can change the number of files listed on the menu by using the Tools > Options command. Select the drawing from the list of recently opened drawings. page 102 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View If you can see a portion of the drawing or view that you want to switch to. click its window. Click File on the main menu bar.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recent Drawings File > Recent Drawings Opens one of the drawings that you worked on most recently. if you cannot see any portion of the drawing or view. select the view that you want to work in from the list.

Modified .Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. Related Topics • Set Document Properties. Accessed .Displays the type of document. Related Topics • File Properties Command. Location . Open this dialog box by clicking File > Properties on the main menu bar. You can review and edit the drawing summary and statistics. Size .Displays the date and time that the document was created or copied. page 115 General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays general information about the current document. The type is based on the application used to create the document.Displays the date and time that the document was last modified. MS-DOS Name . page 102 File Properties Dialog Box Tracks information about the properties of a drawing. which displays general information about the current drawing. Type . page 116 • View Document Properties.Displays the directory containing the document. Note • You must save the drawing before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. and megabytes. 112 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 112 • Set Document Properties.Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a Windows file naming system. page 115 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 116 • View Document Properties.Working with Drawings: An Overview File Properties Command File > Properties Opens the File Properties dialog box. kilobytes.Displays the size of the document in bytes. Created .

unless the document is write-protected.Working with Drawings: An Overview Attributes . Title . page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 113 .Indicates that the document is a hidden document. page 112 • Set Document Properties. page 116 • View Document Properties. if available. Archive . page 116 • View Document Properties.Shows that the document is a system document. Note • If some of the above information is not available. with the exception of the template.Displays the properties of the current document. Read-Only . System . Keywords . You usually cannot see this document in the Windows. page 112 • Set Document Properties. or print the document.Displays the name of the person who created the document. You can edit these properties.Specifies the current drawing template. These settings are readonly. the dialog box displays Unknown.Specifies the title of the current document. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. Comments . The software generates the author and template information when you create. You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file. You usually cannot see this document unless you change the view options in Windows Explorer.Shows that the document is an archive document. along with keywords and comments for the current document. Author .Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search documents. page 115 Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays the title and author. Hidden . save.Indicates that the document is read-only. Subject .Specifies comments about the current document. You cannot open a read-only file for writing.Gives a general description of the current document. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. Template .

Displays the name of the person who has the document open.Displays the date and time the document was created or copied. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into a property. then the line value length is rounded up to 2.1056 inches long. or angle values in a drawing. only the display of the numbers. Accessed . It represents the accuracy of the unit readout value. Last Saved By . save. page 115 Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length. Currently Opened By . 114 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a document. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. Modified . Length Readout . Saving Application . Creating Application .Displays the date and time the document was last modified.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a document. area. The software automatically generates these properties when you create.Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a document.Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the document. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box.123 and you draw a line that is 2. The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to appear. Area Readout . page 116 • View Document Properties.Working with Drawings: An Overview Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays detailed information about the current document.106 inches. For example. page 112 • Set Document Properties.Displays the name of the application that created the document. Created . if the precision readout is . Angle Readout . or print the document.Displays the name of the person who last saved the document.

which are defined in the Options Manager. increase the precision. of the larger unit through Format Manager. 2. click the tab that contains the information that you want. If the document has unsaved changes. and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window. That is. All delivered labels use plant default units. • • Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. you can convert centimeters to meters and back and retain the originally entered value of centimeters with no round-off loss. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 115 View Document Properties 1. SmartPlant supports round-trip conversion of units without loss of precision. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Notes • To avoid loss of precision in units when switching between small and large types of a particular unit. Change the Unit definition in the SmartText Editor dialog box in Catalog Manager to see a different unit of measure in a label. page 112 • Set Document Properties. Click File > Properties. page 116 • View Document Properties. On the File Properties dialog box. that is. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 115 . Note • The File Properties dialog box displays information about the current condition of the active document. you must save the document to update the property information. increase decimal places. Tip • You must save the document before you can view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box.

2. page 102 116 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Notes • Before you can set or view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. page 370 • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. you must save the document .Working with Drawings: An Overview Set Document Properties 1. such as summary information or keywords. For more information. On the File Properties dialog box. set the options that you want. You can also change the size for an existing drawing. Click File > Properties. see Set up a Page Layout.

Working with Drawings: An Overview Close Command File > Close Closes the active drawing. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 117 . Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. Note • Any changes are automatically saved upon closing. The software saves your changes automatically. Related Topics • Close an Active Drawing. page 102 Close an Active Drawing Click File > Close. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 117 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.

Any changes are automatically saved. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Exit Command File > Exit Closes the active drawing and the program. The software checks for unsaved changes when you close the software. Note • The software saves any changes since the last time you saved your changes. Related Topics • Close the Program. page 124 118 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 102 Close the Program Click File > Exit. page 118 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.

igr A3 Wide (420mm x 297mm) A4border.pid D-Size.pid B-Size. You create labels in Catalog Manager.5in) B-Wide. it is possible to customize a drawing template to meet your particular needs.igr A1 Wide (841mm x 594mm) A2border. If you link a border file. You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID.igr D Wide (34in x 225in) SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 119 . instead of embedding it.igr C-Wide. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change.igr A Wide (11in x 8. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. If you create a new template. save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation.pid A1-Size. The pre-defined size choices for a new template are extensive. You usually create a new drawing based on one of these existing templates. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template.Working with Drawings: An Overview Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview The software includes several standard drawing templates. use Intergraph SmartSketch. The software also includes a set of title block labels that fit the delivered drawing templates. If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager.pid Page size A0border.igr A4 Wide (297mm x 210mm) A5border.pid C-Size.igr B Wide (17in x 11in) C Wide (22in x 17in) E Wide (44in x 34in) D-Wide.igr A2 Wide (594mm x 420mm) A3border. This task is accomplished inside the design software by using commands on the File menu.pid A4-Size. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. you can also create a new title block label that fits the title block of your template correctly and that contains the appropriate information. If you create a new template. however.igr A0 Wide (1189mm x 841mm) A1border.igr A5 Wide (210mm x 148mm) Template file Border file Page size A-Size. Standard Template Size Information Template file Border file A0-Size.pid A2-Size.igr E-Wide.pid A-Wide.pid E-Size.pid A3-Size.pid A5-Size.

page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. To create new drawings. page 370 New Template Command File > New Template Creates a new blank template. page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. For more information about creating new drawings. The path to the plant-level drawing templates is defined in Options Manager. page 122 • Embed a New Object. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. page 278 • Set up a Page Layout. You can specify properties for the new template and embed border files. Caution • Templates created at the user level instead of the plant level are not available to other users or to Drawing Manager for creating subsequent drawings. page 121 • Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border. page 121 • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template. page 116 • Set up a Page Layout. page 102 120 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . an administrator uses Drawing Manager. Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template. page 125 • Set Document Properties. see Drawing Manager Help.

Click OK. in the Create from file box. specify the unit in the Length. an administrator uses Drawing Manager. . see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. 9. make sure that the Link option is selected. For more information about connecting to a database. a . On the main toolbar. and click Open. Quit the design software. Type the path to the border file. Click Edit > Insert > Object. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. find the border file. 7. 1. choose a standard size or define a custom size for this template. and Area readout boxes in order to define default units of measurement. 6. 4. On the Insert Object dialog box. 10.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Drawing Template Important • Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software. 5. 11. Click File > Properties. 3. Click File > Page Setup. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 121 . Click OK. Click File > Save As and specify a name for your template on the Save As dialog box. or click Browse. page 109. • Notes • To create a new drawing using a plant template. • 13. You can also add general identifying information on the Summary tab. On the Units tab of the File Properties dialog box. Tip If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. use Intergraph SmartSketch.igr file. 14. Angle. click New Template 2. In the Sheet size box on the Page Setup dialog box. Click OK. 8. 12. Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager.

Working with Drawings: An Overview • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to. page 119 • Embed a New Object. On the Insert Object dialog box. page 102 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border Important Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software. use Intergraph SmartSketch. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. • 4. or click Browse. • Tip Be sure to select a template that matches not only the page size requirements for drawings but also the units of measurement. in the Create from file box. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. find the border file. 3. 5. and click Open. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. Type the path to the border file. Open the design application. Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. metric or English. If you link a border file. page 109. for the plant. a .igr file. Click Edit > Insert > Object. but do not open a drawing. • Tip You can do this by opening the product from the Start menu or by closing all open documents in the design software if it is already running. 2. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. 1. Tip • If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. make sure that the Link option is selected. find the template you want to edit and drag it into the Design window. 122 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For more information about connecting to a database. instead of embedding it. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. In Windows Explorer. Select the existing border file and click Delete while the pointer is in the Drawing view. 6.

Quit the design software. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 123 . page 121 • Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. Click File > Save. page 119 • Embed a New Object. see Create a Drawing Template. • Notes • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to. 9. Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch.Working with Drawings: An Overview 7. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Click OK. If you link a border file. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. 8. For more information about editing other properties of a drawing template or creating a new template. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. instead of embedding it.

These types of drawings can contain embedded hyperlinks. renders quickly. However. After you have saved a drawing. you can place the graphics on a Web page and view them with a browser. When you open an existing drawing.cgm format. allowing quick access to information outside the drawing. Closing Drawings You can close a drawing without saving your work. Saving Drawings to .cgm) format provides an efficient way to make information available on the Internet. you probably feel more comfortable saving it at least once yourself. use the Save As command. Saving Assemblies You can save a group of items in a drawing as an assembly. page 125 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View.cgm Format The Computer Graphics Metafile (. Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. and has the ability to zoom and achieve more detail. page 111 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the software uses the name and folder location specified in Drawing Manager during drawing creation. As you work. CGM is an efficient format for publishing 2D vector drawings on the Web because it uses little storage space. because changes to the drawing post to the database as you make them. These changes are saved in the database automatically. You can use File > Close to close the drawing and clear it from your screen. Assemblies are saved in a specific folder specified in Options Manager. the software copies the drawing from the disk or network and displays it on the screen. or you can use File > Exit to close the drawing and quit the software. the changes that you make to the drawing appear on your screen. You can save your drawing by clicking Save on the toolbar. If you want to save the drawing in a format other than .pid. Then. You can retrieve assemblies from Catalog Explorer to place in a drawing. page 126 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. it remains displayed on the screen. You can use the Save As command to save drawings in .Working with Drawings: An Overview Saving Drawings: An Overview Whenever you save a drawing using File > Save.

An administrator must click File > New Template to create a new template. page 102 Save As Command File > Save As Opens the Save As dialog box. If you have not already named a template. You can save the active document to a new format. The graphics will display incorrectly. the Save As dialog box opens. your parametric symbols should not be scaled. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. Plant location and paths are set in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Options Manager. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 125 . Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. page 124 Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template • Click Save Notes on the main toolbar.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save Command File > Save Stores the active drawing or template. • If you have not named a template before clicking Save. • Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. Note When using AutoCAD. the Save As dialog box appears. page 126 • Saving Drawings: An Overview. You cannot open an existing drawing and then decide to save it as a template. You can type a name and choose a format and location for your template.

6. If you save your drawing to the AutoCAD format. Related Topics • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. • 4. This macro is delivered in \Program Files\SmartPlant\P&ID Workstation\Program. select the drive and folder for the new drawing.dll macro. In the File Name box. page 124 126 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can edit the Microsoft Excel workbook again if you need to add filters and layers. type a new name for the drawing. 8. 9. Save ExportLayer. On the Save As dialog box. 5. • 7. Tip When the macro finishes running. you can name layers with any combination of alphanumeric characters. In the design software click Tools > Custom Commands. Click File > Save As.xls. 3. a message appears that tells you if all items were assigned layers successfully or if any items lacked the appropriate layer specification. In the Save As Type box. open ExportLayer. Assign level or layer numbers between 10 and 63 to ensure that graphics appear in the designated levels or layers. Tips • You can choose more filters for the Filter column of this worksheet from filters in Filter Manager. In Microsoft Excel. The location of this Microsoft Excel workbook is specified in Options Manager. select the document format that you want to use. run the ExportLayer.xls. page 125 • Saving Drawings: An Overview. 2. When the Custom Commands dialog box opens.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save a Drawing in a Different Format 1.

The software displays a message box that states One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database. Occasionally.Working with Drawings: An Overview Re-creating Drawings: An Overview The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. During the re-create process. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 127 . After the re-create process is completed. When you re-open the drawing. a log file. the software can end in an abnormal way (for example. when you click File > Save or when you quit the program). Recreate-DrawingName. the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing. Also. You can check this file for irregularities that occur during the re-create process. the software reinitializes your drawing and displays the message Re-create drawing is complete. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. is created in your Temp folder. the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (for example. As a result. the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database. the status bar at the bottom of the main window keeps you informed about the particular elements currently reconciling with the database. however. Caution • Do not interfere with the re-create process once started because the drawing can become unusable. due to power outage).

Related Topics • Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition. The heavy orange line segment is the error condition. Error conditions are always associated with a pipe or signal run.Working with Drawings: An Overview If a section of the drawing could not re-create successfully an error condition appears on your drawing. Delete the heavy orange line segment and components connected directly to it. page 129 128 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the symbology is a heavy orange line segment. This portion of the drawing must be updated manually. Then re-route your runs and replace connections and components as required.

• Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. Click the Processes tab. 3. page 127 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 129 . 4. Open the drawing that you want to recreate. Replace connectors and components that you deleted in step 1. For more information about recreating drawings. Delete the item that you placed in step 2. Tip Keep property breaks in mind as you re-route your lines. click OK to recreate the drawing from the database. 8. 2. 5. 3. 6. see the Re-creating Drawings section in the SmartPlant P&ID Installation and Upgrade Guide. click draft. 10. Place an item in the drawing. Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. Re-route your pipe or signal run. • Note • Error conditions are not required items and therefore do not move to the stockpile when you delete them. Click End Process.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recreate a Drawing 1. 2. In the list. Delete all connectors and components that are directly connected to the error condition. 4. 7. Right-click an empty space on your Windows taskbar. 9. Save the drawing. Notes • Normally SmartPlant P&ID recreates drawings automatically when it detects a discrepancy between the drawing and the database. When the software prompts you that a recreate is necessary. page 127 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition 1. In SmartPlant P&ID. open the drawing that you opened in step 1.exe. Delete the heavy orange lines that make up the error itself. and then click Task Manager.

After applying the filter. you can use a filter to display an operational design.Working with Drawings: An Overview Using Filters: An Overview You can use filters in many ways throughout the software and its stand-alone applications and utilities. for example. And you can use filters to find and replace items. You can associate filters with the source or target properties in rules. you see all pumps in the drawing as graphical symbols. For example. page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. You can use filters if. you want to delete items of a certain type. However. Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. You can then select all the pumps and edit their properties one-by-one or as a select set in the Properties window. or an under construction design. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. For example. Filters can help you show different views of the same drawing and can make your workflow more efficient. You can create filters to control the display of hierarchy items in Drawing Manager. You can show all items added after a certain date or after a certain revision number. You can use filters when you create report templates to display particular items on a report. where you can edit the properties of the pumps also. That same filter applied to the Engineering Data Editor displays a list of pumps and their characteristics in a tabular format. You can use filters in Rule Manager to define how items interact within a view. You can apply filters to either Drawing views or the Engineering Data Editor. These filters are not saved to any folder in Filter Manager. do not create Project Filters at a satellite site. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager or Select Filter dialog box environment. you could filter all pumps in a Drawing view. page 357 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. page 52 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. but the methods of creating these filters are the same as those for creating filters saved in Filter Manager.

Displays the New Filter dialog box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template.Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Command View > Add Filter Adds a filter tab to the drawings in the Design window. to choose item types for tables. If you create a compound filter. select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters. page 138 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter. Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box. This command displays the Select Filter dialog box. which contains a subset of the commands in Filter Manager.Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. page 15 Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views. Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters. Properties . you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. • • New . Using this dialog box. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 131 . Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type. or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter. depending on your selection in the filter list.

This information is read-only.Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view. You can activate this dialog box by clicking New on the Select Filter dialog box. Compound filter . Scroll down the list to choose a color. Related Topics • Add Filter Command. Simple filter .Combines two or more simple filters to return a collection of items based on the criteria of the combination of simple filters. You can name the new filter appropriately. page 138 New Filter Dialog Box Allows you to specify compound or simple filter when you create a new filter. In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing. This dialog box allows you to specify a filter for your drawing. Filter Name . Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Filter . which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view. Browse .Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it. page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box. page 52 132 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Returns a collection of items based on the filter definition and criteria of a single filter.Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Tab Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Add Filter from the shortcut menu.Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items. Alternate symbology . Width . Properties .Opens the Select Filter dialog box. you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology. Color .Opens the Filter Properties dialog box.Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view.Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. Scroll down the list to choose a line width. page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

>. =. <>. the criteria that you enter on the Filter tab on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box are combined with the base filter that you select. respectively. Edit .Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. Each item type owns a set of properties.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.A phrase or sentence about the filter. Delete . The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type.Loop Item Tag. an operator. If you are defining the Engineering Data Editor. and a value. Match any .Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. Add .Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. This button is active only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Examples of properties include revision number and name. Examples of item types are Equipment.Specifies the filter name. Name . Operator . Filter names within a project must be unique. Specifies available properties in the Definition grid. including the name. Instr. Match all . greater than. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 133 . Description . Instrument. To add to or modify the definition list.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Properties Dialog Box Specifies properties of a filter. and PipeRun. Definition . Relationships include. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. and so forth. and Estimated Length. Property .Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. and examples of properties for these item types are Equipment Type.Contains the top-level items from the data dictionary. for example. and the other properties that you want to filter for. not equal to.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. Match any is the default matching method. equal to. Filter for . description.

Year . or type a question mark. as a wildcard character for a single character. Month .Allows you to choose the correct year. %. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. Related Topics Create a Simple Filter. ?. For example. page 138 Calendar Dialog Box Use this dialog box to specify a date in Value on the Filter Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. which is specified in Data Dictionary Manager. or choose null.Allows you to specify the date of the month. page 136 • 134 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which can be free text. *. Select the date you want and click OK.Allows you to choose the correct month. Do not use an asterisk. you must type a value. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Value . The option of choosing a date for Value is available only for those properties that are date formatted. you can view only pumps whose Revision Approval Timestamp is after a particular date. Dates . in the Value box.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. You can type a percent sign.

Name . The simple filters are added to the compound filter by dragging the simple filter or by creating new simple filters under the compound filter in the filter hierarchy. Match all . Filter names within a plant must be unique.Working with Drawings: An Overview Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box A compound filter consists of more than one simple filter. The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. This dialog box specifies properties of a compound filter. Compound filters apply only to homogeneous item types. Description . This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. including the name.Allows you to choose either Match all or Match any. Filter Method . Match any is the default matching method. description.Specifies the filter name. Match any .Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 135 . Related Topics • Add Filter Command.Specifies a phrase or sentence about the filter.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. and whether to match all or any of the simple filter criteria.

if needed. Click Add to add a line for another filter definition. 5. Tip • You can click Delete to remove a filter definition if it is currently selected. • Tip The type in the Filter for box determines the properties that are available in the Edit area. this filter description displays as a ToolTip. page 137 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. • Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. 4. click either Match all or Match any. and repeat step 6. select Simple filter.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Simple Filter 1. you can specify a date for that property. Notes • If you select a date-formatted property. 3. and click New. page 130 136 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . operator. In the Edit area. Tip When you point to the name of a filter in the tree view on the Select Filter dialog box. In the Definition area. 2. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. • Related Topics • Create a Compound Filter. On the New Filter dialog box. and click OK. Click the Filter for drop-down list and specify the item type for the new filter. • 8. Type a description in the Description box. 7. Open the Select Filter dialog box. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. Click the ellipses in the Value box in the Edit group and select a date on the calendar. On the Filter Properties dialog box. and corresponding value for the first filter criterion. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also. 6. select the filter property. type a name for the new filter.

This is. Match Any is the default. type a name for the new compound filter in the Name box. Or you can select the compound filter and create a new simple filter under it. of course. all of the simple filters making up a compound filter can be of type Equipment: Mechanical. • Note • When you point to the name of a compound filter in the tree view in Filter Manager. Tips • All of the filters that make up the new compound filter need to be of the same item type. 5. if you create a new filter under that compound filter. For example. Click OK. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria return. 2. and click New. Open the Select Filter dialog box. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. because all of the simple filters under one compound filter must be of the same item type. 6. Select either Match all or Match any.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Compound Filter 1. select Compound filter. Once one simple filter has been assigned to a compound filter. page 136 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 137 . • 7. Type a description in the Description box. 4. and click OK. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. which displays in the Filter for list on the Filter Properties dialog box. On the New Filter dialog box. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also. To add filter criteria to the compound filter. On the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. You set the filter description in the Description box in the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. the Filter for property is specified and you cannot change it. drag one or more simple filters into the compound filter. the filter description displays in a ToolTip. if wanted. • Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. 3. Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria specified are returned. You cannot mix Equipment: Mechanical with Equipment: Heat Transfer or any other item type.

page 136 or Create a Compound Filter. see Create a Simple Filter. click New on the Select Filter dialog box. the Cut command allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view and place it on the Clipboard. page 83 Filter Tab Cut Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. You can see the properties of a filter by selecting it in the Select Filter dialog box and clicking Properties. Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. 3. 2. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. You can create and then select that filter for the view. Right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view. For more information. You can choose alternate symbology on this dialog box. Tips • If you click Browse. As long as the cut filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. you must right-click the filter tab area and select Use Alternate Symbology. The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. From the shortcut menu. page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. too. Click OK to apply the filter to the Drawing view. page 138 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In order for your alternate symbology to affect the Drawing view. • Notes • To define a new filter.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View 1. you can choose a filter from the Select Filter dialog box. 4. page 137. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. type a filter name. Click OK. select Add Filter. On the Add Filter Tab dialog box.

Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. page 138 Filter Tab Delete Command Allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. page 138 Filter Tab Paste Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. the Paste command allows you to place a filter tab from the Clipboard onto the Drawing view. As long as the copied filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. the Copy command allows you to place a filter tab from the Drawing view onto the Clipboard. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 139 . You must have placed a filter tab on the Clipboard in order for this command to be available. You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Copy Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu.

this command opens the Properties dialog box. which allows you to edit the options for the selected drawing filter. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command Applies any alternate symbology you defined for a filter tab on the Add Filter or Properties dialog box. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. page 138 140 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 138 Filter Tab Properties Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

You can place components such as equipment. piping. One key feature of SmartPlant P&ID is using catalogs to create instances of components within the plant model. for example. As you work on your drawing. you can add values for various properties of each item after you place it in your drawing. you can generate reports to help you keep track of information in the drawing. cannot establish a connection with the database on the server. and instrumentation from Catalog Explorer or the stockpile into graphical representations of your plant model in the drawing. solve the error by making sure your internet options are set to allow internet access using a proxy server and also to bypass the proxy server for intranet addresses. By manipulating model views. After you finish the drawing. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. unified data structure that represents the plant model. Assemblies appear as symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view so that you can place them exactly as you place other symbols in your drawing. In the Properties window. or a report. Also. You can print the drawing. you can annotate your drawing with labels as you design the drawing. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model. These indicators appear in your drawing as soon as an inconsistency occurs in the design. If you repeatedly place particular groups of items.log is Error Problem:Common::GetDatabasePathAndServerLocS:\SmartPid\bin\ SmartPlant. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. you can generate order lists for the components in the drawing. a table. too.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview With SmartPlant® P&ID. The standard modeling environment lets you place items from the catalog into the appropriate model views. Note • When SmartPlant P&ID or any associated stand-alone application. including all plant components and their relationships. you can monitor any inconsistencies in your design by reviewing the inconsistency indicators. A view can be a schematic drawing. SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 141 . and the error message in SPError.ini. Also. Options Manager or Rules Manager. for example Filter Manager. Format Manager. You can resolve inconsistencies using solutions from the Consistency Check dialog box. you can save the group of items as an assembly. you can easily perform the tasks required to create a detailed plant model.

page 317 142 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 286 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 334 • Open a New Drawing View. page 365 • Review an Inconsistency.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Create an Assembly. page 35 • Print a Drawing. page 51 • Generate a Report.

Since the relationship. already exists in the database or is created during your transaction. such as the case to model item relationship. such as monitoring conditions on multiple items. but not both of them.Insures that the corresponding value. the object and the foreign key it points to.Used for more complex data integrity controls. Another candidate for a Check constraint is the enforcement of certain values for one or more items. exists in the table referenced by the foreign key.Enforce all subclass and one-toone relationships.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Understanding Database Constraints The following database constraints improve the integrity of the data associated with your design. • • The constraints so far described serve to enforce relationship integrity. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 143 . This type of constraint is used to enforce logical relationships. but does not allow null values to persist. A Check constraint is defined to enforce this condition by using comparisons and exclusions. invalid null or zeroes assigned to properties are tested against Check constraints. Either of these objects can be null. • Check . Foreign Key with Not Null and Unique . the constraints are satisfied without changing the scope of your transaction. but does not allow null values to persist and requires that all values be unique. Foreign Key in conjunction with Not Null . This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above. For example. For example. This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above. History records can pertain to either a drawing or the model. such as the plant item to plant group relationship.Enforces group relationships. unless it is null. • Foreign Key . such as the pairing of OPCs.

Selecting Single Items To select an item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview To select an item. and Rotate. these items are also selected in the active drawing. Although you can select more than one item at a time. When an item is highlighted. valves. As you pause on items in a drawing. When you click the Select Tool. Move. When you select an individual item. If the item is linked or embedded into the current drawing. such as dragging a handle to change the shape of the item. You can change the selection color with the Options command on the Tools menu. the following things happen: • The item changes to the selection color. You can construct a select set using the Engineering Data Editor in this way. you can use the Select Tool on the main toolbar. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a selected item. if they reside there. If you select multiple items in the Engineering Data Editor. Copy. The corresponding items are selected in the Drawing view if they reside in the active drawing. • • When you select multiple items or grouped items. only one item can have handles at a time. You can use the Select Tool ribbon to choose if you want to select only items completely enclosed by the fence or any item that is partly enclosed by the fence. You can select pipe routes. Many manipulation commands. such as end points and center points. click the Select Tool on the main toolbar. you can click the Select Tool and then drag to fence items. assemblies. the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone . like Delete. and so forth. equipment. you can click to select it. Selecting Multiple Items and then You can select more than one item at a time by clicking Select Tool holding Shift or Ctrl as you click the items that you want to select. the items change to the selection color. labels. the items appear in the indicator at the end: highlight color. selecting it allows you to double-click it for editing. can act upon all items in the select set. or embedded or linked objects. You can also select drawing items by first selecting them in the Engineering Data Editor. 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and you can select item groups. Handles allow you to directly modify the item. Or. The handles of the item appear if the item has handles.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Whenever you have constructed a select set. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window. you select it in Catalog Explorer or the stockpile. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone. Related Topics • Move an Item With the Select Tool. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. Then you click to select the position in the drawing to place the item. page 218 • Select an Item. page 147 Select Tool Command Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select. Selecting Items for Placement To place an item in a drawing. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. and manipulate items. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 145 . You cannot select more than one item for placement in a drawing at a time. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. the Select Tool ribbon is displayed. Canceling the Selection of Items To cancel selection of an item or group of items. page 218 • Select an Item. you can click any empty point on the drawing. Or. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. While the Select Tool is active. After placement. modify. you can select another item or press Esc to quit placement mode. A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Tool Ribbon Appears when nothing is selected. After you select an item. and allows you to select the proper orientation for the item. page 149 146 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Specifies that items both overlapped by the fence and inside the fence are selected. Note • To find out the name of an option on the ribbon. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. the Select Tool ribbon is replaced with a ribbon for editing the selected item. which make up symbols. Related Topics • Place a Flow Arrow.Specifies that items inside the fence are selected. Inside . Top Down . page 264 • Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. Pausing after you drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing activates the Configuration tool. page 145 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool In addition to using the manipulation handles to orient an item after you place it. when you are placing them. page 194 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. Bottom Up . are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to the whole symbol.Specifies that individual elements. page 218 • Select an Item. you can use PickQuick to select the orientation of some items. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip. such as check valves or flow arrows or other inline items.Specifies that symbols are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to individual elements in a symbol. if it is available for the selected item. Overlapping . page 147 • Select Tool Command. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool.

too. you can select items in the Engineering Data Editor. On the main toolbar. To select one of several overlapping items. Also. • • • Related Topics Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. To select all items in a drawing. to accomplish the same thing. To select more than one item. or. To select one item. press Ctrl + A or click Edit > Select All. Notes • When the Select Tool is active.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item 1. hold Shift or Ctrl and click each item. Do one of the following: • • • • . To clear the selection of one item and leave other items selected. Right-click in an empty portion of the drawing. page 148 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. click the item while holding Shift or Ctrl. When the item that you want to select is highlighted. Select another item without holding Shift or Ctrl. If they reside in the active drawing. click to select it. click the Select Tool: 2. page 144 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 147 . do one of the following: • • • • Click in an empty portion of the drawing. selectable items are highlighted as you pass the pointer over them. use PickQuick. click it. You can build up a select set using this method. drag to fence the objects. 3. Click Tools > Options to change the item highlight and selection colors and locate and break-away tolerances. To select more than one item at once. they are selected in the Engineering Data Editor. To clear the selection of an item or items. right-click a blank area in the drawing and click Select All on the shortcut menu.

PickQuick also helps you place items when multiple possible placement configurations exist. On the PickQuick toolbar. click. The second item is highlighted. When the item that you want to select is highlighted. The first item is highlighted. 3. see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. 4. 2. Pause the pointer over the item that you want to select. page 144 148 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. page 149 Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. which appears near the pointer. click the corresponding button on the PickQuick toolbar. without clicking. When the pointer appears with ellipses. Note • PickQuick helps you to select items that overlap each other. move the pointer over the numbered PickQuick buttons. to highlight the corresponding items. For more information.

Move the pointer over each toolbar button to preview the available orientations.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. click the corresponding button on the Configuration toolbar to place the item in that orientation. 5. page 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 149 . page 146 • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. Drag the item to the appropriate position on the line or equipment. 2. or you can close it by clicking X in the upper right corner of the toolbar. When the appropriate orientation is displayed. 4. Click to display the Configuration toolbar near the pointer. 3. Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. Pause until ellipses appear beside the pointer: . Note • You can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing or press Esc to close the Configuration toolbar.

page 150 • Set Document Properties. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. set the style to dynamic and adjust the density.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview The grid and its grid lines allow you to place items in the drawing by aligning them with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. The grid is not considered part of the drawing and does not print. Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. Note • You can change the grid display from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. Note • You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it. To view grid lines at a finer level. When you click View > Snap grid. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. You can view the grid by clicking View > Show grid. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. or coarse levels. medium. page 33 Show Grid Command View > Show Grid Displays a grid so that you can place items with precision. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker. You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine. solid grid lines. You can specify the increment settings on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. which opens when you click View > Properties. The grid is an set of imaginary lines in the drawing. The grid lines for a dynamic grid move as you zoom in or out in a view. page 115 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can use the grid if you want the items to line up at regular intervals in the drawing. page 116 • View Document Properties. The grid lines appear at common major measurement increments. they do not appear when you print the drawing.

Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. When you set the Snap grid option. page 150 • Set Document Properties. page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 151 . Note • You can change the grid display by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Snap Grid Command View > Snap Grid Aligns items with the grid. page 116 • View Document Properties. which opens when you click View > Properties. set the style to Dynamic and adjust the grid line width with the Density control. The grid is a set of lines in the drawing background that helps you align items. To view grid lines at a finer level. Grid lines do not print.

The software includes a standard group of equipment and equipment component symbols. you can have limits to the possible placements for the equipment. Equipment components are items associated with pieces of equipment. For example. heat exchangers. page 153 • Place Multiple Representations. the components move when you move the equipment. creating an equipment group. page 154 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . As you place equipment components. you or your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as needed for your plant. boilers. such as nozzles and trays. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside the piece of equipment. the component is associated with the last selected or highlighted piece of equipment. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Equipment: An Overview You can place various types of equipment in your drawing. You also place equipment components in drawings. When you place an equipment component. However. and nozzles can be flagged for placement outside the piece of equipment. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. Depending on the rules defined for the equipment or equipment component. such as towers. you can only associate an equipment component with a single piece of equipment. However. As a group. and reactors. page 164 • Place Equipment. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation.

Position the item and release to place it. page 242 Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 153 . or move most items using their component handles. In other words. in a tank). For more information. In the Catalog Explorer list view. You can use the same steps for placing equipment. Notes • After you place items. enter values for the equipment properties in the appropriate rows in the table. Nozzle-Internal. rotate. the opening of the nozzle will be placed in the direction that you approach the tank during placement. Tip In addition. For more information. approach the tank from the right when placing the nozzle. page 219 • If the Properties window is not displayed. you can display it by selecting the item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Flanged Nozzle-Internal. you drag the nozzle to the interior of a tank and place it. see Assign Heat Tracing. For internal placement of equipment. 2. In the Properties window. 3. you can click the item in the Catalog Explorer list view and then click the appropriate point in the drawing to place the item. see Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. • Tip • You can assign heat tracing to equipment. page 244 Move an Item Using the Move Button. If you want the nozzle opening facing to the right. click the equipment that you want to place. Or. and Pump Nozzle-Internal can all be placed internally (for example. 4. Press Esc to quit placement mode. you can mirror. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place Equipment 1.

page 408 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. 1. Select a filter that best describes the type of item you want to represent (for example. 154 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Tip A multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view. drag the nozzle an arbitrary distance away from the equipment. 4.Vessels). 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If you need to place a nozzle so that it is associated with equipment but not attached to it. Open a drawing and place an item of equipment. 3. Attach the nozzle to the equipment that you want it related to. 2. You can think of a multiple representation as a child item associated with the parent item that already exists in another drawing. Related Topics Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. While holding down the Alt key. page 215 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. Select the nozzle. Be sure the drawing used in step 1 is closed. page 152 • Place Multiple Representations 1. Display the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor. • Tips • You can find the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor by clicking the Other Drawings button . 3. you can do the following. Save your work and exit the drawing. Open the drawing that is a target for your multiple representation (parent-child representations) of an item. Equipment . You can choose a filter from the list using the Engineering Data Editor.

Click the location in the drawing where you need to place the multiple representation. right-click the icon at the far left of the parent item. 7. If you are working in a project. page 152 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. be aware that multiple representations are constrained because of claiming and moving drawings between projects and the Plant. Select Place Multiple Representation from the shortcut menu. Equipment SubClass. • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 155 . In the Engineering Data Editor. 5. Notes • You can use the Replace command or the Find and Replace dialog box to replace a multiple representation symbol providing the definition attributes for the source (parent) and target (child) are identical. The definition attributes are Equipment Class.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can also open a tabular view of your target drawing in the Design window by clicking Window > New > Engineering Data Editor. You are permitted only a single representation of an item in any one drawing. • 6. and Equipment Type.

too. If you want them joined together. at each segment vertex along the line route. The software places handles. use the commands on the Line Routing ribbon to help construct or modify the line. they are not automatically joined together. The Break Run command is still available for this purpose. You can add vertices to add segments to the line using the commands on the Line Routing ribbon. If they pass the property criteria. Lines consist of a series of line segments. or connect lines. those pipe runs are automatically joined together if they have the same properties. The software also provides a shortcut menu associated with lines. Pipe runs that only have zero length connectors are aggressively joined up with the pipe runs they attach to. represented by black squares or dots.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Routing Lines: An Overview Whether you are routing pipe or signal lines. Line Connectivity When a new pipe run is placed such that it connects to existing pipe runs at either end. Of course when two pipe runs with differing properties are joined into one. the two pipe runs are tested for compatibility. The automatic joining takes place in the same way for both placement and modification of connectors. the two pipe runs are joined and the new connector is actually merged with the existing connector. You use this menu to break runs or join runs. the Join Runs command is still available for this purpose. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at a component that belongs to an existing pipe run. Right-click a line and choose from several commands. You can use these vertex handles to move. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at the endpoint of an existing connector. You can also use this menu to construct select sets of pipe runs. reroute. if you must define two different properties for two parts of a single pipe run. the properties of the surviving pipe run are retained and the others are lost. then the pipe run must be broken. 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The zero length pipe run that gets created when one inline component is placed directly up against another inline component is automatically joined to the existing pipe run. If two pipe runs have different properties. the properties for pipe runs with zero length connectors need not match. they are automatically joined together. Similarly. After you select a type of line route from the Catalog Explorer list view. The pipe run created in this way has a zero length connector that attaches the two symbols. The symbol placement command creates a new line when an inline component is placed directly up against an existing nozzle or other inline component. you can manipulate all lines by using the same basic procedures. the new pipe run is automatically joined with the existing pipe run. At the time that the connection is made.

Placing a pipe run that branches off of an existing pipe run does not cause them to be joined together. page 220 • Start a Line in Free Space. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. page 159 Line Routing Ribbon Appears when you select a line element from the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor or when you select an existing line in a drawing. Placing a new pipe run that connects to a reducer does not cause the pipe runs to be joined. page 162 • Break a Pipe Run.Allows you to route lines in any direction. Insert Segment . it remains there for the current design session unless you move it again. Reducers are always located at the end of a pipe run and never in the middle. page 159 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 157 . page 161 • Move a Line. page 161 • Move a Line. page 160 • Start a Line in Free Space. You can dock the Line Routing ribbon in the main toolbar. Related Topics Branch from an Existing Line.Causes the software to insert line segments instead of routing new lines or instead of moving existing lines. but you can use it for any line routing. page 165 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. instead of the usual constraint of horizontal or vertical line routing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Pipe runs always consist of a linear sequence of members and never include any branches. Note • All of the above information about pipe runs also applies to signal runs. page 162 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. This procedure is usually popular with signal and utility lines. page 164 • Branch to an Existing Line. page 220 • Start a Line from a Connect Point. Alter Segment .

Click a connect point on an item in the drawing. Continue clicking to place the vertices of the line in the drawing. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. • 4. In the Catalog Explorer list view select the line that you want to place. page 156 158 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . right-click to confirm the placement. • Tip You can click an empty point in the drawing to start the line. When the line is complete. Click to place the vertex at the next point in the line. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Route a Line 1. 5. too. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. Tip • You can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times. 3. Tips • This action displays the Line Routing ribbon and starts line placement mode.

click the connect point of the appropriate item to place the line. click the starting point for the line route. When you complete the line route. If the Properties window does not appear. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 159 . Click the location for each vertex of the line. click the line that you want to place. • 3. Notes • You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. right-click to place the line. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. Tip Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction. In the drawing. Tip • If you want to route the line to a connect point of an existing item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line in Free Space 1. 2. including the termination point. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor. 4. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview.

When you complete the line route. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. click the type of line that you want to place. Notes • To stop placing lines in the drawing. press Esc to quit line placement mode. In the Catalog Explorer list view. page 156 160 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. click the connect point from which you want to start routing your line.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line from a Connect Point 1. You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. Click the location for each vertex of the line route. 2. If the Properties window is not displayed. • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. right-click to place the line. 3. 4. you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. Or. In the drawing.

For more information. Notes • The line remains selected until you click another item or command. When the pointer turns into a double arrow to the appropriate location. Select the line that you want to add a vertex to. If the Properties window is not displayed. Drag the selected line to the new position. see Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. 2. On the Line Routing ribbon. Point near the center of the line where you want the new vertex.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line 1. select the existing line that you want to insert a segment into. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Notes • . You can change values for properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. 3. you can hold Shift while moving a line to insert segments. page 165. click Insert Segment Tip Instead of clicking Insert Segment. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 161 . • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. You can join two pipe runs that have different property values. press Alt and drag the new vertex You can also insert line segments into an existing line. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Press Esc to stop adding segments. You can also break a line at a point. • . see Break a Pipe Run. page 161. 3. For more information. In the drawing. The resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. page 156 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line 1. 2.

If the Properties window is not displayed. When you complete the line. You can extend a line to an existing line to create another branch point. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the last step above. click a point on an existing line route to begin placing the branch. click the type of line that you want to place. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. press Esc to quit line placement mode. press Esc to quit line placement mode. To stop placing lines in the drawing. click a point on the existing line where you want to end the branch. Notes • The starting point for a branch can be a point in free space. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. Notes • Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. • • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. 4. To complete the line route. right-click to place it. page 156 Branch to an Existing Line 1. click the type of line that you want to place. In the Catalog Explorer list view. you can display it by selecting the line and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. 2. In the drawing. or a connect point on an item in the drawing. 3. Or. 4. • • 162 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. Or. a point on an existing line. click the starting point for the branch. To stop placing lines in the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Branch from an Existing Line 1. 2. In the drawing. In the Catalog Explorer list view.

2. click the position for the other side of the gap. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 163 . Note • Gaps are parametric symbols. You can resize the gap by dragging the parametric handles. page 156 Add a Manual Gap to a Line 1. Select the appropriate gap from the Catalog Explorer. Then on the same line. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview. see Scale a Parametric Item. If the Properties window is not displayed. page 239. click the position for one side of the gap. On the line. Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. For more information on resizing parametric symbols.

Select the equipment. page 156 • 164 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . specify values for the HT Medium. 2. Select list values are defined in Data Dictionary Manager. Format Manager contains definitions for temperature units. page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 258 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. page 152 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. piping component. • • Related Topics Assign Heat Tracing. page 164 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. If you assign heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign Heat Tracing 1. In the Properties window. pipe run. Tips • If you have already specified insulation properties for the item. You choose the units for the HT Medium Temp property when you assign the temperature value. your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted. You choose the HT Medium and HT Requirement properties from select lists. and HT Requirement properties. or instrument that you want to specify heat tracing for. then you cannot subsequently assign heat tracing properties. HT Medium Temp.

click Break Runs. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu. Tip • The software breaks the selected pipe run into two separate runs at the selected point. 2. In the drawing. page 165 • Routing Lines: An Overview. • Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break Run Command Line Shortcut Menu > Break Run Enables you to break a pipe run at an arbitrary location. then you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. If the Properties window is not displayed. In the drawing. Related Topics Break a Pipe Run. right-click the pipe run that you want to break. Notes • You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking it and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. click the line at the point you want the break it. click the point where you want to break the run. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 165 . 3. page 156 • Break a Pipe Run 1. On the shortcut menu.

In the drawing. 3. click on the line that you want to join to the selected line. On the shortcut menu. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. page 156 166 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 156 Join Pipe Runs 1. 2. the resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking the pipe run and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. right-click the first pipe run that you want to join. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. click the second pipe run to join the two runs. For information about breaking runs. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu. If the Properties window does not appear.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Join Runs Command Line Shortcut Menu > Join Runs Enables you to join two lines together into one pipe run. see Break a Pipe Run. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. click Join Runs. Notes • If you join two pipe runs with different properties. In the drawing. page 165. Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs.

The software includes a standard group of piping component symbols. In drawings. In the Catalog Explorer list view. 3. to review the possible placements for the component and select a final orientation for the item. or PickQuick. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols in Catalog Manager as needed. piping components automatically orient themselves when you drag them near an existing pipe segment. However. the software automatically creates a relationship between the pipe route and the component to create a pipe run. reducers. flanges. In the Properties window. the pipe route and the associated piping components both move. Generally. and strainers. page 167 Place a Piping Component 1. if you drag a horizontal valve to a vertical pipe. Your plant administrator can modify the relationships between piping components and piping in Rule Manager. you can display it by selecting the component and then selecting Edit > Properties. Drag the item to the appropriate pipe run in the drawing. Piping components include valves. you can use the Configuration tool. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 167 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Piping Components: An Overview Piping components are graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment. When you move the pipe run. enter values for the properties of the piping component in the appropriate rows in the table. 4. Tip • If the Properties window does not appear. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. If several possible orientations exist for the piping component. page 164 • Place a Piping Component. Position the item and release. the valve automatically orients itself vertically. 2. As you place piping components. piping components are connected with lines. For example. click the piping component that you want to place.

the piping component is placed in free space if the placement rules allow the action. 1. or the pointer passes over runs while you are in placement mode. drag one component along the line away from the other leaving the desired distance between the two. or PickQuick to select the appropriate placement for the item. If the components are already close to each other but not connected at coincident connect points. If you place a piping component when a pipe segment is not highlighted. the pipe run is highlighted. If you want to be able to place two inline components an arbitrary distance apart. 2. • If you want to move a piping component but preserve its connection to the pipe run. you can use the Configuration tool. While holding down the Alt key. you can use the Alt key as you drag the component. the line routes itself so as to preserve its connection to the component. you must drag one off of the segment to disconnect it and then move it back to get the connect points attached. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 167 168 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can see that the connect points are actually joined by the black rectangle in the Drawing view: • • 3. If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. page 156 • Using Piping Components: An Overview. do the following. Place the second component into the line and connected to the connect point of the first component on the end that you want to attach to. Place the first component in the line. regardless of minimum distance settings in Options Manager. Then even if you drag the component away from the line.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • As you drag piping components over a pipe run.

ForeignCalc program ID. In continuous validation mode. In Data Dictionary Manager. and us_pjstb.pdtable_201 and pdtable_202 tables library files . which is activated by assigned settings in Options Manager.us_pjstb. For more information about modifying the PipeSpec settings. and ValidateServiceLimits. The database tables and library files in the 3D product provide source information for the validation and search.dll. For more information about assigning program IDs. pressures. which is assigned to the Nominal Diameter property. starts the Piping Specification utility and triggers the commodity code and fabrication category lookups when a nominal diameter is changed.l. us_pjstb. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 169 .l. operating. The service limits validation and automatic commodity code lookup can be disabled simultaneously using a switch in Options Manager.r.dll.pdtable_102 table ra schema . the ValidateNomDiam.dll. and diameters assigned to the pipe run and to search commodity codes and fabrication categories for piping components.dll files .t . a warning displays the appropriate pairs. alternate design. see Data Dictionary Manager Help. This warning appears in the design software by appending an error string to the name of the PMC.dll Performing Service Limits Validation The Piping Specification utility verifies that the temperatures and pressures assigned to a pipe run comply with the service limits associated with the selected Piping Materials Class. pdpjsx. see Options Manager Help. PDS 3D Files Used For PipeSpec • • • • pd schema . this verification occurs each time that you modify either the Piping Materials Class or a temperature – pressure pair in the process case data of the pipe run.PipeSpec. and alternate operating cases. If any temperature-pressure pair violates the service limits of the selected Piping Materials Class. pdpjs.l. The Service Limits validation requires at least one complete temperature-pressure pair from among design.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview The Piping Specification utility works with PDS 3D or SmartPlant 3D to validate the piping materials class with the temperatures.

that the PMC of the pipe run must be populated and comply with service limits. If the PMC is assigned but does not comply with the service limits. The Fabrication Category property of inline piping components is a select-listed property in SmartPlant P&ID. then a value of zero Deg-K is assumed for each of the unspecified temperatures. then the lookup encompasses every piping component on that run. then the utility returns a commodity code only if all of the records have the same code value. and that the nominal diameter of the piping component must be specified. then the lookup insures this value is larger than all of the process case temperatures assigned to the pipe run in which the piping component resides. If multiple records are obtained in the lookup. an error is recorded in the error-log file with the appropriate message. 170 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the process case temperatures on the pipe run are ignored for the lookup. a value of -9999 for maximum temperature in pdtable_202 indicates a null value. SmartPlant symbols are assigned the same AABBCC Code properties in Catalog Manager. then the lookup is restricted to that particular component. this lookup occurs each time the Piping Materials Class or any of the four case Max temperatures (Design. If any temperature values for the pipe run are unspecified. For example. The Commodity Name is a unique name for every symbol. this unique name is the AABBCC Code property. If a maximum temperature exists for that component. Alternate Design.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Performing Commodity Code and Fabrication Category Look Up The Piping Specification utility looks up the Commodity Code and Fabrication Category properties of inline piping components. The PipeSpec utility uses process case temperatures of the run during the commodity code lookup only if the code for that component has a maximum temperature limit value in the 3D database. The minimum requirements to cause a lookup are that the piping component must be in a pipe run. If the modification occurs on a property of a piping component. In the continuous validation mode. Operating. Validation also occurs each time the Option Code or Nominal Diameter of the component is modified. in PDS 3D. and Alternate Operating) are modified on the pipe run. Note • The units for the PDS 3D maximum temperature are those specified in Options Manager. but if the modification occurs on a property of a pipe run. then the Commodity Code property displays an error message. A relationship between the fabrication category and the commodity name can be defined in the 3D databases. In PDS 3D. If not.

This can include checking service limits. Choose one. For more information about Piping Specification configuration. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. and depending on the settings in Options Manager. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec.log file in the directory assigned to the TEMP environment variable. This functionality is not available unless the proper settings are defined in Options Manager and the applicable Program IDs are assigned in Data Dictionary Manager. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. Short Value for the Option Code select list contains the PDS 3D indices corresponding to the appropriate Option Code text in SmartPlant P&ID. page 172 Piping Specifications Dialog Box Opens when you click the Calc button for the Piping Materials Class property (PMC) for a pipe run in the Properties window. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. the missing properties are listed in the log file. you can refer to the SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide by clicking Help > Printable Guides. Piping materials class . page 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 171 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Similarly. if minimum requirements are not met for the lookup. The PipeSpec utility uses the entries in the Short Value box of the Option Code list to obtain the Option Code used in the PDS 3D database tables. the Option Code property is a select list of text values in SmartPlant P&ID.Lists the PMCs in your piping specification. while it is a set of code numbers or indices in PDS 3D. For example. Note • Error messages are placed in the PipeSpecError. and allows you to choose a PMC from a piping specification. Error messages help you identify the cause of failure when the utility does not complete the tasks as expected. property validation for piping segments and inline components is run.

For more information. Notes • If you subsequently assign nominal diameters to inline valves or other components. respectively. then the commodity code property becomes Not In Spec. such as Nominal Diameter. and the PipeSpec utility looks up accepted diameters and validates the assignment. see those Help files. see Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. If you choose a diameter. • 2. 4. you can manually assign commodity codes to inline components. SmartPlant P&ID assigns commodity codes and fabrication categories to them that correspond to the PMC of the pipe run and the specifications in your 3D databases. the PipeSpec utility copies properties and checks limits in the entire run. including inline components. and so forth. that does not exist for the assigned PMC. Given the appropriate settings in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. page 169 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . for instance. Select the Piping Materials Class property for the pipe run in the Properties window. Select the pipe run. For more information. Tip • Based on the chosen PMC and other assigned properties. Click the Calc button . 1. On the Piping Specifications dialog box. If you choose temperature-pressure limits for process cases that do not agree with the assigned PMC. Maximum Design Temperature. page 173. • • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. Maximum Design Pressure. choose the appropriate PMC from the list and click OK.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. then the error Service Limits Error is added to the PMC for the run. 3.

page 169 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 173 . Select an inline component that belongs to a pipe run whose piping material class has been defined. • • • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. or you can open the error log. In the Properties window. but so it the Fabrication Category property for the inline components. For more information on assigning a PMC. 1. given that the relationship exists in the 3D databases. With continuous validation. However this does not verify that the component agrees with a piping specification. If continuous validation is not activated but other appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned. see those Help files.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. see Options Manager Help. not only is the commodity code defined automatically. Adding or changing the option code can change the commodity code. define the Nominal Piping Diameter property for the component. • 2.log. For more information about the error log. click Related Topics. you can still click the Calc button for the Commodity Code property and choose a code. PipeSpecError. For information about the settings required for continuous service limits validation. respectively. if the relationship is defined in your 3D database. For more information. then a pipe run with temperature-pressure limits that do not agree with its PMC produces the error Error in PMC in the commodity code for an inline component. page 172. see Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. Tip • You can verify that a commodity code and fabrication category have been assigned in the Properties window. Notes • If continuous validation is turned on for the PipeSpec utility. if properties have not been assigned as expected.

page 180 • 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Typically. however. the pipe segment appears selected. in a plant process. Offline instruments include flow controllers. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop. such as orifice plates. As you drag inline instruments over a pipe segment. Instrument Loops You can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. flow controllers. and pressure regulators. computing devices. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as your plant requires. and piping. such as orifice plates. such as flow or temperature. page 178 • Assign Heat Tracing. Inline instruments include instrument valves. or electrical switches. the instrument is placed in free space. The software includes a standard group of instrument and instrument loop symbols. flow controllers. Related Topics Add Instruments to a Loop. these instruments monitor and control inline instruments. level gauges.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Instrumentation: An Overview You can place various types of instrumentation in your drawing. Offline Instruments Offline instruments are components that you do not insert into a piping segment. Instruments loops are a group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can transfer from one function to the next to measure and control a process variable. such as pressure regulator valves. Signal lines are intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. page 164 • Place an Inline Instrument. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. and other instrument components. inline instruments. and system functions such as digital control stations or computers. flow indicators. Inline Instruments Inline instruments are components that you can insert into a piping segment. If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. Instruments are devices used directly or indirectly to measure or control a variable. Instruments can be items such as flow control elements.

If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. Position the item and release it. Tip • If the Properties window is not visible. if you want to list only loop tags that contain the letter F. If the item you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. 3. simply type %. page 178 • Place an Inline Instrument. 4. click the inline instrument that you want to place. you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. 2. or PickQuick. %.. to select the appropriate placement for the item.. page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. For example. is a wildcard. the pipe run appears selected. If you want to display all available loop tags.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window) Allows you to search for and specify the loop tag for the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window. page 180 Place an Inline Instrument 1. limited by parameters that you enter here. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop. you can use the Configuration tool.Allows you to type in descriptors to display the available loop tags. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the stockpile. You can choose a tag from the main window and click OK in order to assign the tag to the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window. Notes • As you drag inline instruments over a pipe run. the instrument is placed in free space if rules defined in Rule Manager allow such a placement. In the Properties window. Search for . specify properties of the inline instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. Search Now . This dialog box opens when you click the ellipses (. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 175 . Drag the item to the appropriate line in the drawing. The percent character.Finds and displays the loop tags that match the criteria in the Search for box. you could type %F% in the Search for box.) button next to the loop tag cell.

When a value for one of the affected attributes changes on the pipe run. if the pointer is below the pipe run.ForeignCalc is not delivered as part of our sample validation. and it was previously equivalent to the value on the inline component. • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. This copying behavior is based upon the pipe run properties that should have their values copied to the in-line components. you can decide the orientation for the heat tracing on the inline instrument at placement time. page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview. Also. The way this works with the attributes that have that ID is that the software is watching the pipe run and the inline components. By keeping the pointer either above or below the piping. then the heat tracing appears above the instrument and vice versa – regardless of the heat tracing orientation on the piping. updating the pipe run will not affect the inline component. If the values were different. the routine UpdInlineCompProp. Notice the only attributes that are delivered with this validation ID. CoatingReqmts. You may determine which properties should be copied. You must specify that particular validation id in order to use the functionality. Validation takes place between the pipe run and the inline components on that pipe run with the result that you may see some properties values being copied from the pipe run to the inline component. page 156 176 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . then an update to the pipe run will update the inline component.ForeignCalc in the Validation ID field for the PipeRun Property. MaterialOfConstClass. It has the one involved in the pipe spec access. and ScheduleOrThickness. This is configurable by adding the ProgID called UpdInlineCompProp.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • While placing an inline instrument on a pipe run with associated heat tracing. They are CleaningReqmts. Nominal diameter is also included although it does not have that particular Validation ID specified. You can use Data Dictionary Manager to sort the properties by Validation ID using the Piperun table.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Offline Instrument 1. page 164. see Assign Heat Tracing. 2. You can assign heat tracing to offline instruments. too. then you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. In the Catalog Explorer list view. you can mirror. rotate. Position the item and release to place it. page 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 177 . For more information. After you place offline instruments. you can escape placement mode by rightclicking. • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. click the offline instrument that you want to place. or move them. After you place items. 3. you can connect them to piping segments or inline instruments using signal lines. the software inserts the offline instrument in the signal line. Press Esc to quit placement mode. enter values for the properties of the instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. 4. Or. Tip You can click an item from Catalog Explorer and then place it by clicking the appropriate location in your drawing. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing. page 215 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. • Tips • If the Properties window is not visible. • Notes • If you place an offline instrument over an existing signal line. In the Properties window. just as piping components are inserted into pipe runs.

and you can either place instruments then create the loop or create the loop and assign instruments to it as you place them. Select the item that you want to associate with the instrument loop. 3. Select the item tag of the loop from the Loop Tag select list in the Properties window. From the Catalog Explorer tree view Loops node. After you create instrument loops. 4. 8.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Add Instruments to a Loop 1. Notes • Selecting the item tag of the loop for an instrument triggers the Item Tag Validation program. Select Send to Drawing Stockpile or Send to Stockpile from the shortcut menu. you can create a customized loop report to generate lists of items in specific loops in your drawing or plant. 5. page 265. you do not need to place the loop symbol in the drawing itself to create an occurrence. Choose the appropriate loop from the resulting list. If you need to refresh the instrument Loop Tag Suffix display in the Properties window. Define properties for the loop by entering values in the Properties window. placing the loop in the stockpile adds the loop to the model. right-click the instrument loop that you want to place. The software automatically generates a unique item tag for the instrument. You can assign a group of instruments and other elements to a loop by creating a select set of them and assigning the correct loop tag for the set. Moving the instrument loop itself to another stockpile has special limitations. 6. 7. Instead. 2. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor to display elements of the loop. • • • • • • 178 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . clear selection of the instrument and then select it again. Click Search Now. The software automatically generates an item tag when you enter a tag suffix. or you can click the Calculation button next to the Loop Tag box in the Properties window. Since loops are logical collections of instruments rather than physical groupings. Instrument loops normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. enter characters in the Search for box in order to display the available loop tags. On the Loop Tag dialog box. You can assign the Loop Tag qualifier to instruments that you have already placed in your drawing or that reside in the stockpile.

page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). page 83 • Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) 1. page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If the Properties window is not visible. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Click in a checkbox to select and update the instrument associated to the displayed loop. you can display it by selecting the instrument or loop and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 179 . Related Topics Generating Reports: An Overview. page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Click OK. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview.

page 174 180 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . too.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Remove an Instrument from a Loop 1. In the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing. First. select the item or items in the drawing. • • • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. If the Properties window is not visible. The Delete command is not carried out if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. You can remove an instrument from a loop by deleting the item from the model. the instrument item tag remains the same until the instrument is assigned to a new loop. you can display it by selecting the item and then clicking Edit > Properties. select the item or items that you want to remove from the loop. In the Properties window. remove the value for the Loop Tag property for the selection. If you remove the loop tag property. validation automatically creates an instrument item tag. Notes • When an instrument is assigned to a loop. 2.

Since only the label properties appear when the label is selected. these properties perform their function in the background and are invisible to you. A label always reflects the current property values of the item that it labels. you can place free text in an item note. You do not see label properties while using the design software.or 2-Point Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Yes Fit Graphics to Text Yes SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 181 . Labels that do not overwrite the property at placement are called driven labels. Break Labeled Item Type Placement Type Leader Line Terminator Type Offset Distance Offset Source Behavior Area Break Title Block Yes 1-Point Flow Arrow Yes 1-Point Component Yes 1. you are entering data into the database. you cannot edit text such as OLL= on the OLL Elevation Equipment label. these properties dictate label placement behavior. the corresponding labeled properties for its item appear in the Properties window. the plant administrator can define text content inside the label with the SmartText editor in Catalog Manager. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager. the predefined property value in the label overwrites the current property value on the item that it labels. Labels that populate a property at placement are called driving labels. The same properties appear in the long list of properties when you select the item itself. Different labels have different label properties. When placing a label later. After the creation of a label. you have an easier method to find to the label properties. In other words. the software parses the UOM and ignores the double-quotes (or tick marks).Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Labeling: An Overview Your main tool to add or edit text content that appears in a label is the Properties window. The following table identifies some of the label properties that are defined during label creation in Catalog Manager. Note If you enter text with a recognized unit of measure using a quotes or double-quotes. Nonetheless. At label creation time. Whenever you select a label. By adding or editing text.

Since there is no symbology associated with this type of label. Drag the label to the location that you want it to occupy in the drawing. that is. like 1. they contain text only (for example. Labels can have two-point placement or one-point placement. You use one-point placement when a single point in the drawing identifies both the item to label and the location of the label.Point for one-point placement. Special notes. you have an empty label. but the properties that normally appear have not been entered yet. the Short Description label for Equipment). • • • Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line. 182 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Afterwards. page 188 • Place an Annotation. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. and break) appear in columns. you select the label that you want from Catalog Explorer and then identify the item in the drawing that you want to label. First. Some labels have no symbology associated with them. You use two-point placement when you need one click to identify the item to label and a second click to indicate a different location for the label. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. indicate that the property applies under certain conditions. it would be essentially invisible on the drawing. Yes indicates that the property applies to that type of label. page 211 Placing Labels: An Overview You can place a label in a few basic steps. Label properties appear in rows. the first click also identifies the end of the leader. If you place a leader line with the label. You can add a leader line to a label by right-clicking on the label and choosing Leader line display. component. You set the placement type of a label at its creation in Catalog Manager. you cannot change the placement type in the design software. Labels can be moved by selecting the label and dragging the black square at the center of the label.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Table notes: • The four types of labels (title block. If you place such a label. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. flow arrow. empty labels display a question mark so that you can find them more easily and not unnecessarily repeat work. However. Not applicable indicates that the property does not apply to that type of label.

A line label follows a line when you change its angle. the software stops the sharing of data between segments of pipe. You must replace those labels individually to see the change whether those labels use the plant default setting or have the value set uniquely. the software does not delete the label but repositions it in an associated location on the line. changing from horizontal to vertical. All delivered labels use plant default units. and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window. After you place the matching connector from the stockpile into the related drawing. When you place an off-page connector (OPC). changing temperature from K to °C) does not change labels that are already placed in drawings.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Changing default label formats in Options Manager (for example. the software automatically creates and stores a matching connector in either a plant or project stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. for example. page 188 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 183 . where the number corresponds to the drawing. When you recalculate a line. for example). for example. The matching connector receives the value. From Drawing 123. which are defined in Options Manager. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. A label and its assigned leader line follow when you move a line. Change units in the SmartText Editor dialog in Catalog Manager to specify a different unit of measure in a label. • • • • Related Topics Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. In other words. When you place a property break label. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. you break the pipe run. the software automatically updates the matching connector in the original drawing (To Drawing 122.

consider placement of a Tag ID label on a valve. Properties include an Offset Distance value of . and an Offset Source value of local. If the label is designed for two-point placement. An example of twopoint placement is placing an equipment label on a pump. This valve received a label with one-point placement. a Cursor Location value of above midpoint. page 187 One-Point Label Placement To illustrate placing a label with this placement method. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Label from Catalog Explorer 1. 184 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If the properties of the label require two-point placement. • Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement. you place labels with one-point or two-point placement. Select the label that you want from the Catalog Explorer list view. These properties are set in Catalog Manager during label creation. the software places the component label.5 inch. Depending on the definition of the label. When you click the valve. You can edit the database properties for the labeled item after you have placed the label. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. click again to place the label where you want it in relation to other items in the drawing. An example of onepoint placement is placing an ID label on a valve. no leader line. Notes • Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. 3. and it is highlighted indicating that you can place a label. Click the item in the drawing that you want to label. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. You point to the valve. you must use item placement mode instead of the drag method.

The tolerance for the Select command determines the distance above and below the pipe run. If the pointer appears above the center (that is. A value of Zero offset distance aligns the bounding boxes. the label immediately moves to this position. Label Offset options can be universally applied by inputting a value in the Distances option in Options Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The dots on the valve and label are not part of these drawing items. In this example. Midpoints align at the y-axis of the local coordinate system of the symbol with the label. The dots represent the center of the bounding box. if a label offset is designated for the label during creation in Catalog Manager.0). Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. When you point to locations in the drawing and locate a valid target. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. For a pipe run. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. This y-axis alignment line crosses the center of the labeled item. These midpoints always align when you place a label with one-point placement. If the pointer appears below the center (that is. The property for offset source also affects label placement. designated in Options Manager. If the value for offset source is None. the software uses the default offset distance. Pointer position determines if you place the label above or below the component. page 188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 185 . page 21 • Manipulate a Leader Line. that value overrides the Options Manager setting. The label remains in dynamics (you can move the label to a different location before you place it) so you can confirm correct placement. however. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. The alignment axis is perpendicular to the line at this point. the y coordinate is a positive value) you are placing the label above the item. the local origin. the software aligns the center of the label at the center of the item receiving the label. Offset is always a positive value. the y coordinate is a negative value) you are placing the label below the item. The center of the bounding box is (0. This action allows you to place labels on a line and at the center of symbols. the center is the point where the pointer touches the line.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a One-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. Drag the label to the appropriate place in the drawing. 3. Release the label when the target is highlighted. Tips

When you drag a label over an appropriate target, the target is highlighted.

The pointer position, in relation to the item when you place the label, determines if you place the label above or below the item in the drawing. 4. In the Properties window, select or type values for the properties of the label in the appropriate rows in the table, if needed.

Notes

Title blocks, flow arrows, off-page connectors, and some component labels use one-point placement. A label display always reflects the values of the item with which it is associated. Labels that populate the item values at placement time are called driving labels. In other words, the predefined properties in the label overwrite current item properties when the label is placed. Labels that do not overwrite the item properties are called driven labels. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager. If you place flow arrow labels on a pipe run, the direction of the arrow changes depending on the flow direction of the pipe run. If the pipe run has no direction defined for it, the direction of the flow arrow label defines the flow direction of the pipe run. You can use the Configuration Tool, or PickQuick, to select the direction of a flow arrow as you place it. If you place an off-page connector on a pipe in the drawing, the software fills in the connector number and automatically adds a second off-page connector to either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. When you place the second connector in a drawing, the software automatically updates the number and name of the drawings in both offpage connectors. To display a leader line for the label, right-click the label, and then select Leader line display on the shortcut menu. If the Properties window is not visible, you can display it by selecting a label and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar.

186 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool, page 146 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Two-Point Label Placement
To illustrate placing a label with this placement method consider placement of an Equipment ID label on a pump. When you point to the pump, it is highlighted, indicating that you can place the label. When you click the pump, the software recognizes the pump as a target for the label. That action is the first point of two-point placement. At the location on the drawing that you want actually to place the label, click again. That action is the second point of two-point placement. After the first click, the pointer changes from a northwest arrow, , to a four-headed arrow, , until you place the label with your second click. During the time between the first and second clicks, the label is attached to the pointer.

This pump received a label by using two-point placement. (1) and (2) illustrate the two pointer positions and clicks required to place this label. Properties include a Rotation value of false and a Leader line value of true. These properties are set through Catalog Manager during label creation. With two-point placement, the software does not use properties for offset distance or pointer location. You can place the first point anywhere on the item to receive the label. The leader line points to this location. Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 187

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Two-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. In the drawing click the item that you want to label. Tip As the pointer passes over an appropriate target item for the label, the software highlights the item. To label the item, click the item when the software highlights it. 3. Click the location in the drawing for the label.

4. Quit label placement mode by pressing Esc. Tip Or, you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. 5. In the Properties window, specify the properties of the label in the appropriate rows.

Tip

If the Properties window is not displayed, you can display it by selecting the label and then clicking Edit > Properties.

Notes

After you place a label, you can move it and manipulate its leader line. For more information, see Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190

Property break labels and various types of component labels require twopoint placement.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a Break Label, page 196 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement, page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Copy Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the label that you want to copy. 2. Right-click the label and select Place New from the shortcut menu. 3. Associate the new label icon that appears at the end of the pointer with the new item by highlighting the item and clicking. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Align Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the labels that you want to align. Tip In order to align labels, you must be sure not to select any drawing items other than labels. You can remove an item from a select set by pressing Ctrl and clicking the item. 2. Click the appropriate alignment button on the main toolbar:
• • • • • • •

Align labels so that their bottom lines match Align labels so that their center points agree on a vertical line Align labels so that their center points agree on a horizontal line Align labels so that their left-most lines match Align labels so that their right-most lines match Align labels so that their top lines match

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 189

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Manipulate a Leader Line
1. Display the handles of the leader line by clicking the label that it belongs to. Tip In order to manipulate a leader line, you must display it. Right-click the label and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu. 2. Click a handle and drag the line to a new location.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Update Label Settings
1. Click Tools > Custom Commands. 2. On the Custom Commands dialog box, double-click UpdateLabelsCmd.dll. Tip

You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program.

Note

The UpdateLabelsCmd.dll refreshes the value of the currently placed label properties as displayed on the drawing. The command does not update the label based on modifications made to the label using Catalog Manager. To update the label if changes have been made using Catalog Manager, the label must be replaced in the drawing using Edit > Replace.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181

190 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using the Types of Labels: An Overview
The type of label that you place determines the workflow that you follow. You define the label type when you create a label in Catalog Manager. As defined in Rule Manager, rules apply when you are placing a label. The following four types of labels are Title Block, Flow Arrow, Component, and Break. Title Block The title block label is unique among label types because you do not have to identify the item to receive the label. The title block usually displays general information about a drawing. After you select the label in the list view, you can drag it to the location in the drawing where you want to assign the label. You cannot modify label properties for a title block. The different template files, which create new drawing files, contain different title blocks. Therefore, you can automatically place standard title blocks in standard drawings, which are built on standard templates. Or, you can create custom title block labels to fit your custom templates.

Flow Arrow You place flow arrows in process piping lines. When you place the label, the arrow orients itself with the flow in the pipe run if you have already defined flow direction. If you have not specified a flow direction, then the direction you place the flow arrow defines it for you (that is, a flow arrow is a driving label). As you drag the label from the list view of Catalog Explorer, pipe runs in the Drawing view are highlighted when you pause over them. Click a highlighted pipe run to place the label. Flow arrows require only one click to place them.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 191

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview After placing the label, you can change the flow direction of the pipe run in the Properties window, and the flow arrow reorients itself accordingly. You cannot change label properties that appear in the Properties window for a flow arrow.

Component This type of label identifies physical commodities in the model. A typical example is an Equipment ID label. Properties assigned to the label affect its behavior. Component labels have a unique property: Label Behavior. The values are defined in a select list in Data Dictionary Manager and are chosen in Catalog Manager when you create a label. The default value is Follow. Values for this property can include the following:

Follow (no rotate) - The label does move but does not rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Follow - The label does move and rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Fixed - The label does not move if you move the labeled item.

This illustration shows component labels that you use to label vessels, nozzles, and piping components. It also depicts both fixed and rotated orientations of labels.

192 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break A break label, or property break label, graphically shows that a change occurs or can occur in a property at some point in the process. This label indicates to the software that an inconsistency for that property is acceptable. As a result, the software does not issue a warning, or an existing inconsistency resolves itself when you place the break. Break labels do not set properties but note that a value change is acceptable for the property at the indicated point. Text included in the label reflects the property at that point. You can associate multiple property breaks with one point on the drawing.

You place property break labels, in the Segment Breaks node of Catalog Explorer, with two-point placement. Notes

You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. After you place the label, you can right-click the label, and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. Use care when you assign leader lines. You can place several break labels at one point, and multiple leader lines can be confusing.

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 193

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Title Block
1. Find the title block that corresponds to your drawing template in the Catalog Explorer List view. 2. Click the label and position it over the pre-defined title area on the drawing so that the elements of the label fall within the cells of the title area. 3. Click to place the title block. 4. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Tips

You can review the properties of the title block label in the Properties window, but for title blocks, you cannot modify those properties. If you want to modify drawing properties, which are displayed in the title block label, you can do so in Drawing Manager. For more information, see Drawing Manager Help. You can move the title block if you need to position it more carefully within the title area of the drawing. For more information, see Move an Item With the Select Tool, page 218.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Place a Flow Arrow
1. Find the flow arrow in the list view of Catalog Explorer and select it. 2. Position your pointer over the process line that you want to label. 3. If a flow direction has not been specified, then choose an orientation for the arrow so that it reflects the correct direction. Tips

If a flow direction has already been specified for the line, then the flow arrow orients itself so that it reflects that property.

If you pause over a line whose flow direction has not been defined, you can use PickQuick to position the flow arrow. 4. Click to place the flow arrow on the process line.

5. Continue placing flow arrows, or click Esc to quit placement mode. Note

You must change the flow direction of a line by changing the property in the Properties window. Do not rotate a flow arrow by using the Rotate command or the rotate handle in order to change the flow direction; flow direction is a property.

194 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. Place the pointer over the component that you want to label. page 186 and Place a Two-Point Label. 3. Place the label using either one-point or two-point placement methods. depending on the label. see Place a One-Point Label. choose the label that you want to place. For more information.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. 4. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. From the list view in Catalog Explorer. page 191 Place a Component Label 1. Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. page 191 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 195 . page 182 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. 2. page 188. Continue placing the same label or click Esc to quit placement mode.

2. Tip The Catalog Explorer Tree view node where break labels are located is called Segment Breaks. You can place several break labels at one point. • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. and multiple leader lines can be confusing. page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. page 191 196 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can right-click the label. Notes • You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. After you place the label.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Break Label 1. Place the break label using two-point placement. From the List view in Catalog Explorer. the second click (2) designates the location for the break label itself. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. select the break label that you want to place. Use care when you assign leader lines. Continue placing the same break label at other junctions in the drawing. or press Esc to quit placement mode. and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. page 313 • Placing Labels: An Overview. • 3. The first click (1) specifies the junction in the process line.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Label Properties: An Overview
The following label properties are available for specifying your labels.

Labeled Item Type
This property defines the type of item that your label is used with. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you must specify this property; you cannot change it in the design software. The property must be defined correctly to allow you to place labels. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you choose the labeled item type from the Item list in the SmartText Editor. That list is defined in Data Dictionary Manager, where all the valid item types are defined and stored. Examples of labeled item types include pipe run, instrument, piping component, equipment, and so forth. If you specify that the labeled item type is a pipe run, then you can place your label on a pipe run and not on any other type of item in your drawing. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Distance
This property defines the distance from the labeled item to the label. Offset distance applies for labels that are defined with one-point placement. This property also applies for two-point label placement if the property for offset source is set to Local. The property must be defined correctly in Catalog Manager to allow you to place your label. The actual plant-wide offset distance is specified in Options Manager. The software measures the distance from the bounding box of the item to receive the label and the bounding box of the label itself. Consider the offset as the clearance distance between the bounding boxes. Notes

The bounding box in SmartPlant P&ID differs from the SmartSketch definition of range. SmartSketch (A) uses the x-y coordinate range around an item. SmartPlant P&ID (B) uses a rectangular area.

For a line segment, the bounding box is the line itself.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 197

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Source
This property specifies the origin for the offset distance. The possible values for offset sources are None - The label does not have an offset. This value indicates placement at the center of the labeled item. Project Settings - Plant-level parameters determine the offset distance. You can use Options Manager to define the plant settings distance. Local - The label does have an offset, and the value for the Offset Distance property, which is specified in Catalog Manager, defines the offset to use. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the offset source property in the drawing software. Likewise, you set the local offset distance when you create a label, and you cannot change the property in the drawing software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Mirrorable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can mirror the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot create a reverse image. You define this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Disable Flip Text
This value allows you to rotate or orient text for readability. By default, the software displays text in a readable manner and will not allow it to display upside down. For example, if you move a label in a direction that would effect the readability of the text, the software automatically flips the text so that it can still be read. Using Catalog Manager, you can disable this option and allow the text to display upside down if needed. Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview, page 83

198 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Is Rotatable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can rotate the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot change the angular orientation. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Fit To Text
The value of this property is set to True if the label graphics must fit around the text when you place the label. The value of this property is set to False if the label graphics do not need to fit around text. You can change the designation in Catalog Manager. You can set the value to True only for enclosures that are circles, ellipses, rectangles, or parametrics. You set the Is Fit To Text property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. The following illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to False. The rectangle appears at the same size when you created it:

This illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to True. The rectangle resizes to fit around the text:

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188 • Place an Annotation, page 211

Is Leader Visible
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that the label includes a leader line. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that the label does not include a leader line. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. You can turn on or off the display of the leader line after you place the label.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 199

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note

To turn on or turn off the display of the leader line, right-click the label, and click Leader line display.

Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Label Terminator Styles
The Terminator Style property specifies the terminator, if any, to place at the end of a leader line. Choices include None, Arrow, Solid Dot, and so forth. This property applies only to labels whose value of the Leader Line property is set to True. You specify these properties when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the terminator type property in the design software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

200 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview
A connector is not actually a label but more like a component that includes a label. Placement behavior for a connector is very similar to a standard piping component label. OPCs, utility connectors, and piping components are inserted into a line. The drawing needs a connector when a line run continues on another drawing. The minimum information in the label portion is the drawing name to which the connector points and the connector number. Connectors do not have a property for flow direction, although most connectors use an arrowhead to indicate direction. When you place a connector, it does not set or respond to flow direction. The connector represents continuation, not connectivity or flow. During document creation, when you place the first connector of the pair, the software places the partner in either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing of your choice. The default placement for the partner is into the Stockpile. When you create a connector and place it in a drawing, the property for the drawing name is not defined. The partner in the stockpile reflects the drawing name in which its match was located. When you place the partner from the stockpile, the first connector is updated to reflect the drawing name where you placed the partner connector. As a result, you never need to type a drawing name, and the software guarantees a valid match. OPC pairs have a to and from orientation. The software does not use the graphical to and from distinctions, but reading the drawing is easier for you with this differentiation.

1. The OPC is a to connector if its connected point appears at the finish end of the connector. 2. The OPC is a from connector if its connected point appears at the start end of the connector. In order to switch between to and from orientations, you must disconnect the OPC from the line and then rotate or mirror it. Then you can reconnect the line to the other end of the OPC. At the time of placement, you can pause when placing the OPC and wait for the PickQuick toolbar in order to choose the correct orientation.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 201

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can delete a connector from the drawing, and the software moves it to a stockpile and updates the properties of its partner. To delete a connector from a stockpile, both must reside there, and you delete both from a stockpile. After you delete a connector, you cannot reuse the same number. You cannot change the connector number or drawing name in these labels. However, you can change other properties. If you copy a connector, the software must generate new connector numbers and add a partner to a stockpile. The property for drawing name changes to Null or Undefined for the copy. These properties exist for connectors:
• • •

Offset source is set to None. Rotation is set to True. Leader line is set to False.

In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Place an OPC or Utility Connector
1. From the list view in Catalog Explorer or from a stockpile, select the connector that you want to place. Tip In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology (for example, line weight and color) differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. 2. Click the location in the drawing where you want to place the connector.

Tips

You can place a connector in free space on the drawing and route a line to it, or you can place it at the end of a line that already is drawn. If you are placing a connector in free space, rotate or mirror the OPC after placement in order to get the correct orientation. Then route the line to it.

202 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you are placing a connector at the end of an existing line, you can wait for the PickQuick toolbar so that you can choose the correct orientation. 3. Modify the properties of the connector in the Properties window.

Tip

If you placed a new connector from Catalog Explorer, you can display and select the partner in the Engineering Data Editor and modify its properties, too.

Notes

Utility connectors support only one-to-one relationships. In other words, they come in pairs only. When you place a utility connector and its partner goes to a stockpile, that partner connector is of the same type as the first connector you placed. In order to change the partner connector to the other type of utility connector, you must place the partner in its drawing and then replace the symbol. For more information on replacing symbols, see Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

ToFromText Dialog Box (Properties Window)
Opens when you click To / From in the Properties window when an OPC or other connector is selected, and allows you to enter a text value to be displayed in the connector. Click the ellipses to open the ToFromText dialog box. Description - Allows you to enter to or from information for the connector. You can enter drawing names or numbers or other pertinent information about the connected drawing or the direction of flow. Related Topics Properties Window Command, page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties, page 87

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 203

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector
1. Click Tools > Options. 2. Go to the Placement tab. 3. Select or clear the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option. Note

If the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option is not selected, the Set Stockpile Location for Partner OPC dialog box appears whenever you place a connector. This dialog box allows you to place each partner OPC in the stockpile of a specific drawing.

Related Topics Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Store a Partner Connector
1. Place a connector in a drawing. 2. On the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box, choose the stockpile in which you want the partner stored. Tip

If you have not deactivated the default storage for connectors, this dialog box does not appear because the partner connector is placed directly into the Stockpile. However, you can change the default storage location. For more information, see Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204

Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move a Connector to Another Stockpile
1. In the Engineering Data Editor, select the connector that you want to move. 2. On the Engineering Data Editor toolbar, click File > Move to Different Stockpile. Tip

If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for, then the Move to Different Stockpile command is not available. That is, you cannot move a connector that belongs to a different drawing, for instance.

204 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview 3. On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box, select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing, you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. 4. In the Drawing list area, select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to.

Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Move Partner OPC Opens the Move Partner OPC dialog box, from which you can move the selected connector to the stockpile of any drawing in the active plant. This command is available only when the partner connector is located in the Stockpile. Related Topics • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Dialog Box
Opens when you click Move Partner OPC on the Connector shortcut menu. This dialog box allows you to move a partner connector from the Stockpile into the stockpile of a specific drawing, or vice versa. Plant Hierarchy - Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. When you select a node, the drawings associated with that node appear in Drawing list. Drawing list - Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree. Related Topics Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Move Partner OPC Command, page 205

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 205

right-click the connector whose partner you want to move. then the Move Partner OPC command is not available. In the Drawing list area. From the shortcut menu. see Open a Continuation Drawing. for instance. Tip If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for. 4. click Move Partner OPC. page 207. • Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing. you can use the Open Partner Drawing command on the shortcut menu to open the other drawing and move the connector from its stockpile. page 204. 2. However. On the Move Partner OPC dialog box. This command is not available if the partner connector is not located in the drawing stockpile. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile 1. In the Drawing view. you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to. • Note • If the partner connector is in a stockpile and is displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. page 201 206 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. For more information. you cannot move it. see Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. you can move it from there. That is. if the partner connector belongs to another drawing. page 201 Open Continuation Drawing Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Open Continuation Drawing Opens the connected drawing when the partner of the selected off-page or utility connector is in a drawing or a drawing stockpile. Related Topics • Open a Continuation Drawing. For more information about opening the partner drawing.

From the shortcut menu. Notes • Unlike the standard Delete command. this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely. Right-click the connector that you want to remove from the model. click Open Continuation Drawing. • Note • The selected connector and its partner in the Stockpile are removed from the model. which moves the selected item to the Stockpile. From the shortcut menu. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. • Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model. click Delete on the shortcut menu. In the case of the connector. 2. Tips • This command is available only when the partner of the selected connector is stored in the Stockpile. page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. If you want to move the connector to the Stockpile instead of deleting it completely from the database. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. Related Topics • Open Continuation Drawing Command. Right-click the connector. if you are deleting a connector. page 201 Delete a Connector From the Model 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Open a Continuation Drawing 1. the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile. 2. 3. page 201 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 207 . then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. page 201 Delete From Model Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database. click Delete From Model. Select the OPC or utility connector whose connected drawing you want to open.

The following tables list item types that are validated or calculated by the ItemTag project. and tag reformatting. The ItemTag project deals specifically with the following item types: instrument loops. but can be generated automatically. and equipment (other equipment. mechanical equipment. and the database tables and column names where modifications trigger calculation and validation. signal runs with a plant item type pipe run (hydraulic. Calculation can be triggered by the Item Tag property for any of the items shown in the tables below. instruments. exchangers. Legend Italics: Required for checking item tag uniqueness. Instrument Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Type Modifier Measured Variable Code Tag Sequence Number Loop Tag Suffix Tag Suffix (Instrument Type Modifier)(Measured Variable Code)-(Tag Sequence Number) Loop Tag Suffix(Tag Suffix) Instrument Loop Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Loop Function Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Instrument Loop Function)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Pipe Run Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Fluid Code (Unit Code)(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)-(Operating Fluid Code) 208 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . pipe runs. and so forth). equipment components. Bold Italics: Required for the item tag. connect to process. This project generates unique Item Tag values and maintains consistency between the Item Tag value and the properties used in its calculation. and vessels).Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Calling Item Tag Validation The ItemTag project performs calculations and validations for unique tag checking. automatic tag generation. Property validation is triggered when any property that comprises the Item Tag value is added or modified. This project disregards all other item types.

page 13 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. Item Tag cells for these item types are read-only except for those of signal runs. including item tag formats. page 268 • Review and Edit Item Properties. • • Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. For information on customizing the software. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide or click Related Topics. clear the selection of the instrument and then select it again. and Item Tag properties for instruments are not read-only so that implied instruments can have item tags that are assigned manually. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 209 . page 178 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Equipment Item Tag Structure Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Format (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Equipment Component Item Tag Structure Format Nozzle Item Tag Structure Item Tag Signal Runs (Plant Item Type Pipe Run) Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Operating Fluid Code Tag Sequence NumberTag Suffix Unit Code(Operating Fluid Code)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Notes • To refresh the instrument loop tag suffix in the Properties window.

pid file in SmartSketch can corrupt the file. remarks. and other information that you need to effectively annotate your drawings. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node. page 211 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Placing annotations works like placing any other component in a drawing. Note • Annotations are a way to place free remarks in a drawing. notes. It is called Item Note & Label. and it looks like this: 1. Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. Item note Related Topics • Place a Revision Cloud. there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it. which has an item type of item note. When you place an annotation. Caution • You cannot annotate drawings by opening them in SmartSketch and adding dumb graphics to the drawing. page 214 • Place an Annotation. You can use annotations to include any type of information previously inserted into a drawing using primitive commands. Opening and saving a . Because annotations are frequently parametric. often you can resize them to fit your needs. There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer. Annotations include everything from geometric shapes to extension and dimension lines. Annotation point 2. you can then place a label on the item note. and other information to your drawing. making the drawing unusable. however.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Annotations: An Overview Annotations are model items used to add notes. on a drawing. These labels allow you to enter the remarks.

see Scale a Parametric Item. In the Catalog Explorer list view. 3. page 188 and Place a One-Point Label. Click to place the annotation at the appropriate place in the drawing. The symbol is called Item Note & Label. page 239. 5. page 182 • Using Annotations: An Overview. there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it. page 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 211 . as in the procedure above. 2. place a design label on the annotation. For more information. select the annotation that you want to place from the Graphics folder. Assign text to the annotation in the Note Text property box in the Properties window. and when you add a label. Tip • You can also assign text to the graphic in the Note Text property box for the graphic. it automatically displays that text.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Annotation 1. see Place a Two-Point Label. and it looks like this: • 1. Item note Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview. page 186. For more information. Annotation point 2. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node. Note • You can resize annotations by dragging their parametric handles. Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. however. To add text to the annotation. Press Esc to quit placement mode. 4. There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer.

page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. for a group of items. 5. You can place area breaks that do not have common properties within or overlapping other area breaks. Tips • You can place a rectangular area break by dragging the pointer in the Drawing view. Place the area break shape around items in the Drawing view for which this area break applies. For example. including the area break shape itself. 2. specify the properties for the select set. Notes • • An area break is a logical grouping of design items. 3. • 4. Or you can place a multi-sided area break by clicking at a starting point and then clicking for each vertex of the shape. you can designate a portion as Supply By Contractor and a smaller portion as Supply By Owner. You can nest area breaks that have different values for the same property with one restriction: one area break must completely enclose the other area break. page 83 212 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Area Break 1. Press Esc to quit placement mode. In the Properties window. Create a select set of the items that you want to include in the area break. • Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. like fencing items with the Select Tool. Select the area break in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. The value for the inside area break overrides the value for the outside area.

select either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Moving the package itself to another stockpile has special limitations. In the Properties window. page 265. In the Properties window.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Package 1. 7. Right-click the package symbol in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. whichever is appropriate. 6. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Do not include those items in your select set because the package item tag does not appear in the Properties window if any member of the select set does not possess that property. choose Select Set from the Properties box. select items to be part of the package. 3. 5. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. In the Properties window. In the Drawing view. enter a value for the Item Tag property. If the Properties window is not visible. 8. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. From the shortcut menu. 2. Tip • Some catalog items do not possess the Pkg Item Tag property. Notes • Packages normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. Select the package in the stockpile. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 213 . click in the Pkg Item Tag box and select the appropriate value displayed list. 4. • Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.

In a clockwise direction. Related Topics • Using Annotations: An Overview. 4. 2. the line width and line style using the Symbology option in Options Manager.Small. select the Symbols > Design > Revision Cloud nodes. 5. continue clicking to place vertices on the revision cloud.Large or Cloud . Using the Catalog Explorer tree. 3. Right-click to complete the revision cloud. page 210 214 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Set the Area Break Style property to either a Cloud . Notes • You can change the symbology.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Revision Cloud 1. Click the starting point in the drawing for the revision cloud area.

while it allows modification of other characteristics of the item. you can modify the items in several ways. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside a piece of equipment. You can modify the properties of each item by selecting the item and changing individual properties in the Properties window. too. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. Also you can edit some item properties in the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. such as the length of its sides. If the plant model requires the deleted item. To redisplay a complete list of available fluid code values. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties. you can move items or groups of items from one location to another in the drawing. Notes • When modifying the fluid code properties of a line. and can be resized by using their scale handles. The fluid code list displays only codes beginning with the first letter of any previously selected fluid code for that line. You can permanently remove required items from the plant model using the Delete from Model command.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview After you place items in a drawing. such as angles between elements of the symbol. You can select a entire row by clicking on the corresponding row number to the left of the table and then viewing the properties in the Properties window and editing them there. you can delete the item. The software processes rules defined for items as you move them. you can mirror and rotate most items. delete the property for the fluid system. as well as as you place them. For example. Obviously. limits exist for possible placements. it disappears from the drawing completely. Resizing parametric items maintains certain characteristics of the item. you select a fluid code from the select list. Depending on the rules defined for particular items in the drawing. If the plant model does not require the item. and then the complete list of fluid code values appears. Many items are now scalable. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 215 . You can also move groups of items to another open drawing in the same plant hierarchy. If the Properties window is not open. and you can only move these inside the equipment. the item appears in the stockpile for later placement. If you want to change the orientation of items. If you want to remove an item from a drawing. You can resize or scale parametric items by using their parametric handles.

the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. page 215 • Undo Your Last Action. not one action for each member of the set. The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Running a command is usually an action. and you can undo them by repeated use of the Undo command. page 217 216 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and the action ends when another item is selected. page 241 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. This definition of an action holds true for select sets. and for multiple items selected in the EDE. page 239 Undo Command Edit > Undo Allows you to reject the last action that you completed. page 219 • Review and Edit Item Properties.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. The undo list is cleared if you perform any of the following actions: • Change the properties of the Drawing view on the View Properties dialog box Turn the display of inconsistency indicators off or on by clicking View > Show Inconsistencies Add a filter tab to the Drawing view Click File > Save Open a different drawing or toggle to another open drawing Open a new Drawing view or new Engineering Data Editor (EDE) Using commands in the EDE or on the Connector shortcut menu. page 87 • Scale a Drawing Item. Modifying item properties is an action. Up to ten operations are saved in the undo list. move a connector to another drawing stockpile Changing or viewing the claim status of drawing objects • • • • • • • An undoable action is defined in several ways. That is. too. page 223 • Move an Item Using the Move Button. modifying the properties of a select set is one action in and of itself. however.

You can use other view manipulation commands. while you are using the Move command. and you can move select sets. You can specify the locations by clicking the drawing sheet or by entering relative values in the Move ribbon. page 216 Move Command Edit > Move Moves items from one location to another.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Undo Your Last Action Click Undo Tips • • . Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Fit. Notes • If you want to move an item to another drawing. You can access this command from the Edit menu or the main toolbar. the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. Pressing Ctrl + Z also undoes your last action. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. move it to the Stockpile. the trays and nozzles move with the vessel. The Undo command stores up to 10 actions making this command available repeatedly. and you can no longer undo your last action. If the Undo button is not available. If you move an item that owns other items. then the undo list has been cleared. page 219 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 217 . open the second drawing and place the item from the stockpile. When you finish manipulating the view. • • Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button. You can move one or multiple items at a time. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. such as Zoom. For example. and Pan. Note • • The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. however. the owned items move also. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 144 • Undo Command.

typing a step value of 0. at a location where the software recognizes a keypoint . or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object.Increases or decreases the value in the ribbon boxes. 0.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move Ribbon Specifies the from point and to point when you move items.Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the y-coordinate. page 217 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Tip The pointer snaps to the keypoint thereby making it easier for you to control the exact locus of the move. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object. 3. and so forth. • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. 2. from 0. page 144 218 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Step Distance .Copies the items in the select set when you move them. X . Copy . Y .75. On the main toolbar. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview.Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the x-coordinate. For example. Position the pointer over the item but not over any of the handles of the item. Position the pointer over the item that you want to move. Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button. • Move an item with precision 1. 3. On the main toolbar. Drag the item to its new position. 2. Drag the item to its new position.25 and pointing away from the from point increases the distance in discrete steps. page 219 • Move Command. click Select Tool.25 to 0. click the Select Tool . Tip Dragging a handle modifies the item instead of moving it. page 144 Move an Item With the Select Tool 1.5.

and y-axis. Notes • If you move an item that owns other items.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move an Item Using the Move Button 1. move it to the Stockpile. press Ctrl when you place the item. Select the item and then drag it to its new location. while you are using the Move command. and Pan. the trays and nozzles move with the vessel. such as Zoom. If you want to copy the item. You can use other view manipulation commands. 4. You can use the Move ribbon to specify the to point. 2. the owned items move also. • • • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. You can drag an item without using Move. Select one or more items. Tip • . open the second drawing. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. and place the item from the stockpile. page 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 219 . For example. press Ctrl while you drag. Click to define the from point. When you finish manipulating the view. and you must click in the appropriate portion of the drawing to specify to which quadrant you want to move or copy the item or items. click Move 3. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. The values are relative distances along the x. On the main toolbar. If you want to move an item to another drawing. If you want to copy the items. Click to define the to point. Fit.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line 1. or press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. When you move a line segment. drag the segment to the new The software applies geometrical line routing rules as you move a line. page 221 • Routing Lines: An Overview. When the pointer turns into a double arrow location and release. press Shift as you move the line. the software changes the length of attached line segments to accommodate the move. Point near the center of the appropriate line. Notes • . If you want to override those rules. If the Properties window is not open. In the Drawing view. • • • Related Topics • Move a Line Using Vertex Handles. 2. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then selecting or typing the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line. 3. page 156 220 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . select the line that you want to move.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line Using Vertex Handles 1. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 221 . 2. Click an existing line in the drawing. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. 3. Notes • While moving the vertex handle to modify the line segment. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then specifying the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon or press Alt to allow the line segments to move freely at any angle. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line. Drag the vertex to a new position in the drawing and release. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Click the vertex handle of the line route that you want to move. If the Properties window is not open.

The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set. actuator. or item note) not in the select set but they are dependent on objects in the select set. The command removes these objects from the select set: • • • Inserted OLE objects are automatically removed from the select set. page 215 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. or item note) in the select set. these objects are automatically added to the select set. These conditions must be met in order for this command to be available: • The source and destination drawing must be open. and neither of these drawings can be read-only. that label is removed. If there is a label in the select set and the item that it labels is not in the select set. Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. equipment component. the Move To Drawing dialog box appears. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Command Edit > Move To Drawing Allows you to move a select set of drawing items into another open drawing. You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. it is removed. page 223 • 222 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and you can select the appropriate destination drawing. actuator. these labels are automatically added to the select set. The Move To Drawing command manipulates the select set in order to make sure the selected items are appropriate items to move. • OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. equipment component. • The command expands the select set to include the following objects: • If there are labels that are not in the select set but are attached to objects in the select set. If there are dependent objects (such as a nozzle. and if the parent object that it is dependent upon is not in the select set. If there is a dependent object (such as a nozzle. Title blocks are automatically removed from the select set. • • • If more than one possible destination drawing is open.

open read-only drawings. You must also have the item(s) selected that you want to move. Available drawings . • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 223 . If more than one possible destination drawing is open. the from point becomes the origin of the select set. Related Topics • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. 5. It contains a list of possible drawings that your item(s) can be moved to. and neither of these drawings can be read-only. Click Edit > Move To Drawing. The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set. While you are using a from point (or to in the destination drawing).Lists the open drawings that are available to be a destination for the Move To Drawing command. 2. and open assemblies.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to choose the destination drawing that you want to place a item(s) into. Select the drawing and click OK. click the from point. In the Drawing view. Select the items that you want to move into the destination drawing. page 222 Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing 1. open drawing templates. then select the desired destination drawing from the Available Drawings list on the Move To Drawing dialog box. 4. This dialog box displays only when you have more than one possible destination drawing open. In the Drawing view of the destination drawing. click Edit > Move To Drawing and click in the drawing to define the Select from point. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected. the pointer is a crosshair. Open the destination drawing if it is not already open. the following conditions must be met: The source and destination drawing must be open. Then. click the to point. The Move to Drawing dialog box displays. Those drawings that are not included in the list are the source drawing. • 6. Notes • In order for the Move To Drawing command to be available. 3. Tips • For the purposes of placement in the destination drawing. page 223 • Move To Drawing Command.

Since you have to switch to a different drawing. whose members are all moved to the new drawing. Logical relationships are preserved (for example. OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. loop or package relationships or plant group relationships). page 215 224 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . if a logical group such as an instrument loop. then that logical group moves to the stockpile of the destination drawing. resides in the source drawing stockpile. • • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. the Undo command is not available for moving a select set to another drawing. Also.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview The software has the ability to find items and inconsistency indicators in your drawing. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. The software also searches your drawing for inconsistency indicators so that you can review and correct inconsistencies systematically. Or. or even replace all items of one type at the same time. You have the capability to replace a single drawing item with a comparable item. Replacing drawing items is straightforward. replace many items one-by-one. page 226 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. You can define search criteria based on a catalog item or an item type already in place in your drawing. page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. When you find or replace drawing items. which allows you to search a drawing for items by using catalog items or a filter or to find inconsistencies in your drawing. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. You can replace items by using the options on this dialog box. they are added to a select set. too. Having found all drawing items of a certain type. you can define criteria based on a delivered filter or on a user-defined filter. page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. page 231 Find Command Edit > Find Displays the Find and Replace dialog box. and so you can view the common properties of the select set items in the Properties window and edit them if appropriate. page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. you can modify their properties or reposition them or even replace them with an item of a compatible type. the selected items are added to a select set. page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item. page 225 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 225 . The Find and Replace commands are not available in the Engineering Data Editor. As drawing items are found. too. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item.

• 226 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . select <Filter. Choose an option from the Search in list. page 225 Find an Item by Using a Filter 1. On the Find and Replace dialog box.. • 5. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Select an option from the Search in list. Click Edit > Find. 4. right-click the selected inconsistency and click Properties. Leave the Consistency Check dialog box open. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box. Notes • For detailed information about all your drawing inconsistencies one-byone. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found. Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when an inconsistency is selected. 4. and click OK. Click Find to select the first inconsistency. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. select <Inconsistency> from the Find what list. Continue clicking Find to advance through the drawing inconsistencies.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Find Drawing Inconsistencies 1. and click Find on the Find and Replace dialog box to display information on the next drawing inconsistency. Click Edit > Find. page 313 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. Click Find to search for and select the next item match in your drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing items that meet the selected filter.> from the Find what list. 3. select a filter to locate your drawing items. 2. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. On the Select Filter dialog box. 2.. 5.

• Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. Select an option from Search in. and click OK. • Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. page 225 Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item 1. 4. Click Edit > Find 2. 3. page 225 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 227 . and you can view the common properties of the set in the Properties window.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. • Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. Use the Direction options to change the order in which single drawing items are found. On the Find and Replace dialog box. 5. Click Find to select the first match in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found. select the catalog item type to search for. All the items are in the select set.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item
1. Select an item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Find. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select an option from the Search in list. Tips

On the dialog box, the Find what option is automatically defined according to the drawing item you selected in the first step.

Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 4. Click Find to search for and select the next matching item in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing.

Notes

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Replace Command
Edit > Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box, which allows you to replace some or all of the drawing items that match the search criteria defined by the options on the Find tab. Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

228 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace a Single Drawing Item
1. Select an existing item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Replace. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 4. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the catalog item to replace the selected drawing item, and click OK. 5. Choose an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 6. Click Find to search for and select the first matching drawing item. If the selected item can be replaced with the item specified in Replace with, the Replace command is available.

7. Click Replace to replace the selected drawing item and to find and select the next matching item. Tip

Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item specified in the Replace with box.

Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is replaced.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 229

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Filter> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Filter dialog box, choose the filter that you want to use to find drawing items, and click OK. 4. Select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, choose the catalog item that you want to replace the drawing items you find with your filter, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to make the Replace All button available.

8. Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item defined in the Replace with box. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231

230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type from the catalog that you want to find in your drawing, and click OK. 4. On the Replace with list select <Browse>. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type that you want to replace the found item type with, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to enable the Replace All command.

8. Click Replace All to find and replace all matching items. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 231

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Mode Command
Tools > Replace Mode Controls whether catalog items are placed as substitutions for existing drawing items or placed normally. When this mode is active, the software places catalog items only when they replace an existing drawing item. When this mode is not active, the software places catalog items as usual. The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. The replace mode functions very much like Edit > Replace. However, the replace mode works for only one item at a time and is not activated from inside a dialog box. The Replace Mode command copies properties of the current item onto the new item. You cannot use the replace mode for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233

232 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace an Item Using Replace Mode
1. Click Tools > Replace Mode or click Replace Mode on the main toolbar. 2. In Catalog Explorer, select the item that you want to place in the drawing. Tip You cannot use this mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor. 3. Move the selected catalog item over the drawing item that it is to replace.

Tips

The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. If the drawing item can be replaced with the catalog item, the replace is displayed, and the drawing item is selected. icon appears, click to replace the drawing item with the

4. When the replace icon selected catalog item.

5. Continue to replace more items with your currently selected catalog item, or press Esc to quit placement mode. 6. Click Tools > Replace Mode again to turn Replace Mode off. Notes

You cannot use the Replace Mode option for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. The Replace Mode command also copies properties of the current item onto the new item.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 233

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find and Replace Dialog Box
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This dialog box opens when you click either Edit > Find or Edit > Replace. Depending on your command choice, you access one of the following tabs. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228

Find Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Allows you to search the drawing for specified items. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. Find All - Initiates a search for all items matching the search criteria and adds them to the select set. The active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. 234 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter, page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item, page 228 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace Command, page 228

Replace Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This tab is on the Find and Replace dialog box. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Since you cannot replace an inconsistency, if you select the Inconsistency option from the Find what list, the Replace with option is not available. Replace with - Allows you to enter a new replacement item or select a replacement item from a list of the five most recently used items, which are listed below the dashed line. You can define a new replacement item by selecting Browse and picking a catalog item from the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 235

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Replace - Replaces the item selected when you clicked Find. The Replace button is available only when the item found can be replaced by the item defined in the Replace with box. Each time you click Replace, the located item is replaced, and the Find command continues based on the Direction setting. As each drawing item is found, the active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. Replace All - Replaces all items that match the Find what criteria with the item defined in the Replace with box without prompting you. After all of the replacements are completed, the software reports the number of matches found and the number of replacements that were made. The active view is also updated depending on the Scroll mode setting. Related Topics Find Command, page 68 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

236 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter.Displays a hierarchy of nodes that contain catalog items. Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. to choose item types for tables. To open a node. which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter. This dialog box is constructed much the same as the Catalog Explorer window. If you create a compound filter. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Using this dialog box. page 230 • Select Catalog Item Dialog Box Allows you to select a catalog item type for the search criteria when you use the Find or Replace commands. you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. depending on your selection in the filter list. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters. • • New .Displays the New Filter dialog box. If the selected node contains any drawing symbols. List View . Tree View . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 237 .Allows you to see and use Catalog Explorer shortcut buttons to navigate to catalog items more quickly. Properties . click the minus sign to the left of the node name. Navigation Bar . To close a node. Related Topics Create a Simple Filter. or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter. page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. You can navigate through the tree view by clicking the different nodes. select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters.Displays the symbols that are associated with the active node in the tree view.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views. Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box. click the plus sign to the left of the node name. the software displays them in the list view. Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view. Only the contents of one node appear.

page 228 • Find Command. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to scale the item correctly. page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. You can drag any one of the handles. or scaled. You can mirror items by dragging the mirror handle in the appropriate direction. You can scale the item parametrically by dragging any parametric handle. • • • Not all drawing items in can be mirrored. 238 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 226 • Replace Command. Note also that select sets cannot be mirrored or rotated with component handles. bottom center. The Mirror and Rotate commands on the toolbar can be used for select sets. Parametric handles can be located in four standard positions: top center. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to rotate the item correctly. Component handles allow you to rotate or mirror a component around axes. defined in relation to the origin of the item. • The mirror handle allows you to mirror about the horizontal and vertical axes. page 228 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview Many components allow you to change their shape or orientation using component handles. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. rotated. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. and right center of the range of an item. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol. Scale handles allow you to change the scale of a drawing item. and you can use component handles to scale or resize parametric items in a drawing. Parametric handles allow you to modify different parts of parametric items. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to mirror the item correctly. Standard parametric handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have been applied to an item. A scalable symbol displays four solid square scale handles. The rotate handle provides a mechanism for rotating components around their origin. You can rotate items by dragging the rotate handle in the appropriate direction. Catalog Manager defines these properties for items when the symbols for the items are created. Items can have several different types of component handles. left center. and the symbol scales either larger or smaller depending on the direction that you drag the handle.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. 2. page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. in the middle of each side of the item to 3. depending on the direction that you drag the handle. Scalable symbols are created by setting the IsScalable property of the symbol to True in Catalog Manager. Drag any one of the handles to make the symbol either larger or smaller. Tips • A scalable symbol includes four solid square scale handles . Select the parametric drawing item that you want to resize. such as angle values. page 239 Scale a Parametric Item 1. page 244 • Scale a Drawing Item. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. page 215 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 239 . Continue dragging the parametric handles until the item is the size that you want. • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. Note • Certain properties of the parametric item. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol. page 215 Scale a Drawing Item 1. Select your scalable item in the Drawing view. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Drag one of the parametric handles change the size of the item. remain the same when you resize it. page 241 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. 2.

You can mirror the item itself. For example. Related Topics • Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define. or you can make a copy of the item in the mirrored position. page 240 240 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Mirroring is displayed dynamically so that you can see the result of your action before you release the item to place it. Setting the position angle to zero extends the axis horizontally to the right of the screen. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle.Sets the angle of the mirror axis. pause over an option and read the ToolTip. Position Angle . The software reflects one or more selected items about that axis. and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom. page 241 • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. page 241 Mirror Ribbon Appears on the main toolbar when the Mirror command is active. or mirror and copy. 180 extends the axis horizontally to the left. You can also use mirror handles. The origin of the angle measurement is the point that you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. dragging a mirror handle across an x. Note • To determine the option name on the ribbon. page 241 • Mirror Command. 90 extends the axis vertically to the top. click Mirror on the main toolbar. The mirror handle appears at the upper right of the item.or y-axis causes the item to appear mirrored about its center. To mirror an item using a defined mirror axis.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror Command Edit > Mirror Reflects one or more selected items about a line or axis that you define. and allows you to either specify mirroring options or to observe mirroring options. You can mirror without copying.Copies the item or items when you mirror them. Copy .

Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the item. On the main toolbar. page 215 Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define 1. Notes • Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. then use Rotate or Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. Define one end of the mirror axis by clicking in an appropriate empty portion of the drawing or by clicking a keypoint . page 253 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Click the mirror handle or click Mirror on the main toolbar. such as Zoom and Pan. 2. When you finish manipulating the view. hold Ctrl when you click to place your items. Select an item in the drawing. click Mirror . while you are using the Mirror command. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle 1. 3. you can use the Position Angle box on the Mirror ribbon. and then click. Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. as you move your pointer). Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. the software returns you to the Mirror command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. 2. You can use other view manipulation commands. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 241 . 4. Select one or more items. The software displays the mirror axis and the mirrored items dynamically (that is.

select the item and then click Rotate. the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. If you want to define a precise location for the rotation. The software then dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. you can use Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. 242 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the software returns you to Mirror at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. page 215 Rotate Command Edit > Rotate Rotates one or more items a precise distance or angle about a specified point. To rotate and item. that is. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to control the increments of the rotation. Select one or more items. if the box is set to 30. • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. When you finish manipulating the view. while you are using Mirror. you must specify two points by clicking in the drawing. By dragging the pointer over the item. click Mirror . 3.Defines the rotation point. The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between the old and new position. If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. Angles are always displayed as a positive value. Second Click . you can enter values in the Rotate ribbon. The mirrored items are displayed dynamically on the other side of the mirror axis. 2.Defines the rotation handle. and then click. 4.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element 1. For example. On the main toolbar. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. First Click . such as Zoom and Pan. locate a mirror axis. hold down Ctrl when you click to place your items. To define the rotation axis.0. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. it can take on any value. Notes • You can use other view manipulation commands.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Third Click - Completes the rotation of the item. Also, you can rotate an item about its center with the rotate component handle . Keeping the rotate component handle close to the center of an item causes the item to rotate at 90 degree increments. Dragging the rotate component handle further away from the center of the item causes the item to rotate at smaller angles. The angle increments become smaller the farther away your pointer is from the center of rotation. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244

Rotate Ribbon
Appears when the Rotate command is active, and allows you to either observe rotation options as you rotate an item or specify rotation options. Copy - Creates a copy of the item that you are rotating. Position Angle - Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the item, the position angle (C) changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point to which you rotate. The position angle is always a positive value measured counter-clockwise from the axis.

Rotation Angle - Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point from which you rotate and the point to which you rotate. In the following picture, the center of rotation (A) shows the point (B) from which you rotate the item.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 243

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated item. The value is always positive. Step Angle - Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in degrees, that an item rotates on a rotation axis. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244 • Rotate Command, page 242

Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle
1. Select an item in the drawing. 2. Click the rotate handle . 3. Drag the rotate handle in the direction that you want to rotate the item. Notes

You can click the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the item to change the step angle for the rotation. You can rotate items using the Rotate button on the main toolbar, too.

Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244

Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define
1. Select one or more items. 2. On the main toolbar, click Rotate 3. Click at the center of rotation. 4. Then, click to define the other end of the rotation axis. Tip The software dynamically displays the rotation axis and items being rotated. The location and position of the rotation axis defines the rotation from point. 5. Rotate the items into position by dragging the rotation axis.

.

6. Click to define the rotation to point.

244 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes

To rotate by arbitrary increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the Rotate ribbon. In order to copy the rotated items into the new position, you can hold Ctrl while you click to define the to point. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using the Rotate command. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to the Rotate command at the point that you were when you started manipulating the view.

Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview
You can delete items from a drawing by selecting them and clicking Cut on the main toolbar or by pressing Delete on the keyboard. Clicking Cut places the selected item on the Clipboard. This action allows you to paste the item in the same location in the drawing and then move it to another location as appropriate. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. The data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item, it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. Notes

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a select set from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. You can delete an item by selecting and right-clicking it. On the shortcut menu click Delete. If you select Delete from Model, the selected item is not only deleted from the drawing but also from the database. In other words, it is not placed in the Stockpile, regardless of its properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 245

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing, page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model, page 251

Cut Command
Edit > Cut Cuts selected items from the drawing and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected items replace the previous contents of the Clipboard. When you cut items, they go to the Stockpile, given appropriate stockpile settings. Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cut an Item from the Drawing
1. Select the item. 2. Click Cut Notes

.

After you cut an item and its associated properties, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste or Paste Special to paste the item and its properties into the current drawing or into other drawings or documents. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

246 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview, page 273 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

Paste Command
Edit > Paste Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same location that the items occupied in the source document or drawing. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Paste an Item With a Different Format, page 280 • Paste an Item, page 247

Paste an Item
1. Open the drawing in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard. 2. On the main toolbar, click Paste then select Paste. Notes

or right-click a blank area in the drawing and

The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Copy or Cut command again. Equipment components cannot be pasted back into the drawing after they have been removed using the Cut command. You cannot paste items if the Clipboard is empty (that is, if you have not previously used the Copy or Cut commands). Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste command.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 247

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Select All Command
Edit > Select All Selects all visible items in a view. Note

You can access this command when you right-click a blank area in a drawing or table, too. On the shortcut menu click Select All.

Related Topics • Select an Item, page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Modify an Item With the Select Tool
1. Click the Select Tool 2. Select an item. 3. Position the pointer over one of the item handles. 4. Drag the item handle to modify the item. For example, you can rotate an item with its rotate handle, mirror an item with its mirror handle, scale an item with its scale handle, or resize an item with its parametric handle. Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview, page 238 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144 .

Delete Command
Edit > Delete Removes the selected item. You cannot paste items that you delete; however, if the item moves to the Stockpile on deletion, then you can place that item again from the stockpile. Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing.

248 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Also, you can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items in a fence from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Delete an Item from the Drawing
1. Select an item. Tip To delete a large group of similar items, use a filter to display items to delete, then select the items displayed by your filter. For more information on using display filters, see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View, page 138. 2. Click Edit > Delete or press Delete on the keyboard.

Tip

When you use the Delete key on the keyboard to remove an item or items from the drawing, you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view.

Notes

If you want to delete the item, its location in the drawing, and its properties in the database, right-click the item and select Delete From Model from the shortcut menu. The item is not placed in the stockpile regardless of its settings or properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 249

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Remove an Item from a Drawing
1. Right-click the item that you want to remove. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete. Tips

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing, too. First, select the item or items in the drawing. Then you must place the pointer in the Drawing view and press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Or you can select Edit > Delete on the main menu bar after you select the items. You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor.

Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. For more information on deleting items from the model, see Remove an Item from the Model, page 251. When you delete inline components, the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. A stockpile item that is deleted automatically goes to the Stockpile. You can move it to a drawing stockpile from the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

250 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Delete From Model Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database; if you are deleting a connector, then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. Notes

Unlike the standard Delete command, which moves the selected item to the Stockpile, this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely. In the case of the connector, the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model, page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Remove an Item from the Model
1. In the Drawing view, right-click the item that you want to delete in order to display the shortcut menu. Tips

You can delete a select set from the model by choosing the items and then right-clicking on any member of the set to display the shortcut menu.

You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete from Model to delete the item from the drawing and from the plant model. That is, the item is not placed in the stockpile, and when you save the drawing, no data associated with the item remains in the database.

Notes

You can only remove items from the plant model that do not share a relationship with another drawing. You can permanently remove items that are not flagged as required for the model by selecting Delete from the shortcut menu.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 251

which you set in Options Manager. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Pant Stockpile. • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. For more information. the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. which you set in Catalog Manager. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. If the TagReqdFlag property is False. When you delete inline components. the data associated with the item remains in the database. page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing. page 265. page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. and is included in the StockpileItems group. However.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. page 250 252 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Several methods exist for doing this. After you copy an item. page 253 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. drag it to its new location in the drawing. Then you can use Paste to place it on the current drawing. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 253 . To see the pasted item. So a copied nozzle must be placed on a piece of equipment. 2. You can do the same with a select set. Remember that placement rules are in effect when you are copying an item to a new location. it is placed on the Clipboard. page 244 Copy Command Edit > Copy Copies selected items to the Clipboard. mirror. for instance.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Copying Items: An Overview Copying an item makes it possible to use a drawing item that is already in place as a starting point for placing a new item. You can copy an item with the Move command. page 247 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. and press Ctrl as you place the item in the drawing. or rotate a drawing item. the software frequently pastes it on top of the item that you copied. click Move on the toolbar. On the main toolbar. page 254 • Copy an Item. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. page 254 • Copy an Item. such as using the Copy button on the main toolbar or using Ctrl while you move. Select an item. Select the item. When you paste the item. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. page 253 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. click Copy Notes • .too. without removing the current item from the drawing. This command replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents. page 245 Copy an Item 1. page 280 • Paste an Item. just as they are when you originally place an item from a stockpile or from Catalog Explorer.

and so you must place the copy in an allowed position as if it were a new catalog item. Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line. page 273 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. 3. page 86 • Select an Item. page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. this command makes it possible to accomplish that goal. Note • The properties that define a run are specified in Options Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. Hold Ctrl and drag the copy to its new location. Select an item. Placement rules are in effect. page 144 on the main toolbar. but also lines and networks and all runs included in the drawing. page 144 Copy an Item With the Select Tool 1. In cases where you want the software to continue constructing a select set beyond a break in a line. Click Select Tool 2. Position the pointer over the item. 4. but not over any of the handles of the item. Selecting Connected Items: An Overview You can use the Select Connected Items command to navigate the line connectivity from a selected line segment to add components and other runs to a select set based on matching properties. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. for example. This functionality is useful for finding branches from runs and finding all the runs and components on an entire drawing that have a common property value. it is then a simple matter to choose the select set in the Properties window and continuing editing properties for not only runs. page 147 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . a nozzle. Once the items are selected in the drawing. page 256 • Customize the Properties Window.

however. Network. Scope List . page 148 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 255 . Scope . Notes • The Run option means that lines in a single run are selected. that is. one or the other or both is always active. and you can highlight items in the drawing and manipulate members of the select set while the dialog is active. once the dialog box is open. The Line option selects runs that are connected at end points. The default value for this list is Line. even if there are breaks in a network. Include Components . you can change the selected item in the drawing and change the scope of the select set freely. The Select Connected Items command. page 256 • Routing Lines: An Overview. is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected.Allows you to choose from Run. page 144 • Select Connected Items Dialog Box Allows you to construct a select set from lines and inline components.Incorporates lines into the select set. At no time can neither the Include Runs nor Include Components buttons be selected.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Connected Items Command Edit > Select Connected Items Opens the Select Connected Items dialog box. Related Topics Create a Select Set From a Line. The Network option adds branches. This dialog box remains open until you dismiss it. The Scope List allows you to choose extent. Line. This command is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected on the drawing. which allows you to create a select set that includes the active line and disconnected lines and inline components in any network. Include Runs . and the Drawing option selects all the runs and inline components in the open drawing. including components. Drawing. page 156 • Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool.Provides options for defining the extent of your select set.Adds inline components into the select set. and the Include Runs and Include Components buttons allow you to incorporate different items into the select set. page 254 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. which appears both on the Edit menu and on the Line Shortcut menu.

Displays properties grouped by specific categories. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. page 255 Create a Select Set From a Line 1. 2. • Tips • You can use the Ctrl or Shift buttons to select more than one property value. You can choose an empty property value for matching criterion.Lists properties in alphabetical order.Highlights in the Drawing view the items that are selected according to common properties in the Properties List of this dialog box. By default the properties are displayed categorically.Allows you to choose common properties for your select set. If you want to construct a select set based on common properties. 6. Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line. Properties List . 4. you can select a different line segment or component in the drawing in order to change the properties displayed in the dialog box. page 256 • Select an Item. • 256 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . select those properties from the Properties list in the Matching properties area of the dialog box. The properties for the originally selected item are displayed by default. you can change the scope of the select set by changing the display in the Scope list. by using the Include Runs and Include Components buttons. At any time. 3. Alphabetic . Preview . page 147 • Select Connected Items Command. Select a single line segment or inline component in the drawing. 5. Tip The properties for the new selection are displayed in the Select Connected Items dialog box.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Matching Properties . You can change the scope to include inline components or exclude lines. too. but the display of the Properties window itself is not updated until you click OK. Click Edit > Select Connected Items. too.Displays options for defining the select set according to common properties. On the Select Connected Items dialog box. You can select more than one property in this list by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. Categorized .

Use the Selected Items list in the Properties window to display the common properties for the select set. 7. The selected items are centered in the Drawing view. select a line segment or component in the drawing that already has a property value you know you are interested in. page 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 257 . Related Topics • Select an Item. see Customize the Properties Window. • 8. page 147 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview. the Select Connected Items dialog box closes. The matching items are highlighted in the Drawing view. 9. For more information. Once you have selected the items you want for your select set. click OK. Notes • If you click Cancel. and the original item is selected in the drawing. page 86. Click the Preview button to see the items that qualify according to the matching criteria chosen in the previous step.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If no properties are displayed in the dialog box.

page 89 • Review and Edit Item Properties. it is important to be able to specify and change the properties of the items that you place in your diagram. you can copy. Once you have populated the properties of an item you can.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying Item Properties: An Overview When you use the design software to produce drawings. or label items so that their properties are displayed graphically. with the same restriction. page 329 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. and paste properties. page 87 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. cut. page 54 • Paste Bulk Properties. page 83 258 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 248 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 88 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. You can review and edit the properties of an item in the Properties window. items that belong to another drawing cannot be edited. You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation. In the Properties window you are also constrained to edit only those properties that are not read-only. In the Engineering Data Editor. or create filters and control Drawing views so that only items with specified properties are displayed. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. run reports that display the items and their properties. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor of the drawing data and edit properties in the cells of the table. too. for instance.

You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document.com. and so forth.Allows you to type a description for the item. allowing you to enter long text descriptions for items.Allows you to type a description for the item. page 87 Hold Status Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Hold Text calculation button text value.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Description Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Description property in the Properties window. reports. Description .com. Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in labels. This box can contain a link to a Web address.intergraph. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 259 .intergraph.extension.extension. formatted like this http://www. formatted like this: http://www. and allows you to enter a Description . page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Related Topics • Properties Window Command. This box can contain a link to a Web address.

Related Topics • Properties Window Command. page 261 260 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . All . page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Note • The path to the plant insulation specification file is defined in Options Manager. You can choose a specification from either of the following lists. Any modifications to insulation specifications are carried out in Insulation Specification Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety.Lists all insulation specifications that match any already chosen values. page 87 Insulation Spec Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses for the Insulation Spec property in the Properties window. Related Topics • Assign an Insulation Specification.Lists all the insulation specifications in the plant insulation specification file. such as Insulation Type or Insulation Purpose. Matching . allowing you to specify an insulation specification for the selected item or items.

Related Topics • Properties Window Command. choose a specification from either the Matching or the All lists.Allows you to type a description for the item. Tip • If you have already specified other insulation properties. 3. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Click the Calculation button . Description . or purpose. On the InsulationSpec dialog box. This box can contain a link to a Web address. Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in design labels. 2. page 258 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.extension. you can choose a specification from the All list. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. in the Properties window. Note • If you assign a heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 261 . your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted. Select the item that you want to add an insulation specification to. page 144 Note Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Note Text calculation button and allows you to enter a text value in an item note.com. type. then the Matching list contains only those insulation specifications that agree with the properties already chosen. nonetheless. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview.intergraph.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign an Insulation Specification 1. such as the insulation temperature. Click the Insulation Spec property box in the Properties window. formatted like this: http://www. 4.

formatted like this: http://www. Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety. Stream data is generally imported from an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. allowing you to specify the stream number for your pipe run. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document.Allows you to type a description for the item. and allows you to Description . Stream ID List . Related Topics • Place an Inline Instrument. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. page 267 • 262 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Revision Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Revision Text calculation button enter a text value.Specifies the file from which stream data is imported. page 87 Stream Number Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Stream Number property in the Properties window. Related Topics Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data.Lists the values found in the text file specified in the File Name box.extension.intergraph. You can click Browse to find the file on your computer or the network.com. File Name . This box can contain a link to a Web address. Browse .Allows you to search for a file on your computer or network. page 175 • Review and Edit Item Properties.

which opens when you right-click in the EDE. You view the items in a stockpile in the Engineering Data Editor (EDE). In the EDE. which belongs to the Plant or the active project. page 264 • Place Multiple Representations. page 265 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. too. You enter placement mode when you click the icon associated with a stockpile item in the left-most column of the EDE. by importing reports with the File > Import > Data File command on the main toolbar. page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 263 . Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. These commands make it possible to place or move or delete stockpile items.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview You can move the items that reside in stockpiles (the Stockpile. the Stockpile menu contains the commands for manipulating stockpile items. Be sure that the other item buttons on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar (that is. You have the capability to place an item from a stockpile directly onto an open drawing. You can also access some of these commands from the Engineering Data Editor shortcut menu. or drawing stockpiles) from one stockpile to another. or click Active Drawing Stockpile to view items in the stockpile of the active drawing. or you can place them in a drawing or delete them from the model altogether. the Active Drawing or Other Drawings buttons) are not active when you want to view stockpile items alone. You can import items into the Stockpile. page 154 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. In particular click Stockpile to view items in the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. page 265 Place an Item from the Stockpile 1. page 204 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. Click the appropriate position in the drawing for the item. not a drawing item. page 149. see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. For more information. Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor. page 38 264 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Tree view .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box Opens when you right-click a stockpile item icon in the Engineering Data Editor and select Move to Different Stockpile. click the icon in the left most column for the stockpile item that you want to place. In the Engineering Data Editor. • • Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. • Notes • If the item you place has multiple orientations in relation to other items. List view . You can move your selected stockpile item into the drawing stockpile of another drawing. you can use the Configuration tool to select the appropriate placement for the item. page 146 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. and then clicking Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. You can enter values for properties of the placed item by selecting the item.Allows you to navigate in the plant hierarchy in order to display the drawing into which stockpile you want to move the selected item. 2. You cannot use Replace Mode mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor.Displays a list of available drawings that can accept the selected stockpile item.

This action can occur at anytime. and so forth.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing 1. Also. In the left-most column of the Engineering Data Editor. and Pipe Run List. and then import the items back into the drawing. From the shortcut menu. packages.Same constraint as above applies. frequently reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. From a drawing stockpile to another drawing stockpile . choose a drawing from the list and click OK. Equipment Nozzle List. From the Stockpile to a drawing stockpile . • 3. • • • Plant item groups are listed in Data Dictionary Manager. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 265 . On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box. Both of these reports have hidden columns that store some key information that is necessary for importing this information. page 38 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile You can use the Equipment List and the Pipe Run List to import new items into the stockpile. add or edit property values for the items returned in the report. such as instrument loops. you can use a report to import information for items that already exist in the database. This capability allows you to define values for an item that does not yet exist in the database.No constraints apply. not a drawing item. Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor. You must first run the report. The property values for the items are updated. Valid reports are Equipment List. safety classes.If the plant item group contains only items in the destination drawing or does not contain items in any drawing. Note • Plant item groups. Moving the plant item group itself to another stockpile has special limitations: From a drawing stockpile to the Stockpile . right-click the icon of the stockpile item that you want to move. 2. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. this action is allowed. select Move to Different Stockpile.

and must be in double quotes.Path to symbol to be created in stockpile Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID.Specify if the property has units of measure.Database Item Type. AttributeUnits . • Related Topics • Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. page 67 • Generate a Report.must be one of the properties listed. not the display name.0"?> <Preamble> <Items> Description Identifies the XML file and the version used Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID Indicates beginning of the list of all item types and properties to be imported. and must be a valid format. page 334 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. even for select-listed values. ITEMTAG . page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. </Identification> <ContextSpecificIdentifier ContextId <Item Attributes> <Item Attribute> Notes • The log file for import activities is called SPImport.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview XML Tags and Descriptions Tag <?xml version="1. Symbol File . click Related Topics. and must have corresponding </Items> tag Defines Classification and Symbol File: Classification . page 329 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile.log and is saved to your local Temp directory. and specify the actual value. page 267 266 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Attribute Value . Indicates the beginning of the list of properties to be imported for the item type Imported property for the item type: AttributeName Derived from the Data Dictionary Manager property name. not the index number.Must be in double quotes. For examples of importing pumps into the database using the Equipment List.

and Heat Exchanger Equipment. See the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide Help file for more information on import code and other importing parameters. and Equipment Nozzle List Reports from SmartPlant to define properties of items already placed in the drawing. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported. Tips • The status bar at the bottom of the SmartPlant P&ID window displays the progress of the import activity. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 267 . and Exchangers. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID. Browse to the location of your spreadsheet. or you can click Close. Pumps. Previously imported items. and click Open. You can populate the stockpile with items from Aspen Zyqad exported spreadsheets and some SmartPlant reports. select it. Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the software. Items must have an assigned item tag prior to definition or modification of properties. too. • Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report. On the Import Log dialog box. you must make modifications the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. Click File > Import > Data File. Stockpile items that come from importing Aspen Zyqad data can be easily updated by re-importing a data file. these reports can create occurrences of items in the stockpile. Pump Equipment List. are updated with data from the newly imported file. Pipe Run List. In addition. 3. you can click Report in order to open the log file and view notes on the import process. Equipment. These spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. Notes • Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. You can use the Equipment List. • • • • Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing. All three reports. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet 1.

The delivered Item Tag format for pipe runs is unit code . and AA display the Tag Prefix. Columns Y. 4. 101. In the resulting report.tag sequence number . 2. 3. The path name of the associated symbol is available in column T. Click File > Close. P-100A. page 334. respectively. see Generate a Report. change P-100A to P-101D) by highlighting the last column in the report and the column right next to it. Browse to the Equipment List report that you just created and modified. then clicking Format > Column > Unhide. you must clear the SP_ID value. The method above is valid. but you must be careful with row copy and paste because the layout is a little different. Place a pump in a drawing and assign an item tag. click File > Import > Data file. respectively. 6. 7.fluid code. these should be updated to P. Notes • Importing new pipe runs using the Pipe Run List report is a little different because it also includes SP_ID and Fluid Code columns. and D. for example. In this example. Click File > Save. page 265 268 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and Tag Suffix properties. Click Open. Tag Sequence Number. 5. Run the Equipment List report. change the value in the Item Tag cell (for example. For more information on generating reports. In SmartPlant P&ID. Z. Additionally.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile 1. • Related Topics • Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. 8.tag suffix . page 329 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile.

When AutoGap is off. By default. The Gap Now command does not affect the setting for AutoGap. page 270 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. and the software gaps your lines automatically as you route them. or you can choose when the software performs gapping on your drawing by using the Gap Now command. instead of turning on auto-gapping. improves the performance of the software. Symbology and priority for your line gaps is set in Options Manager. Related Topics • Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now. automatic gapping is off. page 270 AutoGap Command Tools > AutoGap Turns automatic gapping on or off in the drawing. you can specify that lines show a gap at these non-physical intersections. or when you save a file. page 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 269 . when you print. When AutoGap is on. The toolbar contains an AutoGap button off.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Gapping Lines: An Overview A gap in a drawing is a condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically in the drawing but not physically in the plant. This procedure can improve the clarity of your drawing considerably. instead of leaving AutoGap on. Using the Gap Now command. Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant. You can either turn auto-gapping on. the software automatically gaps drawings during the working session each time that you modify an item. A progress indicator at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping. can increase the efficiency of your design session. Notes • Using Gap Now. In order to portray this condition. the software does not automatically gap drawings. for turning AutoGap on and • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off.

The status bar at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. gaps appear automatically. Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. page 156 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Tip • You can turn the automatic gapping on or off by clicking AutoGap the main toolbar. • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. Using Gap Now instead of leaving AutoGap on improves the performance of the software. on the entire drawing. Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant. page 270 Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now Click Tools > Gap Now. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Turn AutoGap On or Off Click Tools > AutoGap. page 156 Gap Now Command Tools > Gap Now Performs gapping on the current drawing. that is. Notes on • • When you route lines and AutoGap is on. too. Notes • Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command. Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command. page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview.

However.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview You can force the software to redraw the graphic representation of your data. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. You can force changes in Options Manager to appear in the current drawing by updating Options Manager settings. Related Topics Update Symbology. you cannot revert to previous definitions. • Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 272 • Update Symbology. page 272 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. so that the current values in Options Manager are reflected in the drawing. page 271 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 271 . check your permissions. regardless of when the drawing was created. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. Once you load the current plant-wide definitions into your drawing. page 138 • Update Label Settings. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint. by using the Update Symbology command. The ApplySettingsCmd macro also updates the line settings. Notes • Any user can update drawings using these commands. page 190 • Update Line Settings. This command refreshes the graphic symbology of symbols in your drawing based on the current settings in Options Manager. page 272 Update Symbology Command Tools > Update Symbology Updates the line width and color symbology for your active drawing. to find out if you can make changes to the plant-wide symbology in Options Manager. which are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. However. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change. the drawing. The symbology and other settings defined in Options Manager usually only take effect in those drawings that are created after those values are defined.

2. page 271 • Using Filters: An Overview. For more information. page 271 272 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Update Symbology 1. but the new values only affect lines placed after the change. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. 2. Note • Two settings. The ApplySettingsCmd. double-click ApplySettingsCmd. However. in Options Manager control the behavior of pipe and signal runs when they are placed in a drawing or when an inline component is placed on a run. page 138. Related Topics • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. You can change these settings in Options Manager. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change. page 130 • Update Line Settings 1. Click Tools > Update Symbology.dll macro applies the latest settings to all runs on the current drawing. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. unless Options Manager symbology changes again. • • Related Topics Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. You must run this macro for every drawing individually. You do not have to update symbology for this drawing again. see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. On the Custom Commands dialog box. Once you load the current plant-wide symbology definitions into your drawing.dll. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. Notes • The line width and color symbology for your active drawing is changed to the most recent symbology defined in Options Manager. Click Tools > Custom Commands. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint. even if you end your design session. Open a drawing. you cannot revert to previous definitions.

If you change the copied data. You can link an entire document to another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy and a link in another location. You can transfer text. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy with a link in another location. a reference point or box is inserted into the destination document. and an Excel worksheet. You can edit the linked information by opening the source document.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview This software is compatible with Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) software. You can embed an entire document inside another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. The information that you move is an object. Embedding copies data in one document and stores the information in another document. • • • Linking or Embedding An object is data from one application that you insert in a drawing. You can insert linked information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. the original information does not change. This box displays the information that you pasted. you can use Microsoft Word to make a comment and then display the comment in your drawing. You can embed information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. You can copy and paste an item to duplicate it in another location. When you change the original data. The linked data is stored in the source document itself. When you change the original data. or images between drawings or documents that were created with this software and other OLE applications. numbers. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 273 . or you can insert a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a drawing. and vice versa. You can insert information created in another application with one of many methods: • You can cut and paste an item to delete it from one location and move it to another location. You can link or embed information between drawings or documents that were created with this software and OLE software. the original information does not change and vice versa. the pasted data is updated either automatically or manually. notes from Microsoft Word. Embedding copies information and stores the information in another document that was created in a different application. For example. You can even create a drawing that contains another drawing. the copy can be updated either automatically or manually. You can move whole documents around or just parts of a document that you select. If you change the embedded object. When you paste the information in the destination document with the Paste Link option.

If document size is not an important factor. Linking is also useful when you want to share information in many different places and set that information to update automatically. On the dialog box. On the Paste Special dialog box be sure that you select Paste and not Paste Link. or browse to the document. too. you can use Edit > Insert > Object. later. Embedding by Cutting or Copying. Embedded information is also a good choice if the information does not need updating. • 274 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The person can still view the information if it is embedded in the document. Notes • If you want to copy the information. if you want to display a drawing in several different reports that you created in Microsoft Word. If you cannot edit the information. Linked information increases the document size only by the size of the displayed image. Each report would automatically display the results of the drawing updates.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you want to keep the document size small. Then. Or if you want to link the object. The entire document is embedded into the drawing. make sure you have not selected Link on the dialog box. • • Linking or Embedding an Object If you want to insert an existing document. You can then edit the embedded information with the software that created it. select Link on the dialog box. and not remove it from its original location. Copy. Embedding is useful when the person viewing the document with the embedded information does not have access to the software that created the object. you could update the drawing by editing it in this software. not by the size of the data itself. and Pasting The easiest way to embed an object is to use the Cut. and Paste commands on the Edit menu in any OLE software. you could link the drawing inside the documents that contained the reports. For example. if you wanted to send out several drawings for review. For example. select Paste Link on the dialog box. the information appears as a static picture. then use embedding. press Ctrl while dragging. If you copy or paste information into an application in which you cannot edit the information. Embedded objects make the file size larger. you could embed each drawing into a Microsoft Word document and send the Microsoft Word document to each reviewer. Notes • If you want to embed the existing object. If you want to link the existing object. the software automatically embeds the information in the document. then link the data to another document. select the Create From File option and then enter the name.

page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 275 . you can correct this problem by using the CheckFilePathsCmd macro. If items inadvertently point to the wrong catalog. page 282 • Check Symbol Paths. page 282 • Embed a New Object. you can double-click the object to open the software that created the object. Related Topics • Break a Link. Notes • You can click commands on a shortcut menu to activate the software that created the object. You can edit the embedded image by double-clicking it. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the menus and toolbars of the software that just opened. page 283 • Change a Link. page 283 • Change a Link.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Editing a Linked or Embedded Object To edit an object. right-click the embedded object. Important • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by workshare. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Related Topics • Break a Link. you cannot edit the object. You can type an URL with http syntax in the Description dialog box to link World Wide Web documents to an item. page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. page 282 • Embed a New Object. See Related Topics for more information. where you can embed an image into a drawing. page 278 Image Command Edit > Insert > Image Opens the Insert Image dialog box. To get the shortcut menu. Symbols in drawings usually point to the catalog associated with the current plant. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. You must transfer those files manually. If you do not have the source software installed. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files.

• The Insert Object command inserts any OLE-enabled object. You can edit a linked object by clicking Edit > Links and selecting Open Source. the software stores a copy of the object in the drawing. • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. 2. all drawings that have links to that object are updated. where you can insert objects into a drawing with linking or embedding. page 282 • Embed a New Object. page 273 276 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Tip A box that is the size of the image appears at the end of the pointer so that you know where the image fits in the drawing. On the Insert Image dialog box. When you embed an object in a drawing. the software updates only the copy of the object stored in the drawing. such as a Microsoft Word file. Related Topics • Break a Link. Click Edit > Insert > Image. page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. browse to the folder and image file that you want to embed in your drawing. When you change an embedded object. .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed an Image 1. 3. page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Click OK. You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking it. Move the pointer to the location in the drawing where you want to place your image and click to place it. but the object itself is not stored in the drawing. such as a . The difference between linking and embedding is the method for storing and updating data. or CAD drawing. • When you link an object to a drawing.avi document. page 273 Object Command Edit > Insert > Object Opens the Insert Object dialog box.dwg drawing. the drawing stores information about the location of the object. When you change a linked object. 4. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object.

Click the pointer. • 5. click the Yes button. 4. page 278. For more information. Click Edit > Insert > Object. If you insert a document into the drawing. you embed an entire document. 3. click the Create New option. or update symbols. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object. page 219. With this procedure. • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 277 . the terminators. text. spaces. After you create the object in its separate window. Tip You can insert an object that already exists also. click File > Exit or File > Update in the source application.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed a New Object 1. 6. For more information. see Paste an Item With a Different Format. click anywhere outside the embedded object. In Object Type. • Tip The contents of the list depend on the applications that are installed on your computer and that support linking and embedding. page 280. If you attempt to create a symbol source file. You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special. see Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. If the software temporarily replaces some of the menus and toolbars. see Move an Item With the Select Tool. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. Caution • Do not use these procedures to create a symbol file. Notes • You can move the embedded object again at any later time. 2. you cannot embed a selection in a document. If a message appears asking if you want to update the document. Use Catalog Manager to create. On the Insert Object dialog box. change. choose the software in which you want to create the object and then click OK. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. For more information. serious problems result in the drawing. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. which now includes a box the size of the object at its end.

click Create From File. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The software creates automatic links by default. select the Link box. page 121. do not select this option. 5. To change the way the software updates links. type the name and directory path of the document that you want to include in your drawing. • Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. Click the pointer. In the File box. Important • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. or click Browse to find and choose the file. which now includes a box the size of the object at its end. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object. For more information about creating drawing templates. If you want to link this object to your drawing. serious problems result in the drawing. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. The software updates manual links only at the time that you indicate. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. In the Description box in the Properties window. see Create a Drawing Template. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. 3. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. 6. If you attempt to update. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file. Click OK. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. If you want to embed the object. 4. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. or open the symbol source file. break. Click Edit > Insert > Object. page 273 Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object 1. You must transfer those files manually. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. On the Insert Object dialog box. change.

page 280. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. With this procedure. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • You can move the object at any time later. The software creates automatic links by default. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. If you insert a document into the drawing. text. For more information. You can embed an OLE object. by dragging the file from Windows into a drawing. You must press the Ctrl + Shift keys while dragging to link the information. too. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. page 219. You must transfer those files manually. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. see Move an Item With the Select Tool. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 279 . spaces. such as a Microsoft Word document or Microsoft Excel workbook. Important • • • • • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. The software updates manual links only at the time you indicate. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. the information is embedded. see Paste an Item With a Different Format. If you do not press these keys. you cannot link to a selection in a document. For more information. you can create a link only to an entire document. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. In the Description box in the Properties window. To change the way the software updates links. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. the terminators. You can link an OLE by dragging a document from the Windows environment onto the drawing also.

Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste Special command until you select another item or click Esc. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Paste Special Command Edit > Paste Special Inserts the Clipboard contents into a drawing with the format that you select in the Paste Special dialog box. Click Edit > Paste Special. • • Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. Tip • The Results box gives an explanation of the outcome of your selection. If you select an item for the insertion point and that item cannot be replaced. select the format that you want to use to paste the information from the list of available options. Notes • The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Cut or Copy command again. • 3. the Clipboard contents are not pasted over the selected item. Depending on the type of information. both options can be available. page 273 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. Choose the Paste command to embed the information or the Paste Link command to link the information. page 273 • 280 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 280 Paste an Item With a Different Format 1. In the As list. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Tip You cannot paste an item unless you have previously placed it on the Clipboard with the Copy or Cut commands. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Related Topics • Copy an Item.

and other OLE objects.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Links Command Edit > Links Edits or updates links to objects in another document.pid file to a MicroStation® or AutoCAD® file. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. The Links dialog box opens. Click the Open Source button. Excel workbooks. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. Click Edit > Links on the main menu bar. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 281 . On the Links dialog box. You can change links for Microsoft Word documents. Related Topics • Edit a Linked Object. Click File > Save to save the changes in the source file. break or open the source file. Caution • Do not use this command to change a symbol file. page 281 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. select the link that you want to edit. If you attempt to update. 4. • 5. page 273 Edit a Linked Object 1. 2. This command lets you manipulate Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects. Note • The software does not translate OLE objects that you have linked to your document when you export a . 3. serious problems result in the drawing. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. Make the changes that you want in the source file. page 273 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. change.

3. serious problems result in the drawing. If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces menus and toolbars. Double-click the embedded object. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. Click Change Source. Note • If you have other links to the same source file. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. browse to a different drive or folder. specify the file that you want to change the link to. 3. Edit the object. 2. 2. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file. click the link that you want to change.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Edit an Embedded Object 1. Select Edit > Links. make sure you update all links to the new source file. or open the symbol source file. break. click either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to the design software. page 273 282 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. change. click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to the design software. In the File Name box. Do one of the following: • • If you are editing the object in a separate application window. 4. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. In the Links dialog box. page 273 Change a Link 1. If you attempt to update. Tip • If you do not see the file that you want to link to.

When the software asks you to confirm that you want to break the link. 5. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Caution • Do not use this command to edit a symbol file.log. or open the symbol file. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. On the Custom Commands dialog box. double-click CheckFilePathCmd. 2. Click Break Link.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break a Link 1. and it creates a log file that reports all symbols missing from the current catalog. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. page 273 Check Symbol Paths 1. click Yes. Select the link or links that you want to break. Click Edit > Links. Notes • The CheckFilePathCmd macro checks the directory paths in the file names of all symbols used in the plant. The log resides in your Temp directory and is named CheckFilePathsFor_yourplant. Click Tools > Custom Commands.dll. If you attempt to update. • Related Topics Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. 4. serious problems result in the drawing. change. 3. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 283 . break. Click Close. 2.

After you have placed an assembly. you select the assembly from Catalog Explorer and click a location in the drawing. if required. you must save the assembly where the other symbols are located. and a piping bypass around the valve. which is specified in Options Manager. Assemblies can save time because you do not have to keep creating commonlyoccurring groups of items. you can drag the assembly into the drawing. Instead of copying and pasting each individual item into a drawing at several locations. However. the items in the assembly are treated as separate items. Or. An example of an assembly is a control valve with vents on both sides. which is the same file extension as a drawing. You can create an assembly by selecting several items in a drawing and saving as an assembly. When you want to place an assembly into a drawing. The assembly placement quits. you can place the group of items: the assembly.pid. If you want to retrieve the assembly from the Catalog Explorer tree view. Note • Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. Related Topics • Create an Assembly. You must place the assembly first and then route piping to it. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. You can delete just one item without concern that the software deletes the entire assembly. The Save As Assembly command prompts you to save the assembly in the correct directory. page 286 • Place an Assembly. an instrument loop that controls the valve. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. Placing assemblies is like placing any other item from Catalog Explorer into a drawing. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. The file extension for an assembly is . Assemblies cannot be placed inline.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Working With Assemblies: An Overview An assembly is a group of items that you can place in a drawing at one time. page 287 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The information in each label remains intact when you place the assembly. the file structure and symbols must be identical.

you cannot use labels. Note • The Save As Assembly command does not constitute an undoable action. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. page 286 • Place an Assembly. therefore. For example. however. A red target appears at the end of your pointer. You use this target to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. page 287 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. it does not appear as a step available for the Undo command. Assemblies are saved with the . you can use unattached ends of pipe runs.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Save As Assembly Command File > Save As Assembly Saves selected items as an assembly. pipe runs.pid file extension. signal runs. The Save Assembly dialog box opens after you specify the origin. Related Topics • Create an Assembly. or child items. and you can name the assembly and place it in the proper directory. This command is available only when items are selected in the drawing. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 285 .

However. On the Save Assembly dialog box. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. the file structure and symbols must be identical.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Create an Assembly 1. Notes • Any graphics that have been band-aided should be deleted and replaced prior to using this command. Tips • You can select more than one item at once by dragging the pointer to fence objects. • 3. Tip You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. Click Save. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. Click File > Save As Assembly. 4. • • • Related Topics • Place an Assembly. page 144 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. • 5. The file extension for assemblies is . or child items. you cannot use labels. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. 2. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs.pid. page 284 286 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In order to save assemblies. however. To remove an item from the selection. Select several components in the drawing. click it while pressing Ctrl. pipe runs. Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. signal runs. enter the file name. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. page 287 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. The assembly placement quits. For example. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want. If you use the default folder. then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. you must have write permissions to the folder defined in Options Manager.

then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. • Tip You cannot place an assembly into a line that is already routed. signal runs. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want. pipe runs. or child items. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. Tips • The red target is the origin of the assembly. Some assembly members also appear during placement to aid you. 2. or you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. page 219 Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. 4. page 242 Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. The assembly placement quits. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. • Move an Item Using the Move Button. you cannot use labels. 3. However. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. Assemblies. the file structure and symbols must be identical.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Assembly 1. Press Esc to quit placement mode. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to position the assembly appropriately. • • • Related Topics • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. If you use the default folder. page 249 Notes • Assemblies are stored in a specific folder. in the Catalog Explorer tree view. For example. Connect the pipe runs and instruments on either side of the assembly. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 287 . If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. page 244 Delete an Item from the Drawing. click the assembly that you want to place. however. Modify or delete individual components in the assembly as necessary.

but the claim states of objects inside drawings do have ramifications for drawing manipulation and for completing projects. Once projects are enabled in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. but the Plant can still delete these drawings. managing and meting out that work is largely controlled from the Drawing Manager interface.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview After enabling and creating projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and using Drawing Manager to manipulate the drawings. actual design work is still accomplished in SmartPlant P&ID. Note • When you are using projects inside SmartPlant P&ID. Projects and Claiming One of the main capabilities associated with using projects in SmartPlant is the ability for a project to claim a drawing object. the Plant can no longer create drawings. However. All the modifications and claiming of objects is carried out in the design software. unless the drawing is either fetched or checked out to a project. and check out drawings. drawings are created inside projects. All drawing versions in the Plant are read-only drawings when projects are enabled. You cannot change reference data. page 289 • Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview. page 304 288 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You do not need to check out a drawing to claim items on it. check in. When a project claims an object. you can claim items on a fetched drawing. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. any drawings that might have existed in the Plant before projects were enabled remain in the Plant. such as table layouts or formats or rules. remember that the reference data belongs to the Plant and is used by projects of the Plant. However. Only the project can use the commands on the Project menu in Drawing Manager to fetch. the project controls modifications to that object. A project cannot modify objects it has not claimed. at the project level.

you can modify it using the same methods that you would use in a plant that is not project enabled. After you have claimed an item. the piping components and the instruments in that pipe run must all be claimed before you break it. a error message will be displayed. however. Any modification that changes the meaning of the schematic design. the nozzles and the pipe runs must all be claimed before you delete the vessel. For example. if you delete a vessel. For example. Purely graphical modifications to drawing items are allowed without claiming those items. a error message will be displayed. If they are not claimed. none of the items on that drawing are initially claimed. Therefore. The Properties window and the Engineering Data Editor do not allow editing of properties on items that are not claimed: the properties are read-only as if the drawing is in a read-only state. you must claim them. If they are not claimed. Therefore. Before you can modify or delete any of those items. the nozzles attached to it will be deleted and the pipe runs connected to the nozzles will be modified. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 289 . the vessel. claiming fosters an ability to define the scope of work as narrowly as necessary. you can manipulate the Drawing view properties so that the claim state of items is visually apparent. For example. A new item in a drawing is automatically claimed to the project. when an existing drawing is fetched or checked out to a project. However. You cannot delete items that have not been claimed. a symbol can be repositioned or the vertices of a connector can be moved. No other explicit prompts let you know that you cannot edit an item that you have not claimed. Since claiming makes it possible for a project to work on an itemby-item basis. A new item is created in a project in the same ways it can be created in a green field plant. The simplest way to create a new item is to drag a catalog item from the Catalog Explorer and drop it onto a drawing. However. requires that the affected items be claimed. Properties of items that are not claimed by the active project cannot be changed. Also. you can delete it using the same methods that you would use in a green field plant. if you break a pipe run. However. nor are the mirror and rotate handles available when you select an item not claimed by your project. labels can be added or removed without claiming anything. After you have claimed an item. The Claim functionality provided by SmartPlant P&ID allows you to grant control of an item to a project. the pipe run. some of the piping components and inline instruments in that pipe run will be reassigned to the new pipe run.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claiming Items: An Overview A project in the Plant frequently deals with a subset of items within a drawing. then those related items must also be claimed. if the deletion of an item would result in related items being deleted or modified.

The Claim Mode controls how items are claimed by concurrent projects. run Verify for Check In to resolve the situation. With this setting. it must be consistent with the state of the item in the Plant. Claim commands appear on shortcut menus in the Drawing view. You can also release a claim at any time. and on the Edit menu. an invalid claim exists. Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support Shared claiming of database items. you can invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project. This process automatically sets the claim to valid and allows the check in to occur. you can fetch a drawing with read/write permissions and claim its objects. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project. Claims are automatically released on all drawing items when that drawing is checked into the Plant. Conflict resolution at check in time will be more complex. You can determine the validity of a claim by using the Claim Status command. If the Claim Mode is set to Shared. Invalid Claims When an item is claimed by a project. but you cannot release the claim that is automatically created when your project creates a new item. Shared mode allows concurrent projects to overlap at the object level. Claim Mode The Claim Mode can be set to either Exclusive or Shared by using the Settings option in SmartPlant P&ID Options Manager. Invalidly claimed items can not be modified. only one project can claim an item at any given time. conflict resolution at check in time is simplified. When the Plant uses Shared claim mode and a project checks in a drawing. Otherwise.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview You do not need to check out a drawing to claim objects. however. If the Claim Mode is set to Exclusive. Exclusive mode enforces the rule that concurrent projects do not overlap at the object level. 290 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Releasing Claims From inside a project. This setting may be required for plants that have overlapping projects. in the Engineering Data Editor. a drawing cannot be checked in if any objects that are not claimed differ from the Plant. a single item can be claimed to more than one project. the claims made by other projects to objects on that same drawing are now invalid if the project that checked in the drawing also changed an item claimed by a different project. If an invalid claim is found but the item in question matches the item in the Plant. Invalidly claimed items differ from the Plant items in that you cannot modify them and check a drawing into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim.

Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed. Claim commands are not available when you open a fetched drawing with read-only permissions. Remember that objects are claimed by the project. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 291 . claim is not an undoable command. checking out. Claiming items clears the Undo stack. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. Thus. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments. page 302 • Release a Claim. You must have full control user access permissions for P&ID Objects before you can claim objects. For more information about setting user access permissions. The Claim dialog box opens. not by a single user. Claiming of labels is ignored. page 301 Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Notes • A list of claimed items is automatically published to The Engineering Framework. page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview. • • • • • • Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. Once a project claims an item. page 303 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. and fetching drawings. Drawing Manager is the only tool for checking in. page 292 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project.

and fill in the Comments box. Finally the command compares the selected items against the same items in the Plant and displays a warning if an object either differs from that item in the Plant or if the object does not exist in the Plant. On the Claim dialog box. Click Edit > Claim. it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project. select the item or items that you want to add comments to. The Claim command checks first if your project already has a valid claim on a selected item. Claiming items clears the Undo stack. select the items that you want to claim. page 292 • Claim Command.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claim Dialog Box Opens when you select an item and click Edit > Claim on the main menu bar and displays details of the items that you select for claiming. These are the items that you claim to your project when you click OK. In the Items to be claimed list. Next it checks if the items are claimed by another project. this step can produce an error display on the Claim dialog box. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. In this list. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. 3. Once a project claims an item. Comments . 2. Items to be claimed . Remember that objects are claimed by the project. page 289 292 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Notes • • A newly placed item is automatically claimed by the project that placed it. not by a single user. claim is not an undoable command. and if the Plant uses exclusive sharing.Lists the items that are selected in the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor and their details. record comments about this claim operation. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview.Allows you to record comments for the claim operation that you are currently undertaking. you can also see if a selected item is already claimed or has any other claim errors or warnings associated with it. You can select multiple elements of this list and record comments for this claim operation. page 44 Claim a Drawing Item 1. You can discover if the selected items are already claimed by your project or another project. Thus.

You must have full control permissions on P&ID Objects before you can claim any drawing items. The following topics discuss some of the ways that claiming restricts your activities. if they are all claimed. If the run has been claimed. the Properties window treats the whole group as read-only. When possible. No items are ever claimed by the Plant. the EDE treats the item properties as read-only. claiming objects to your project involves many special relationships.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Enforcing Claims Whether you are using shared or exclusive claiming mode. the software cannot prevent you from initiating a command. Engineering Data Editor (EDE) If the item has been claimed. the properties can be edited. When you select a line segment. the Properties window allows them to be modified. The EDE behaves similarly to the Properties window. For more information. When you select multiple items. the properties are read-only. Properties Window When you select a claimed item. If any of the selected items are not claimed. otherwise. Modifying Properties Claiming impacts properties modifications in the following manner. it is claimed to your active project. commands simply do not allow the operation to proceed if you do not have the necessary permissions. the Properties window displays the properties of the associated pipe or signal run. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 293 . but an error message is displayed. The properties of unclaimed items are read-only. see the User Access chapter in SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. such as when using the Delete command. When you claim an item. you can edit its properties through the EDE. the Properties window allows the properties of that item to be viewed and modified. When you select an item that has not been claimed. Controlling Access Each command in the software checks your permissions for the items that it modifies. In some cases. Note • Claim Mode is defined in Options Manager for the Plant and all its projects. the Properties window allows the properties to be viewed but not modified. otherwise.

however. You can place a flow arrow label. such as when you place a nozzle on a vessel. When a relationship to an unclaimed item is created. Placing Flow-Oriented Components ." The target pipe run and all of its components must be claimed. • Placing Nozzles.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box The Solutions section of the Consistency Check dialog box allows you to copy property values from one item to another. it means that you can modify that model item and all of its implied items. if the destination item is not claimed. Equipment Components. properties can be copied from that item without any problem. The following list explains how the relationship between an object and its target effects claiming.The target item does not need to be claimed. If a model item is not claimed. the user cannot modify any of the implied items that the model item owns. The Reapply Rules button executes the placement rules that copy property values across a relationship. Placing Piping Components or Instruments in Pipe or Signal Runs The target run must be claimed. or Instrument Components . and the properties are not copied. page 294. The target of that zero-length line must be claimed. the Apply button is not available.A flow-oriented component sets the flow direction of the target pipe run. The target pipe run must be claimed. Implied Items When a drawing item is claimed. if it is not already set. the applicable rules copy property values across the relationship. Placing and Moving Drawing Items Sometimes the target item must be claimed. Placement Rules When a new relationship is created. however. if the flow direction is already defined. but other times it does not have to be claimed.A reducer is a "line-breaking component. • • • 294 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the action is not allowed. see Placement Rules. placing a piping component or inline instrument causes a zero-length line segment to be created and automatic line connectivity causes it to be joined to an existing run. For a description of how Reapply Rules can interact with claiming. An inconsistency indicator shows the inconsistency between the two related items. For the selected solution. if the rule calls for properties to be copied to an unclaimed item. In certain cases. Placing Reducers . In some cases this results in resolving an inconsistency.

sometimes not. If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed. and your item will not "snap" into position. and a scale or parametric modification. The target run must be claimed. but not the selected symbol. If the required connected items are not all claimed. as described above. then you cannot place your item onto the target. a rotation. If no type of placement is allowed at that point. with the Alt key pressed where necessary. Routing Lines up to Another Pipe or Signal Run . the target will not highlight. Geometric Modifications Geometric operations include a geometric move. when routing a line segment up to an existing inline component. The black connection handle does not appear at the required point. Therefore. Rule-Based Moves All connected items must be claimed. as if you pressed the Alt key. freestanding placement is still allowed. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 295 .The piping component or instrument must be claimed since it will be adopted by the new run.The target connector must be claimed. automatic line connectivity will cause an existing zero length run to be joined to the new run. In most cases. The selected symbol does not have to be claimed to perform these operations.The OPC does not have to be claimed. If the lines are not claimed.The piping component or instrument does not have to be claimed. the lines. In certain cases. Routing Lines up to Owned Piping Components or Instruments . Rotation and Mirroring of Inline Components Rotations of 180 degrees and mirroring about the local y-axis for inline components are special geometric modifications cases because the lines are disconnected before and reconnected after the operations. Placing and Modifying Lines Sometimes the target item must be claimed.The target run must be claimed.The nozzles do not have to be claimed. the "no place" indicator is displayed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Placing OPCs on Runs . the standard claim violation message displays. Routing Lines up to OPCs . None of the connected items have to be claimed either. Routing Lines up to Freestanding Piping Components or Instruments . a mirroring. the move operation can become a geometric move. Here is a list of the cases where claiming plays a role: • • Routing Lines up to Nozzles . you are not allowed to connect to the target. • • • If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed. must be claimed before these operations are allowed.

A driving label sets one or more properties on the labeled item. 2. This includes flow arrow labels. If a component is connected to the endpoint. The selected run must be claimed. The target item may need to be claimed. Placing and Modifying Labels The target item for a label usually does not need to be claimed. consequently. The entire run and all components must be claimed. The run to be broken and all components within that run must be claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Geometric Modification If you move a line segment or a line vertex that is internal to a line. 2. If the existing connected item is a branch point for the run. modifying a driving label modifies the labeled item. 3. Therefore. However. you do not need to claim it. Internal Vertex of a Run Modification of an internal vertex can result in the run being split. The target item may need to be claimed. you must claim the item. The Join Runs command allows you to combine two connected piping or signal runs into a single run. Breaking and Joining Runs The Break Run command allows you to split one piping or signal run into two pieces. then the run it belongs to must be claimed since the branch point is deleted and the adjacent line segments in the existing connected run are merged. then the piping or signal run that owns the selected segment does not have to be claimed. claiming plays a role in the following cases: • Placing Driving Labels . it does not need to be claimed. For this to happen. the following stipulations apply: 1. However. Both of the runs and all components in both runs must be claimed. then the following stipulations apply: 1. unless the flow direction is already defined for the line. 4. the area break must be claimed. Extreme End of a Run If you modify the start point of the first line segment in a run or the end point of the last line segment in a run. 296 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Placing Labels on Area Breaks . • If you modify a label. The target item must be claimed.Placing a label on an area break causes a dynamic property to be added to the area break.

but they cannot be replaced. Modifying an area break allows the shape to be changed. Replace Mode The claim status check takes place as you move the pointer over the target. Find and Replace Items that are not claimed can be found. If the target is not claimed. This is a purely geometric modification. you must claim that item. To replace an item using these commands. thus creating a multiple representation in the database. Placing Gaps Placing a gap symbol into a piping or signal line implies that the target line must be claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Placing Multiple Representations This stockpile command enables you to place an additional representation of an existing equipment item into the design in a different drawing. You must claim the selected equipment item before this command is made available on the Stockpile menu in the EDE. page 154 Placing and Modifying Area Breaks The placement of an area break does not create any new relationships and therefore does not require any claiming. and so no claiming is required. it is not highlighted as a valid target when you move the pointer over it. If the target line run is not claimed. The Replace button is not available if an unclaimed item is selected. Replacing Drawing Items The Replace and Replace Mode commands replace one item representation in the design with a different representation and change the value of the "type" attribute for the design item. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 297 . the target is not highlighted as a valid replacement target. Related Topics • Place Multiple Representations.

all items that are deleted along with a selected item must be claimed. equipment components. That is. functions. All lines that are attached to selected items or are dependent on those items must be claimed. Delete From Model. and Cut. and so forth • Nozzle • • Equipment Component Line Segment • • • Branch Point • • Piping Component • • Instrument • 298 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The following table expands on this idea. Item in Select Set Equipment • • Additional items that must be claimed for Delete All nozzles. an error message appears. Drawing Items Drawing items are deleted from a design using three different commands: Delete.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Deleting Items Claiming impacts item deletion in the following manner. and item notes All item notes on those equipment components and nozzles All runs with lines attached to those nozzles All item notes All runs with lines attached to the nozzle All item notes The pipe or signal run that owns the segment All components in that run All runs with lines that attach to that branch point All item notes All item notes All runs with lines that attach to that piping component All instrument components – actuators. If any of the items or the dependent items are not claimed. then the delete operation proceeds normally. All of these commands check if the selected items and some dependent items are claimed. If all of the selected items and all of the related items are claimed. All dependent items must be claimed. item type by item type.

both OPCs in a pair must be claimed before they can be deleted. it can be deleted from the stockpile. the property can be changed. In a project context. The software checks the claim status before setting any values. For more information about validating properties. Plant item groups. If the item is not claimed. If the item is claimed. and so forth. the property can not be changed. for example loops. select Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. Moving Between Stockpiles The Move to Different Stockpile command in the Engineering Data Editor allows you to move an item from one stockpile to a different stockpile. If the plant item group or any of its members is not claimed. For these items. Validating Properties The software uses validation functions before setting properties on items. OPCs can be deleted from the stockpile only if both OPCs in a pair are in the stockpile and are deleted at the same time. exist in the stockpile and have relationships to member items on a drawing or in a stockpile. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 299 . then the plant item group can be deleted. if the item is claimed. the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. it maintains its relationship to the partner OPC. When an OPC is in the stockpile.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Item in Select Set Additional items that must be claimed for Delete • • All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the instrument All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the OPC The partner OPC must be claimed also OPC • • • Stockpile Items Most items in the stockpile do not have any relationships. If the item is not claimed. packages. The selected model item must be claimed before you can use this command. the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. If the plant item group is claimed and all of its members are claimed. Refer to the Extending the Capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID and Logical Model Automation Reference topics.

If it is not claimed.Running an update task sets or changes some properties of an existing item. Related Topics • Deleting Items. Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes. page 301 300 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .The Framework > Correlate command correlates pipe runs to the same design basis as an existing pipe run that is already correlated. Update Task . The new item is claimed automatically as soon as it is created. You must claim the pipe runs to be modified. page 289 • Release a Claim. they cannot be correlated. the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action. If all of the necessary items are not claimed.Running a create task creates a new item in the stockpile. Properties are copied from the primary pipe run to the other pipe runs. page 298 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. The item to be deleted and possibly other related items must be claimed before the task can do its work. Delete Task . Correlate Items . If they are not claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview To Do List and Correlating Items Claiming impacts the To Do List and other TEF commands in the following manner. Create Task .Running a delete task causes the target item to be deleted. the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box. The item to be updated must be claimed before it can be updated.

Right-click the item or select set and click Release Claim. An item claimed by your active project is denoted by an item with an invalid claim on it is denoted by any other state remains blank. The actual status is displayed in the Claims column of the list. You can also release claims on items when you display their claim status. which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items. If a selected item that appears in this dialog box does not have an item tag. and so forth. For more information. • Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. In order to complete the claim release operation. You can review the details of the claimed state of the selected items. claim items.Releases the claim from your project. A selected item in the list is highlighted in the design window. and discover other details of the claim status. A confirmation message is displayed. release the claims to items. Release Claim . Claim . choose Yes to release the claim. Notes • You cannot release the claim on an item that is claimed to your project if it is a new item that was created in your project. SP_ID. is displayed in the Item Tag column.Opens the Claim dialog box. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. select the items for which you want to release claims.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Release a Claim 1. see Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. 2. page 302 Claim Status Dialog Box Opens when you select and item or items and click Edit > Claim Status on the main menu bar. page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. page 302. then the SmartPlant ID. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 301 . and you can claim the item and record claim comments. select Yes on the confirmation dialog box that opens. release the claims to items.

the user who claimed it. select an element in the list and click Details. The New Item entry is automatically added to the comments for an item that is new to the drawing. select elements in the list and click Claim. page 302 Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item 1. 2. and you can discover what project has claimed the selected item. On the Claim Status dialog box. To relinquish claims on those items by your project . Since newly placed items are automatically claimed by the project that places them. Click Edit > Claim Status. page 301 Details Dialog Box Displays details about the claim status of the item that you selected in the Claim Status dialog box. page 292 • Claim Status Command. and any related comments. New items are automatically claimed to the project that created them. select elements in the list and click Release Claim. the user that claimed the item. 302 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . To claim the items to your project.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Details . Related Topics • Claim Status Command. 4.Opens the Details dialog box. and claim comments that were entered when the claim was made. select the items for which you want to display the claim status. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. review the information in the list of items. You can discover the project that has the claim. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. 3. 5. You can select all the items in the list by using Ctrl + A. the project that has claimed the item. the user that claimed it. their claim comments are always "New Item". 6. To see more detailed information about the claim status of that item. and any claim comments that were entered when it was claimed. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. and clicking Ctrl + C makes the selected items available to paste into another document. This dialog box opens when you click Details on the Claim Status dialog box. page 302 • Release a Claim. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item.

When an item tag is defined for an item. Related Topics Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. 2. Click View > Show Claims. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. then when you print the drawing. Using the options on the Claims tab causes only the color and line weight to change. not the line pattern. the software displays the GUID for that item. You can use this command to switch the claim symbology on and off. Notes • You define the line color and weight used to designate claim status on the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box. Click View > Show Claims again to turn off the display of claim status in the symbology of drawing items. the claim status will be plotted. page 303 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology 1. the software displays the item tag in the Claim Status dialog box.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Note • When you see the item tag listed for claimed items and an item tag is not defined for the selected items. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 303 . GUIDs are automatically generated for every design item. If you turn on the display of claim status in the drawing. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 289 Show Claims Command View > Show Claims Sets the appearance of drawing objects as it is specified in the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box.

a change. and if more than one category applies (for instance. Differences between drawing versions are assigned to logical change groups. that is.Indicates the selected group will be modified on the version displaying on the right. described as left and right views. • Two versions are in the active database .Indicates the selected group will be removed from the version displaying on the right. You can compare two versions from inside your own Plant or project database. or deletion of a property in the Properties window or Engineering Data Editor in SmartPlant P&ID or through automation. you cannot compare one drawing to another drawing. you can view two versions side-byside and examine their differences by using the Tools > Compare and Refresh command. which are listed on the Change groups area of the Compare and Refresh dialog box.Indicates that the selected group will be added to the version displaying on the right. they are displayed in time-order from left to right. the item is moved or otherwise graphically manipulated in the drawing. Delete . then the highest priority category is displayed. • Graphic refers to an item that has changed only in its graphical representation in the design. addition. • Add . Values for the Change details include the following. Differences display in the following two categories. if you move an item and change one of its properties). • Every change grouping and every changed item is assigned a category. or you can compare a version in your database to a version in the Plant or another project database. Data refers to a mismatch in the properties assigned to an item that exists in both drawings. that is.The left-hand view is the older version. That is. Keep in mind that you can compare a drawing only against a version of itself. Change details displays information about selected groups in the Change groups area. Modify . 304 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • • The two versions are displayed in two Drawing views. and the right-hand view is the newer version. that is. The relationship between the two views depends on whether you are comparing two versions in your own database or comparing your version to a version in another database.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview When more than one version of a drawing exists.

You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in. If you accept the changes. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 305 . and the left-hand view belongs to the version in another database because you cannot be assured that time-order is the logical order to display the versions. you use the drawing in the plant. the drawing refreshes to display the changes.The right-hand view is reserved for the version in your active Plant or project database. Compare and Refresh Command Tools > Compare and Refresh Allows you to refresh the active drawing with data from another version of the drawing. To refresh any differences between these two versions. Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects. you must set the Action column to Refresh. Available Databases . Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects. Change groups are marked if the changes affect items you have claimed.Lists all the different databases that currently have a version of the drawing you chose on the Show History dialog box. The differences display in what is known as a change group. Compare With Dialog Box Opens when you click Tools > Compare and Refresh allowing you to select a drawing version to compare against the version that you currently have open and active. History . You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in. To refresh a project drawing. Change groups are marked if it affects items you have claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Two versions exist in different databases .Lists all the versions of the chosen drawing in the database you named in the Available Databases list.

Highlights the line in the Change groups and Change details areas. The report contains the details of the compared drawings. You must first select an item in either the Change groups or Change details area. Allows you to customize the display colors for items that differ between the two drawing being compared.Reduces the display of the selected area where you click.Displays a report in Microsoft Excel. Change groups . Alphabetic Categorized . You can also specify to print either the right or left view by using the drop-down arrow to select either Right View or Left View.Enlarges the selected area where you click. Action .Defines which action is to be taken involving the selected change.Prints the entire Compare and Refresh dialog box contents. the Default items color displays. Find in List . Number . Show Modified .Displays the Compare Options dialog box.Displays colors in the drawings as defined using Compare Options. Print .Displays the properties in either an alphabetic list or by specific category.Displays modified properties. Checkbox column . You must first select an item in a drawing. Options include: 306 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Displays the number assigned to each change group.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Compare Options .Area that lists the changed items in groups. Pan . Select . Zoom Area .Allows you to move the display in any direction by dragging the pointer across the view. Zoom In .Changes the pointer to an arrow allowing you to select an item.Enlarges the selected area by allowing you to draw a fence around the area.Zooms to the selected item. A listed item contains all the items this change effects. Generate Report . Zoom Out . Find in Drawing . If not selected.

• Claimed . a property value for a vessel). Valid Claim .Indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example.performs no action on the selected drawing group. Options include: • Data . a vessel has been moved). Actions include: • • • Add . Graphic . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 307 . Category . Delete .Indicates that the items in the group have been claimed.Indicates that a property value has changed (for example. Refresh .Displays the specific type of item. and No Action .Area that lists the details of the item in each change group.Indicates that the claimed item is a valid claim.Applies any drawing changes to the open drawing version.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Validate . • Claimed . The column indicates any differences in the two versions and which version contains the change.Displays the category of the change.Describes the type of item. Graphic .Changes the listed item in the version on the right. Change details .Defines the results of the compare. Modify . • Category . a property value for a vessel). • Data .Indicates that a property value has changed (for example.Displays the category of the change.indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example. Change .Removes the listed item from the version on the right.Adds the listed item to the version on the right. Specific Item Type . Result .Describes what action is required to make the drawing in the right frame match the drawing in the left frame.Validates Invalid Claims for the selected group (no drawing changes are applied).Indicates if an item is a valid or invalid claim. a vessel has been moved). Item Type .

modified properties).Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the left-hand Drawing view only. Black is the default color for this option. Selected items .Allows you to choose a color to denote items that are selected in one or both of the Drawing views. Different items . all properties are listed. Dark green is the default color for this option. 308 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Highlight items .Allows you to choose a color for the display of drawing items that are identical in the two views.Allows you to choose a color for the display of items that exist in both views but differ from each other for any number of reasons (for example. Show Modified . Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. Blue is the default color for this option.Allows you to choose a color to denote that a drawing object is highlighted. Right-only .Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the right-hand Drawing view only.Lists properties in alphabetical order. for instance. Categorized . This button only applies to modified items that exist in both versions. Compare Options Dialog Box Opens when you click Compare Options on the Compare dialog box toolbar and allows you to customize the colors that the various comparison states are displayed in. when an item is within your locate zone. Alphabetical . Left-only . The active color scheme is displayed in the Compare dialog box status bar. Red is the default color for this option.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Properties Window Toolbar Allows you to customize the properties that are displayed in the Properties window of the Compare dialog box. Identical items .Displays properties grouped by specific categories. for added and deleted items.Toggles the display of only those properties that are different between the properties that belong to a selected drawing item.

2. In the History list box. On the Compare With dialog box. The version you are comparing it to displays on the left. 5. Your current drawing displays on the right side of the screen. 4. select No Action. 3. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 309 . Refresh. Using the drop-down list. 7. or Validate. Validate will display as an option only if you have an Invalid Claim.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Drawing Versions 1. select a database using the Available databases drop-down list box. select the drawing you want to compare your current drawing with. 6. Click OK to refresh the drawing and accept any changes or Cancel to dismiss the dialog box. review the information in the Change groups and Change details areas. 8. On the Compare and Refresh dialog box. click in the Action column. In the Change groups area. Click OK. Click Tools > Compare.

a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. Change groups indicates there is only one group and a data change was located. the property value will be modified as shown in the Change column.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Examples The following examples provide details for reconciling data and graphic differences between your current drawing and a previously created version of that drawing. 310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the new property value). a data change is found during the compare. Change details indicates the compare located a different property value (Cleaning Requirement) in the current version. Data Example In this example. The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left. If you Refresh the version. The current version contains the same jacketed tower but a change has been made to the Cleaning Requirements property. When the current version is compared to the selected version. All items in the group are valid claims.

the graphic modification will be accepted as shown in the Change column. a graphic change is found during the compare. If you Refresh the version. Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the previous location of the vessel). All items in the group are valid claims. When the current version is compared to the selected version. a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 311 . Change groups indicates there is only one group and a graphic change was located. The setting are not applied to a version until you click OK. Change details indicates the compare located a graphic modification to a vessel (Jacketed Vessel) in the current version. The current version contains the same jacketed tower but it has been moved to a new location. The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Graphic Example In this example.

Clicking in the Action column of any of the three Change groups allows you to select either No Action or Refresh. The current drawing contains the same jacketed tower and nozzle. Change details indicates the compare located an existing nozzle was moved (Graphic) and a property value change (Data) in the current drawing. The current drawing appears on the right and the drawing it is compared to appears on the left. When the current drawing is compared to the selected version. All items in the groups are valid claims. a jacketed tower with a nozzle exists in the version to be selected for the compare. and a property for the jacketed tower has been changed. a data and graphic change is found during the compare. a new nozzle has been added. the action described in the Change column will be performed when you click OK. Change groups indicates there are three groups of differences. 312 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . If you select Refresh for any of the three groups.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Data and Graphic Example In this example. The original nozzle has been moved.

page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. An approved warning accompanies the off-page connector (C). you can decide the best method to resolve an inconsistency. Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. and offers hints. Additional consistency checking and design propagation are defined in Rule Manager. Consistency checking continuously monitors your work when you change or add items to a drawing. The software displays all the inconsistencies. page 317 • Show Inconsistencies. The software includes pre-defined standard industry design propagation: for example. Using these solutions. Another solution is to reapply placement rules that normally copy properties from one side of a junction to another at the time of item placement. pipe runs inherit properties from nozzles.Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency checking verifies the suitability of work that a designer performs while creating the drawing. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 313 . An error appears where the pipe run connects to the pump nozzle (A). The software verifies. in real-time. describes specific problems. if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules that your company has defined. A warning appears at the point where the valve and pipe run intersect (B). This illustration shows the inconsistency indicators that highlight incorrect relationships at a junction of items in a drawing. One solution is to approve a warning and thereby remove the inconsistency from the drawing.

you can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing in order to display a shortcut menu. page 314 Show Inconsistencies 1. When this option is selected. Note • Also.Consistency Checking: An Overview Show Inconsistencies Command View > Show Inconsistencies Turns on or off the display of indicators that identify inconsistent relationships in the active view. If you do not want the inconsistencies to appear. 2. Select Show > Inconsistencies to toggle the display of inconsistencies off and on. error-free relationships. Click View > Show Inconsistencies. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 313 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. click View > Show Inconsistencies again to clear the selection of the option. inconsistent relationship indicators appear in the drawing. The software does not mark consistent. page 313 • Show Inconsistencies.

page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. you can correct the problems by reviewing them on the Consistency Check dialog box. As you create a drawing.Consistency Checking: An Overview Properties Command Right-click an inconsistency indicator and choose Properties to display the Consistency Check dialog box. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. If a location in the drawing has only one or multiple inconsistencies. page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. consistency checking monitors your drawing for design discrepancies. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 315 .

A specific example of this type can involve data inconsistencies for nominal pipe diameter.Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the second item. When you select one of the inconsistencies in the list. all items involved in the inconsistency are selected. When this dialog box first appears. their specific problem area. Inconsistencies . and lists the inconsistencies. all items involved in the inconsistency are selected. Item 1 . You open this dialog box by right-clicking an inconsistency indicator and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu. Other sections of the dialog box provide details that are specifically related to the selected inconsistency. Description . a ToolTip appears to reveal the entire description. Item 2 . When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears. the software displays information specific to that inconsistency in the Solutions box.Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the first item. 316 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . regardless of severity. normal operating temperature.Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box Opens when you display the properties of an inconsistency indicator. the software automatically selects the first item in the list. and solutions for resolving the inconsistency. are listed on the Consistency Check dialog box. For a lengthy error or warning. You cannot change the inconsistency description.Displays the actual error or warning.Lists all inconsistencies that exist at the selected junction. and alternate design pressure between a piping component and pipe run — three different problems but at the same junction. When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears. which is provided for information only. All inconsistencies that occur at a junction.

The inconsistencies are then re-evaluated and the dialog box is updated. you can right-click an inconsistency indicator and select Properties. and after clicking Apply. Note • Canceling selection of Item 1or Item 2 excludes the item from the select set in the drawing and thereby affects the display in the Properties window. Double-click an inconsistency indicator.Copies properties from one side of the selected inconsistency to the other according to placement rules. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 317 . After selecting an inconsistency from the Inconsistencies list.Consistency Checking: An Overview Solutions . On the Consistency Check dialog box. 2.Lists solutions for resolving the drawing inconsistency. Invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. • Notes • The options for solving the inconsistency in Solutions vary depending on the type of inconsistency. the selected solution is performed. page 28 • Resolve an Inconsistency. 3. • • You can choose the appropriate solution in the Solutions list and click Apply in order to correct an inconsistency. Approved warnings. review the list of possible problem areas at the junction. page 317 Review an Inconsistency 1. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. or you can click Reapply Rules to copy properties from one side of the indicator to the other according to placement rules. Warnings. Reapply Rules . Related Topics • Properties Command.Performs the solution you choose from the Solutions box. Tip In addition. Apply . Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors. you can select the correct solution from this list. Open a drawing.

Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction. the Drawing view offers different inconsistency indicators: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view.Consistency Checking: An Overview • To alert you to possible problems. page 313 318 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview.

Tip • An example of a solution is Copy property value Item 1 => Item 2. • Tip • In addition. for example. Notes • Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors Warnings Approved warnings • A Drawing view also offers graphical symbols to alert you to possible problems: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 319 . you can select it and click Apply. you can click the Reapply Rules button on the Consistency Check dialog box. 2. Or you can use the Properties window to change the nominal diameter of either the pipe or nozzle. Open a drawing. Tips • Or you can right-click an inconsistency indicator to review its properties.Consistency Checking: An Overview Resolve an Inconsistency 1. 3. 5. select the inconsistency that you want to correct in the list. On the Consistency Check dialog box. Click Apply. depending on the type of inconsistency. When you right-click the indicator. Chose the appropriate solution from the Solutions list. which could involve inconsistent nominal diameters of a pipe and nozzle. The options in the Solutions list vary. Double-click an inconsistency indicator. This action can correct the inconsistency. • 4. Changing the diameter confirms that the values are consistent with the information that exists in Rule Manager. you can choose the Reapply Rules command. If you determine that this solution is the best one.

page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency.Consistency Checking: An Overview Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 322 • Review an Inconsistency. page 317 320 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

• Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. too. An inconsistency indicator at the junction between the vessel and the nozzle is displayed for the mismatched cleaning requirements. You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar. It is possible that you still need to choose Properties from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve any remaining inconsistencies there. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. Notes • The Reapply Rules button is available on the Consistency Check dialog box. This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. But if you place a nozzle on the vessel and then you assign a cleaning requirement to the vessel. and drag it to the main toolbar. choosing Reapply Rules causes properties to be copied from one side of the inconsistency to the other according to the same rules that govern copying properties at placement. the nozzle does not inherit that property. For example. this command reapplies the rules defined in Rule Manager for copying properties at placement. That is. if your vessel has a cleaning requirement assigned to it and you place a nozzle on the vessel.Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Rules Command Available on the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu. however. page 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 321 . choose the button for Reapply Rules Then you can reapply rules with one click. Go to Tools > Customize. Frequently this command resolves the inconsistency in your drawing. then the cleaning requirement is copied to the nozzle at placement. invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. If you use Reapply Rules at this indicator. then the rule that copies the cleaning requirement to the nozzle at placement is re-invoked and the inconsistency is resolved. page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. rather than a single inconsistency.

This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. Right-click the inconsistency indicator to display a shortcut menu. Select Reapply Rules. 2.Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency 1. Notes • Invoking placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. page 313 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . choose the button for Reapply Rules and drag it to the main toolbar. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. You can use the Reapply Rules command from the Consistency Check dialog box. rather than a single inconsistency. Then you can reapply rules with one click. You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar. too. It is possible that you need to choose the Properties command from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu in order to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve or approve any remaining inconsistencies there. Placement rules are defined in Rules Manager. Go to Tools > Customize. • • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview.

you can also populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Drawing Data: An Overview There are several ways you can import data into SmartPlant P&ID. page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 323 . page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. SmartSketch files can be imported into SmartPlant P&ID using the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. You can import data and items into the database using reports and other files. Also. you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. During the import process.

only items and their properties. which is saved to your local TEMP folder. page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. This dialog box opens when you use the Import > Data File command on the File menu. page 324 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile. page 265 Import Log Dialog Box Shows the progress of the data importation process and allows you to review the log file. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. Related Topics • Import Data File Command.Lists the results of the file importing process. Import log .log. page 267 324 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Note • Relationships between items cannot be imported. Related Topics • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. These results are also available in SPImport. page 267 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import Data File Command File > Import > Data File Allows you to import data and items into the database from reports and other files.

The database does not contain any information for these unmapped objects. Symbols attached to stand-alone symbols 3. SmartSketch graphics that are not recognized as symbols SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 325 . Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. Labels 7.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import SmartSketch Command File > Import > SmartSketch Allows you to import data from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID and starts the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. Connectors and pipes 4. When migrating your SmartSketch file to SmartPlant P&ID. To account for the rules in SmartPlant P&ID. page 328 Using the SmartPlant Migrator The SmartPlant Migration Wizard is a data migration tool provided by SmartPlant P&ID for converting and importing process flow diagrams (PFDs) and preliminary process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID. a nozzle cannot be placed unless it is attached to a piece of equipment. Certain symbols cannot be placed unless a rule has been met. Stand-alone symbols 2. Placement Order After the SmartSketch file is scanned and all its objects are mapped to SmartPlant P&ID objects. Symbols attached to connectors or pipes 5. Symbol placement is performed in this order: 1. the Migrator maintains graphic visual fidelity. For example. SmartSketch does not have rule sets. During processing. the Migrator scans the SmartSketch file and maps all the objects to SmartPlant P&ID equivalent objects. Any graphics that cannot be mapped are placed in a SmartSketch file that is then placed as an inserted object in the SmartPlant P&ID file. In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. the Migrator looks at the SmartSketch symbols to determine what the symbols are attached to. the Migrator uses rules to determine the order in which to place the resulting symbols. Symbols attached to symbols that are attached to a connector or pipe 6.

Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Rule Considerations Because the SmartPlant Migration Wizard cannot account for all the rule possibilities that are defined in the default SmartPlant P&ID rule set or a customized rule set. • Nozzles . custom SmartSketch attributes can migrate into those properties. pumps. You have to make valid connections manually in SmartPlant P&ID. 326 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or you can edit a symbol map file to equate the symbol names between SmartSketch and SmartPlant P&ID. migrate to the SmartPlant P&ID property database. compressors.Delivered symbols with a matching AABBCC code are mapped intelligently to the equivalent SmartPlant P&ID symbol. Flow .Nozzles are required for connection of piping in SmartPlant P&ID. SmartSketch symbol attributes are conditionally migrated. You define custom properties for SmartPlant P&ID symbols by using Catalog Manager.Piping linear objects not connected to nozzles are placed in SmartPlant P&ID.Appropriate flow direction is established based on the terminator of the connector. therefore. Nozzles are required in the SmartSketch document for connections to be established when converted to SmartPlant P&ID. Because SmartSketch is file-driven and SmartPlant P&ID is databasedriven. but are not connected. These attributes are the same as the SmartPlant P&ID properties for the same items. This file is created during the migration process and you can open this file by using Microsoft Excel. you must open the item in Catalog Manager. Properties . if given a value in SmartSketch.Intergraph Process Flow and P&ID symbols map to the SmartPlant P&ID reference data included with the software.User-defined and default SmartSketch properties are mapped to an equivalent SmartPlant P&ID property. SymbolMap. Non-Nozzle Connections . for duplicate codes. symbol definitions and attributes migrated from a SmartSketch file are stored as properties in the SmartPlant P&ID database. you must create your SmartSketch drawing with the SmartPlant P&ID rule set in mind. Notes • The AABBCC code is not displayed in Catalog Explorer or the Properties window in SmartPlant P&ID. To view the code. SmartSketch has a default set of attributes for vessels. You can add your own unique attributes to a P&ID symbol in SmartSketch. Supported Templates . Symbols .csv. and shell and tube exchangers. this means that the attribute must exist as a SmartPlant P&ID property for that symbol. All of those attributes. and if that same symbol with same properties is available in SmartPlant P&ID. You can check the symbol map file. both products have independent sets of symbols.

and click the Symbol tab. In the Name box. select Text. Notes • Labels in SmartSketch files are migrated very much like symbols. for example. In the Value box. do the following. Right-click the symbol page in order to open the File Properties dialog box. the time that the migration started and stopped. 1F6Y01. 2.log file in the Temp folder.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview SmartLabels . Open the P&ID label in Catalog Manager. This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated.All unrecognized graphics are inserted in the SmartPlant P&ID drawing as embedded SmartSketch graphics. In the Type box. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file. Then the file you just created can migrate Notes • • In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. The properties of these smart labels are passed to the symbol to which they are attached and migrate to SmartPlant P&ID. type AABBCC_code. SmartSketch does include a subset of the SmartPlant P&ID labels.The following list shows planned limitations of the Migrator: • • • Multiple iterations are not supported Flow direction that is indicated by using symbols is not understood The primary goal is not to take fully developed P&IDs into a data-centric environment The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. and any errors encountered during the migration.Item tags and other single property labels are maintained intelligently. enter the appropriate AABBCC code. Limitations . and most of the common labels are smart labels. 5. 1. • Unrecognized Graphics and Annotations . You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. which are labels that are associated with one or more object properties. 3. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 327 . Any label placed in SmartSketch must have an equivalent label in SmartPlant P&ID before it can migrate. This rule maintains visual fidelity even if there are items that could not be mapped intelligently. 4. select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file. the symbols that were migrated. In order to assign an AABBCC code to a SmartPlant P&ID label so that it matches a SmartSketch label.

page 328 Import a SmartSketch File Important In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. • Related Topics • Using the SmartPlant Migrator. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file. • Tip You can create a new. empty drawing in Drawing Manager. Follow the instructions in the SmartSketch Migrator. Tip • The Migrator allows you to browse in the file system for the SmartSketch drawing that you want to import. Open the drawing that you want to import the SmartSketch objects into. 2. the symbols that were migrated. and any errors encountered during the migration. You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file in SmartSketch.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File. • 3. Click File > Import > SmartSketch. 1. the time the migration started and stopped. Notes • The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. Then the file you just created can migrate. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated. page 325 328 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .log file in the Temp folder. if you want to.

cell to display the Stream Number dialog box. For more information. Vessels.txt. Pump Equipment List. Previously imported items. Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 329 .Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data You can populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. Click OK to populate the Properties window with the selected stream ID. During the import process.xml file from the appropriate folder. page 267 Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data 1. • 3. page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. you can click Edit > Properties after you select the pipe run. Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report. . Such spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. modifications must be made to the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. 2. are updated with data from the newly imported file. Click the Browse button and select the Aspen Zyqad stream data . Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the design software. Click the Stream ID list and select a stream ID. You can easily update stockpile items that originate from importing Aspen Zyqad data by re-importing a data file. Pumps. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. Select a pipe run from the drawing to display the Properties window for the pipe run. and Heat Exchanger Equipment List. 5. Tip If the Properties window is not open. All three reports. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported. 4. and Exchangers. or . Click the Calculate button next to the Stream No.xls.

Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Note • Existing values in the Properties window are redefined by importing Aspen Zyqad stream data. page 265 330 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. Your report definition is retrieved from the Excel workbook. you do not have to include every available property in your report if it is not appropriate. nozzle. only the information about nozzles that are associated with pumps is collected. reports are fully customizable. 3. For example. You begin your reporting process by selecting a report template from the Reports menu and then selecting items in the drawing for inclusion in your report. When creating your report. Your report definition contains one or more report items organized in a tree hierarchy. For example. Microsoft Excel starts. however. The relationships that exist between the various item types constitute additional available information for a report. only items that have a relationship with your selected item type can be used as input. This item type serves as the starting point for collecting data for your report. a nozzle report item can be added to access data about nozzles because nozzles and equipment are related. see the Properties Glossary. you can create a report. and then the Excel workbook opens. The report template is copied to the report output folder. Each report that you create is based on an item type. You can create your own reports that contain the information that you want to see in a format you choose. a nozzle is related to the equipment with which it is grouped. This report item makes the properties associated with each piece of equipment available for inclusion in your report. Your data is retrieved based on the report item definitions of the report template. if a nozzle is added as the toplevel item in the tree. Each report consists of a Microsoft Excel workbook and a report definition. For example. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 331 . Then the software performs the following tasks: 1. Examples of item types include equipment. For example.Generating Reports: An Overview Generating Reports: An Overview Reporting is the process of retrieving information from the database and displaying the information as formatted output. The location of a report item in the tree hierarchy affects the properties that are collected for the associated item type. a report based on the equipment item type contains a report item named Equipment. which describes the data to collect and how to organize the data in the workbook. and pipe run. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help. If the nozzle is added as a child of Equipment: Mechanical. instrument. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. Each report contains at least one report item to define the item type of the report. At any time during the design creation process. all nozzles in the database are collected for your report. 2. Each report item is based on an item type. Several default report templates already exist. You can define additional report items to access more properties for more item types. however.

Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username. page 334 332 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 348 • Generate a Report. page 349 • Display the Properties of a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview 4. • Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. Data prints to the Microsoft Excel workbook using the cell mapping data in your report definition. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.

use the Reports menu.Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. Current Selection .Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. page 38 Plant Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose a report and specify what items to report on. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. This command is available on the Reports menu on the main toolbar and also on the View menu in the Engineering Data Editor. use this command from the Reports menu. use this command from the Engineering Data Editor View menu. Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 331 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected.Generating Reports: An Overview Plant Reports Command Reports > Plant Reports Opens the Plant Reports dialog box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 333 . The location of these report templates is defined in Options Manager. which displays a list of all plant-level reports associated with the current plant. if you want to run a report on table items. Include items in drawing stockpile . If you want to run a report on drawing items. Selecting a plant report from this list and specifying the items that you want to report on generates the associated report in Microsoft Excel. If you want to run a report based on items in your Engineering Data Editor.Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection. Entire drawing . use the Engineering Data Editor View menu. This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > Plant Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > Plant Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Note • The Engineering Data Editor is the area where you can view stockpile items. This list is alphabetical. If you have a drawing in the Design window and you want to report on items in that drawing.

page 265 334 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit. page 334 • Plant Reports Command. Tip If you select no items. select the items that you want to include in the report. The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username. page 147 Generate a Report 1. choose the items that you want to report on. Before running the Line List report. • • Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports. page 333 • Select an Item. 3. verify that every line in the selection has an Item Tag. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Generate a Report.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items. In the Report using area on the Plant Reports dialog box or the My Reports dialog box. Select the report that you want to generate. page 331 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. • 4. • Tip Or click Reports > My Reports to select a customized report that you defined already. Click Reports > Plant Reports. You can include more items in your report by selecting Entire drawing. the software gives you the option to report on all items.

Current Selection . You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection.Generating Reports: An Overview My Reports Command Reports > My Reports Opens the My Reports dialog box which lists all user-level reports. If you want to run a report based on drawing items. Note • You can define the location for storing user-level report templates by clicking Tools > Options and then selecting the Files tab. Include items in drawing stockpile . They can be stored on your local workstation. not the Engineering Data Editor command. page 348 • Generate a Report. access this command from the View menu on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected.Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template. if you want to run a report on table items. This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > My Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > My Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. This list is alphabetical. if you want to run a report based on table items. If you want to run a report on drawing items. use the Reports menu. Entire drawing . page 331 My Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose one of your custom reports and to specify what items to report on. Report using . access this command from the Reports menu on the main toolbar.Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. that is active when you access this dialog box. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. The options that appear in this area depend on the view. Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. use the Engineering Data Editor menu.Displays options for specifying the scope of your report. page 334 • Generating Reports: An Overview. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 335 .

Related Topics • Generate a Report. page 147 336 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 335 • Select an Item. You can include more items in your report by selecting the Entire drawing option.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items. page 334 • My Reports Command. Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit.

page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. and composite report templates. thus. therefore. page 340 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. see the Properties Glossary. such as Equipment List and Pipe Run List. as the name suggests. page 341 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. Now the property name is mapped into the report template. as long as all plants use the same property name. So the software allows you to define report templates in several different formats and with all manner of information from the design database. Portable report templates In previous versions of the software. combine tabular and fixed formatting. you create your own custom report templates or modify the delivered templates in order to gather and display the specific information that you want. the properties of inline components and instruments can be used in a pipe run report because inline components are related to their pipe runs. page 338 • Edit a Report Template. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. the template file stores an internal identifier for that property. too. that report template is tightly linked to the plant that creates the property. Fixed format templates allow the greatest amount of freedom in formatting your report. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help. any item that is related in any way to the basic item type of your report makes its properties available to include in the definition of your template. For instance. but you can control the content of the template also.Generating Reports: An Overview Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview Although the software includes several default report templates. and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 337 . Each report is based on a unique item type. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. Not only can you completely control the format of your report. You can create report templates in three different formats: • • • Tabular Fixed Composite Format Report The delivered report templates are all tabular format reports. when a property is mapped to a report template. the same report template is valid. and the properties that are associated with that item type are readily available to include in your report. In addition. page 357 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template.

In other words. you are free to type a label and map report item properties anywhere in the lines that you designate for your header. all properties populate the report by using the same format defined for the first row. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 348 • Generate a Report. tabular format reports are row-based. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. page 334 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template 1. • • • 338 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . That is. Tips • The header is part of the tabular format report template where data is not mapped based on rows. the report template for an Equipment List can appear like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type #Equipment::Name# #Equipment::Description# #Equipment::Type# When the report is generated. The header is a good place to put information that applies to all the items in your report. such as Unit or Plant Name. choose the size of your report header. The Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is important for setting aside space for the header and empty rows between lines in the report because the placement of report item properties is restricted in the tabular format report template. click Options. Also. On the Options dialog box. Be sure to include space in your header for the labels of your columns. For example. the output appears like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type D-100 T-100 Horizontal Drum 100 Potable Water Tank Horizontal Drum Vertical Tank Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. When the report is generated. you can add graphics in your report header. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 357 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. page 338 • Display the Properties of a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular Format Report All the delivered report templates are tabular format reports. 2.

Complete column headings in the last row of your header. Notes • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. 7. Tip This cell can be either in the body of the report or in the header. Click OK to close the Options dialog box. Save the template and quit Microsoft Excel. page 357. 6. 9. • Tips • You only have to map properties for one item. Each row is filled with properties for one item. if you create a template based on an existing template. in your header. When you add any property value in the header. The location of plant-level report templates is specified in Options Manager. Only one property can be mapped to a given cell. 4.Generating Reports: An Overview 3. and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option in the Options dialog box. Choose the number of empty lines that you want between rows in your report. Select Blank as your source template if you want to create a fixed or composite format report template. Tip Some report templates. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 339 . • 10. 8. • 5. Choose the property that you want to map to your cell from the Map Properties menu. for example the Line List. For more information. Repeat the previous steps until you have mapped all the properties that you want to map on this report template. Select a cell in your report template where you want to map a particular property. although the same property can be mapped to more than one cell. Complete general labels and graphics. if needed. designate two rows of data for each report item and then an empty row. Properties for all the items follow the format you map for the first one. The location for user-level templates is defined on the Files tab of the Options dialog box (Tools > Options). The items on this menu are chosen when you define the contents of your template. the format of your report template is also tabular. a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created.

Repeat the previous steps until you have labeled and mapped all the needed report item properties to the corresponding locations in your template. you only edit the first worksheet. page 357. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. 4. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. all fixed format worksheets. page 340 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. follow the format of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. and the layout for each worksheet matches the layout defined for the first worksheet. one for each item of the report item type. page 349 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. Choose a cell on your Microsoft Excel worksheet and type labeling information into it.Generating Reports: An Overview Related Topics • Composite Format Report. Tip A label is not a required feature of a fixed format report template. and from the menu select the property that you want to map to the cell you chose in the previous step. the data for each report item appears in its own worksheet. page 338 Fixed Format Report The fixed format report creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. • 340 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . When you generate a fixed format report. • 3. When you generate your report. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. When defining the report template. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. Click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Choose a cell where you want the property associated with the labeling to appear. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. For more information. Tip The properties on the Map Properties menu are specified when you define the contents of your report. 2. You can simply map properties to cells without any labeling if you want. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. page 348 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template 1.

page 340. page 350 • Edit a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. see Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. choose Blank from the Source template list if you want to create a composite format template. but the properties for subsequent items in the report are displayed starting with the third sheet because the second worksheet is tabular format. Related Topics • Composite Format Report. The properties of the first item are displayed on the first worksheet. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. page 341 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. You choose your report format on the Report Properties dialog box. page 338 Composite Format Report The composite format report template is a combination of fixed and tabular format reports. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. Note • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 341 . and the second sheet contains the tabular format report. For more information about defining fixed format report templates. In a composite format report template. page 344 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. page 348 • Generate a Report. Tips • Each item in the report has its own page. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere on your worksheet. Define the layout of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. In your Microsoft Excel workbook the first sheet contains the fixed format report. page 334 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template 1. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. the first worksheet is automatically fixed format.

the Options command is available for you to use in the tabular portion of the composite report template. however. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. page 338. • 3. the second worksheet is automatically tabular format. After you have defined the layout for the first and second worksheets in your report template. save the template and quit Excel. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. In a composite format report template. although you can map the same property to more than one cell. Notes • You can map only one property into a given cell. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. For more information about defining tabular format report templates. page 338 • 342 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created. 2. and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. see Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. Define the layout of the second Microsoft Excel worksheet. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option.Generating Reports: An Overview You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. • Related Topics Composite Format Report. When you add any property value in the header.

The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. You can assign source templates. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. This name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook.Defines the item properties available in your report. You select a user-level template.Lists the names of all existing report templates and Blank. tabular. one for each item of the report item type. You do not have to edit the report template when you first create it. Item type . If you chose Blank. follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. formats. page 349 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. Report Type . if you do not chose Blank.xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. This dialog box provides options for defining plant-level and user-level templates. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 343 . Related Topics • Composite Format Report. plant-level template. or Blank. If you do not select a Blank source template type. page 340 • Tabular Format Report.Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating. and composite. then the Item type option automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template.Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. and descriptions for your report template and define the item type upon which you base your report. but all fixed format worksheets. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > New on the main menu bar. Source template . Name . page 338 New Report Template Dialog Box Displays options for creating plant-level and user-level report templates. The software appends . the item type automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template. you must specify an item type. You only edit the first worksheet. Fixed format .Generating Reports: An Overview New Command Reports > New Displays the New Report Template dialog box. whereas. All delivered report templates are tabular format. Available options include fixed. page 341 • Create a New Blank Report Template. names. The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information. Templates in this list appear in alphabetical order.Specifies your report format.

Subsequent fixed format worksheets are created after sheet two for each item of your report item type when you generate your report. nonetheless. Description . 2. • 5.Formats your report in a table. When you save the template. you must choose Blank if you want a fixed or composite format report template. You can select Blank for a tabular format report template. All delivered reports are tabular format. the software appends . choose template format. In the Item type box. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. In the Name box.Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular formats. Tips • You can create a new report template based on an existing template by specifying a source template also. the second sheet is Tabular format. 4. Composite format . page 349. In the Report type box. or the template format is row-based. Since delivered reports are all in tabular format. type a meaningful name to describe the report template you are creating. 3.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular format . page 34 Create a New Blank Report Template 1. Tip • These options are only available when you choose Blank from the Source template list. see Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.xls to the name. select an item type. page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. page 348 • Edit Command. Click Reports > New. select Blank from the Source template list. On the New Report Template dialog box. the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. The first sheet in the workbook is Fixed format. You can assign any description. page 345 • New Command. 344 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . That is.Describes the report type that this template produces. • Tip This entry is the name of your Microsoft Excel workbook. For more information.

Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. Note • You must have valid privileges to edit a report template. Tip You must have the appropriate permissions. type a description for the template. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. 8. to create plant-level report templates. 7. • 9. In the Description box. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 345 . see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. When the software gives you the option to edit your new template in Microsoft Excel. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. page 348 • Fixed Format Report. page 341 Related Topics • Composite Format Report. select the Add to plant reports option. You can select a template and view its properties and edit it in Microsoft Excel. click OK and define the layout and contents of the template.Generating Reports: An Overview 6. For more information on those procedures. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. Click OK to create the template. If you want this template to be available at the plant-level. page 340 Edit Command Opens the Edit Report Template dialog box. This dialog box lists all the available report templates. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview.

if you do not choose Blank. the software automatically specified the Item type option as the item type that corresponds to your source template. Available reports . or Blank. and composite.Displays the selected template in Microsoft Excel.Displays the Report Properties dialog box where you can modify the description and the report template format.Lists all report templates available to edit or customize. Source template . tabular. Report Type . 346 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 348 • Edit Command. This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box.Specifies your report format. page 349 • Edit a Report Template. Templates in this list appear in alphabetically. You select a user-level template. to edit plant-level report templates. page 34 Report Properties Dialog Box Displays properties for plant-level and user-level report templates. Important • You must have the correct privileges. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Edit on the main menu bar. If you choose the Blank option. the Item type option is automatically specified with the item type that corresponds to your source template. The name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook.Defines the item properties available to populate your report. Open . Select a template from the list. Properties . Click Properties to view and update properties for a report template.Generating Reports: An Overview Edit Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates and opens the selected report template in Microsoft Excel so that you can make changes to it. whereas.Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating. Name .Displays the names of all existing report templates and Blank. page 345 • New Command. If you select a source template other than Blank. The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information. Available options include fixed. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. you must specify an item type. plant-level template.xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. Related Topics • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. The software appends . Item type .

page 345 • New Command. the second sheet is tabular format.Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. or the report format is row-based. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. That is. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. When you generate your report. All delivered report templates are tabular. You can assign any description. but all fixed format worksheets. page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template.Formats your report in a table. page 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 347 . the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row. Tabular format . You only edit the first worksheet. page 350 • Edit a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Fixed format . The first sheet in the workbook is fixed format. one for each item of the report item type. page 348 • Edit Command.Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular styles. Description . the software creates subsequent fixed format worksheets after sheet two for each item that matches your report item type. Composite format .Describes the report type that this template produces.

For more information about these procedures. select a report from the Available reports list. page 331 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . see • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. Tip Because you are modifying a template that already is defined. page 337 • Generating Reports: An Overview. 3. Type Sheet1.Generating Reports: An Overview Edit a Report Template 1. 4. 2. Click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box in order to edit template properties on the Report Properties dialog box.Delete in the Immediate window.Application. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. Quit Excel. page 357 Notes • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel.CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports"). page 341 Define the Contents of Your Report Template. changing the Report type option and the description are the only available actions on the Report Properties dialog box. On the Edit Report Template dialog box. Click Open on the Edit Report Template dialog box to display the report in Microsoft Excel so that you can edit the layout and contents of your report template. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. then on the Excel menu bar. 3. Select View > Immediate Window. select Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor and follow these steps: 1. • You must have the correct permissions. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. to edit a report template. 2. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Click Reports > Edit. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template.

Click OK. For more information. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 340 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Because you are creating a report based on an existing template. Click Reports > New. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 349 . select an existing template from the Source template list. • Related Topics • Composite Format Report. see Create a New Blank Report Template. choose Blank from the Source template list. some options on the New Report Template dialog box are not available. On the New Report Template dialog box. type a name for the new report template. 6. page 344. When the software gives you the option to edit your template. 2.Generating Reports: An Overview Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template 1. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. 5. the format of your report template is tabular. type a description for the new report template. 3. In the Description box. if you create a template using an existing template. In order to make all options available. 4. click OK to open Microsoft Excel and define the contents and layout of your report. For more information about those procedures. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. page 341 Notes • Because the delivered report templates are all in tabular format. In the Name box. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template.

page 345 • New Command. to delete a report template. Available Reports . page 331 • Report Properties Dialog Box. Select Reports > Edit.Generating Reports: An Overview Display the Properties of a Report Template 1. page 331 Delete Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates. page 346 Delete Command Reports > Delete Displays the Delete Report Template dialog box. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. 2. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Click Properties. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Select a report from the Available reports list on the Edit Report Template dialog box. page 351 • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 351 • Edit Command. which allows you to select and delete a report template. You can delete a selected report template if you have the proper privileges. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. 3. page 34 350 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.Lists all available report templates. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar. Note • You must have valid privileges. Related Topics • Delete a Report Template. Related Topics • Delete a Report Template.

Important • You must have the correct privileges. 4.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete a Report Template 1. to delete a report template.CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports"). Note • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel. then click Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor in Excel and follow the steps below: 1.Application. select a report from the Available reports list. 3. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. 3. 2. Quit Excel. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Related Topics • Define Command. Click Close. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview.Delete in the Immediate window. page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 351 . page 348 • Map Properties Command. Click OK to delete the report template. On the Delete Report Template dialog box. 2. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Type Sheet1. page 360 • Options Command. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. Select View > Immediate Window. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template. Click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar. page 331 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar Appears when you are editing or creating a report template in Microsoft Excel.

The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on the worksheet. Note • In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets. you define the properties that you want available for inclusion in your report template. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. This dialog box opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. instrument. For the selected item in the Report on tree. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel.Generating Reports: An Overview Define Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Define Opens the Define Report Contents dialog box.Displays the Define Report Items dialog box. nozzle. page 344 • Edit a Report Template. Use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. Each report item is based on an item type (equipment. This template is a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains cells and worksheets. or item types related to it. 352 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which allows you to define a report template specifying the layout and contents of your report. To create a report definition (a list of report item properties available to include in your template). A report definition describes how to collect the properties data and how to format it in a report. In order to define the layout of the report item properties. and so forth) and controls how the properties of that item type. Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet. Define . Select the cell and then select the property from the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. which opens when you click Define on the Define Reports Contents dialog box. You map properties to the individual Microsoft Excel cells to define the content and layout of your report. page 348 Define Report Contents Dialog Box Defines new items to include in your report and selects the cells to include for the new items. use the Define Report Items dialog box. are retrieved from the database. pipe run. you assign properties to particular cells.

Then you can map the properties that you select to cells in your report template. For instance. The software adds this item type as a child of the item type selected on the Define Report Contents dialog box.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete . For instance. the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle. If you add a new item type. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 353 . Report on . page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. To include the properties. You use this dialog box to specify new item types to include in the Report on tree. and equipment without nozzles is not reported. That is. you must select an item from the Report on list and click Define. Apply . a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. its properties are available for inclusion in your report template. Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template.Displays a tree view of item types the properties available for inclusion in your report template.Adds the selected item type to the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box. page 34 New Items Dialog Box Opens when you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box and displays a list of items that are related to the item that you selected there. Select an item type to make its properties available to include in your report. page 349 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. if you add the equipment item type under nozzles. page 348 • New Command. That is. New .Removes an item from the tree view and from your report structure. Its properties are no longer available for your report template. if you add the equipment item type under nozzles. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle. Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. and equipment without nozzles is not reported.Displays the New Items dialog box.

Select item types from this list to include in your report template. The properties of the new item types are then available to use in your report. the software prompts you to rename the new item type uniquely. You can rename the item. which.Displays the name of the selected item type. then items are never grouped together because a unique tag is a property that items never share. If you want to tally similar items in this way. be sure not to map unique properties. 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . onto your report. Select the properties to include for each report item type and define sorting and filtering for those properties. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. you can use this feature to give you the total numbers of valves with 1" nominal diameter. For example. page 348 • New Command. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. Group by the selected property . page 348 • Edit Command. 2" nominal diameter. is accessed by clicking Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Name . If you have duplicate item type names in your report item type hierarchy. such as item tags. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. and so forth. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. 1. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 34 Define Report Items Dialog Box Specifies the report item properties available for your report. The Report Item Group Total property displays the number of items that have identical reported properties. If you do.5" nominal diameter.Automatically adds a special Report Item Group Total property to the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 34 Properties Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Displays properties for a report item so you can select properties to use in your report template. page 345 • New Command. page 344 • Define Command. in turn.Generating Reports: An Overview Items related to . page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. This dialog box is accessed by clicking Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. page 357 • Edit a Report Template.Displays a list of item types related to the item type that you selected in the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box.

Selected properties . For more information about select lists and their values and indices. Only select-listed properties can be displayed in their short value form.Moves the selected item out of the Available properties list and into the Selected properties list. You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the left arrow. You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the right arrow. the short value is longer than the regular value. Right Arrow . Use short text .Moves the selected item in the Selected properties list to the Available properties list. page 343 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 355 . see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help.Displays the short text value. Use select list index . double-clicking an item in the Available properties list moves it to the Selected properties list. selecting this option for Drawing causes repetition of Unit cells on any line containing Drawing cells. Available properties . Related Topics Edit a Report Template. For example. page 348 • New Command. if your report contains Unit then Drawing as a child of Unit.Includes the numerical index of the select entry along with either the short value or select list value for that property.Lists the report item properties you have selected from the Available properties list that are consequently available for inclusion in your report. Also.Displays all properties for the report item you specified on the Define Report Contents dialog box. page 34 • New Report Template Dialog Box. double-clicking an item in the Selected properties list moves it to the Available properties list.Generating Reports: An Overview Repeat parent data . Also. which is defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. Left Arrow . In a few cases.Displays the cells of parent item data in your report.

Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. You can select more than one item and then click this button. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. Browse . double-clicking an item moves it to the Sort properties list. Right Arrow .Displays the properties selected for sorting. Left Arrow . page 360 • Options Command. page 348 • Map Properties Command. which. Also.Moves the selected item down in sorting priority. Sort properties .Generating Reports: An Overview Filter Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the filter that you want to use for your report item. which. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. To select a new filter. in turn. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. in turn. Also.Moves the selected item in the Available properties list to the Sort properties list. opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.Lists all the properties of your report item.Displays your selected filter.Displays the Select Filter dialog box. page 17 • Sort Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the cells that you use to sort the report items and how. opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. which allows you to choose or to further define item types for your report template. type a valid filter name or click Browse to locate a filter. Down Arrow .Specifies the sorting order (ascending or descending) for the report data. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. Applied filter . You can select more than one item and then click this button. Related Topics Define Command.Moves the selected item up in sorting priority. page 343 356 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Moves the selected item in the Sort properties list to the Available properties list. page 348 • New Report Template Dialog Box. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Up Arrow . Order . Available properties . which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. double-clicking an item moves it to the Available properties list.

Generating Reports: An Overview Define the Contents of Your Report Template 1. On the Define Report Contents dialog box. 10. 8. The highest node in the Report on hierarchy under which you can add a new item is the node that belongs to the report item type that you base your template definition on. • 7. choose the properties that you want to map to your report template. Click Apply. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 357 . 4. Tip If you want to add more new items under another node in the hierarchy. you must type a different name for it in the Name box. Click New. On the New Items dialog box. When you have added all the items that you want from this list. 2. 6. Tip If the item that you choose has the same name as an item elsewhere in the hierarchy. you can choose from only those items that are related to the item you selected in the Report on hierarchy. On the Properties tab of the Define Report Items dialog box. choose that node and repeat the previous steps. click Close. • 9. Change the name of the item that appears in the hierarchy by typing text in the Name box. Click Define. select an item with properties that you want for your report template. click Define. • 5. select the new item that you want to add to the hierarchy. Tips • When you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box. You can add items under any nodes subordinate to the main report item type as long as they have items related to them. 3. • Using the New command skillfully allows you to navigate in all directions in the plant hierarchy and gather properties from throughout the plant database. Select the node in the Report on hierarchy under which you want the new item type to appear to add a new report item type so that its properties are available to map onto your report template.

Generating Reports: An Overview Tips • If you want to sort the order in which your items are listed when you generate a report. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel. choose the property or properties to sort on by using the Sort tab. If you want to change the filter that finds your report items. When you have selected all the properties that you want in your report. and so you can repeat the previous steps to continue adding more items and specifying their properties. In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets. 12. page 331 Options Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Options Opens the Report Options dialog box. • Notes • All the properties that you have made available to map into your template are now displayed when you click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. you can switch from a filter that displays all pumps to a filter that displays only active pumps. Click OK. For instance. Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. 11. Now you can use the properties you have specified in the layout of your template. • Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. • Tip The Define Report Contents dialog box remains open. click OK on the Define Report Contents dialog box. page 331 358 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which provides options for defining header and spacing details in your report template. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. use the Filter tab.

page 338 • Edit a Report Template.Defines the number of blank lines between each row in your report. you are not constrained to have a header or rows at all. page 341 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. Skip lines between rows . Rows in report header . In fixed format report templates. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 349 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. The maximum value allowed is 1000.Specifies the number of rows in your report header.Generating Reports: An Overview Report Options Dialog Box Specifies the number of empty rows between items in your report and the number of rows in your report header. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 359 . page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. You can enter a value in the box or use the scroll buttons to select a value. This dialog box opens when you click Options on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. It is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place captions and properties in any configuration that you want. Note • The Options command is available for tabular and composite format report templates only.

You can select a cell in your report template and then assign a property from the Map Properties list. Note • The SmartPlant Reports toolbar appears in Microsoft Excel when you create or edit a report template. The software places the corresponding property in the selected cell. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. This menu is populated with the items that you define with the SmartPlant Reports toolbar Define command. You do not have to map all the properties in the Map Properties menu. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. and you can add properties to the menu by using the Define command again. The Map Properties menu contains a subset of all the properties in the plant database. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Map Properties Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Map Properties Displays a menu of all properties associated with your report. page 349 • Edit a Report Template. page 331 360 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

see the documentation for your printer. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 361 . you can send a copy of it to a specified printer. and then click the printer you want to use. Set printing options. Note Zero length pipe runs will print. the screen display of the drawing closely matches the printed drawing. You can click the Print command on the File menu to do the following: • • Print an entire drawing or specific views from a drawing. inconsistency indicators. and screen fonts. subject to the limitations of the device driver. you must have a corresponding screen font and font size to display each font on the screen. If each screen font you use has a matching printer font. to make sure that what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. or filtered items. Preparing to print The printer you use affects the way the current drawing prints and displays text on the screen. However. For more information about installation. Three kinds of fonts affect your work: scalable fonts. The software supports plotting using standard Windows plotting capabilities.Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Drawings: An Overview You can print your drawings on many different devices ranging from dot matrix printers to laser printers and plotters. Printing a Drawing As you work on a drawing. the zero length pipe run between these symbols will print. It also supports pen plotters. Items look the same on the screen and in the printed drawing. your drawing prints exactly as it appears in the Drawing view. such as the range of sheets or number of copies to print. printer fonts. Before you print a drawing. To do this. or file. To set the print range and scale. Before you print. Use scalable fonts. plotter. when a reducer is connected to a nozzle. This stipulation applies to special settings like the display of claimed items. click the Settings button. you must install and select the printer you want to use. click the Print command on the File menu. the fonts you select can affect the match between what you see on the screen and what appears on the printed page. You can set properties for the printer by clicking the Properties button. select a printer and the settings for it. such as TrueType® fonts. Except for the color settings and a few special effects. Zero length pipe runs will not print if you print your drawing using Drawing Manager. For example. If you use printer fonts.

anyone with a Web browser can view the digital drawings online. You can print all views or certain views. Related Topics • Print a Drawing. page 365 • Print a Selected Area. Printing to a Digital Archive You can use a separate Intergraph software application to store drawings in a Web server-based digital archive called the Digital Print Room (DPR). PostScript® printers print faster than LaserJet printers. A DPR Windows printer driver extends the capabilities of File > Print to add drawings to the DPR. This feature is handy if you are working on a complex drawing and you want to print only certain parts to proof them. page 368 362 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Part of a Drawing You can print selected sheets in a drawing or a selected area. Some older versions of PostScript® printers are slower when compared to the newer ones. but other items that are in the view with the select set print. or textures Large bitmaps Links to various drawings The type of printer you have also affects the printing time. because they can make the necessary calculations faster. patterns. You can print not only drawing items that are selected. After you populate the DPR. Expect longer print times when you have drawings that contain a large number of the following items: • • • • Curved items Many fills that have complex colors. Contact Intergraph for more information. Printing Time Drawings can take some time to print. page 366 • Print to a File. The type of controller boards and the amount of RAM in the printer also affect your printing times.

Where . which allows you to specify page setup and other printer settings. This area is read-only.Displays any comments you entered during printer configuration. Selecting File > Print also opens the Print dialog box. This area is read-only.Opens the Printer Document Properties dialog box. page 102 Print Dialog Box Controls how a drawing is printed. The Print to File dialog box appears when you select the Print to file option on the Print dialog box and then click OK. Options are available for defining the printing area. This area is read-only. printer. This area is read-only. number of copies. you must install and select a printer. You can select from a list of all the available configured printers. or file. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 363 .Printing Drawings: An Overview Print Command File > Print Sends a copy of the active drawing to a specified plotter.Identifies the printer path.Describes the state of the selected printer.Displays the type of printer currently selected. busy or idle.pri instead of sending it to a printer. The printer you select in the Name box is the default printer for the rest of the current design session until you specify a different printer. Name . This dialog box opens when you click File > Print on the menu bar. Type . or physical location of the currently selected printer. printer port. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. You select a file name and location for the print file in the Print to File dialog box.Stores your drawing in a file with extension . The information below the Name box applies to the selected printer. such as. For help on installing a printer. Print to file .Specifies the printer you want to use. queue name. page 367 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. and other printing characteristics. Before using this command. see the printer documentation. Comment . Status . Properties . Then you can print from a computer that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than the one you currently have configured. page 361 • Set Print Options. range.

View . When you select this option. page 365 • Print Command. Related Topics • Print a Drawing.Prints a faint graphic in the drawing background. page 367 Settings Dialog Box Specifies the area you want to print. For example. Selection . Print black and white . Manual scale . Fit to page .Displays the number of copies you want to print. If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale.Prints the user-defined area.Prints the copies in proper binding order. if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12.Prints the drawing in black and white. All . Best fit . Settings . This button is disabled when the Selection option in the Print range group is selected.Prints each defined view associated with the drawing. Type the number or use the scroll buttons to specify a number. Active .Prints your entire drawing on one page.Opens the Settings dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Settings on the Print dialog box. the Settings button at the bottom of the Print dialog box is unavailable. 364 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can set the Paper length option to 1 and the Design length option to 1. Print watermark . page 363 • Print to a File. then the printed range appears to be 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper.Prints your entire drawing. Number of copies . Collate . page 368 • Set Print Options.Activates the All and Active check boxes so you can then define the view or views to print.Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the configured device.Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing.Printing Drawings: An Overview Drawing . which allows you to view and edit the scale and origin of your print area.Prints only the active view.

In the Number of copies box. X origin . • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 365 . X. the red. Caution • It is a good idea to save your drawing before you print it so that a printer error or other problem does not cause you to lose any work completed since the last time you saved the drawing. Click Print on the Main toolbar. 3. page 366 • Print Command. page 365 • Print a Selected Area.Sets a shift in the x-direction from the origin.Sets a shift in the y-direction from the origin. blue.Displays dynamically how the graphic prints on the sheet as you change other options on the dialog box. specify the range of pages you want to print. Design length. Y origin . Select the printer that you want to use from the Name list. Related Topics • Print a Drawing. If you do not set this option. and so forth. Paper length.Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print with respect to the Design length option. Note • For many of the options on this dialog box such as. and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect your new values.Printing Drawings: An Overview Paper length . page 363 • Print to a File. then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left. page 368 Print a Drawing 1. Center .Specifies a design length (size of the printed graphic) with respect to the Paper length option.Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. select the printer before you begin working on a drawing. when you change an option. type the number of copies you want. Y. 4. Design length . 2. Preview . Because the fonts available on the selected printer affect both displaying and printing. you have a dynamic representation of how your graphic fills the printed sheet. Therefore. In the Print range box.

install a printer driver. page 366 • Print Command. • 3.Printing Drawings: An Overview Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking the Properties button or the Settings button on the Print dialog box. You can display the drawing as it is to be printed. Click File > Page Setup to specify the drawing size. Click Tools > Options. Tip For more information on zooming in on an area of a drawing. page 361 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 363 • Print to a File. page 23. and select the printer to print the drawing. see the printer documentation. page 144 366 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click File > Print. you must connect the printer to the computer or network. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. select the Display as printed option. choose Selection from the Printer Range area. • • • Related Topics • Print a Selected Area. 2. For more information about how to install a printer. page 368 Print a Selected Area 1. Before you can print for the first time. On the Print dialog box. Select the portion of the drawing for printing. On the General tab. see Zoom In on an Area.

select Fit to page. You can set the paper size. Under Options. page 361 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 367 . • Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview.Printing Drawings: An Overview Set Print Options 1. Select the item or portion of the drawing that you want to print. Under Options. To print The entire drawing All defined views Do this Under the Print range option. select Print black and white. and then on the Print dialog box. Click OK. select Drawing. and you can enter the file name and select its location. Multiple copies Drawing fit to 1 page Watermark Black and white Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. select View and All. In the Number of Copies box. The entire drawing is printed. Select Print to file on the Print dialog box. The Settings button becomes unavailable. and orientation. The active view A selected area To a file Select View and then Active. use SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. To sort the sheets by sheet number. which has multiple drawing printing functionality. Tip • button on the Main toolbar. source. enter a number of copies. Click File > Print or the Print 2. Arrange the views you want to print. select Print watermark. Click OK on the Print dialog box. Do one of the following. The Print to File dialog box appears. If you want to print more than one drawing. You can create more than one Drawing view by selecting Window > New > Drawing and zooming or panning to the area of the Drawing view that you want to print. Under Options. Click Selection. select Collate.

click Properties. 4. select Print to file. On the Print dialog box. and so forth. Click Advanced on the Printer Document Properties dialog box to specify more printing options. On the Main toolbar. click Print 3. page 361 368 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Note • . On the Layout tab. Click Properties on the Print System Advanced Options dialog box to open the Halftone Color Adjustment dialog box and further specify color. The file is saved with a . view or change the Orientation option and choose the Duplex Printing option if necessary. Scaling. On the Paper/Quality tab. 2. 3. 6. and type the name of the file. 4. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. Click OK. and so forth. select the folder to which you want to print to. Paper Size options.Printing Drawings: An Overview Change Printer Properties 1. the Copy Count. view or change the Paper Source option and color quality setting. such as. Click File > Print. page 361 Print to a File 1. On the Print to file dialog box. 5.prn extension. On the Print dialog box. style. picture. Note Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. 2.

Printing Drawings: An Overview Page Setup Command File > Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box. orientation. The Custom option is not available for existing drawings. Sheet Size . that is. Custom . If you select Custom as the sheet size. Click File > Page Setup to open this dialog box. Choose the template size from the list. page 102 • Page Setup Dialog Box Specifies information about the layout for the entire drawing. page 125 • Set Document Properties. The page orientation is displayed according to each option.Click this button to search for a watermark graphic. The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template. page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. page 116 • Set up a Page Layout. You can set the sheet size. Portrait . H (Height) . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 369 . page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. for example. you can change. Browse .Displays the page so that the short edge is the top of the page. If you select Custom as the sheet size. which allows you to specify information about the layout and size for the drawing or template. Related Topics Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. you must type custom W and H values. you must type custom W and H values.Click either the Portrait or Landscape option. Landscape .Defines the sheet size according to the recorded width (W) and height (H) values. a B-size drawing to a C-size.Displays the page so that the long edge is the top of the page.Specifies when a watermark appears by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. only for new templates. Show Watermark .Sets the size of the sheet. Orientation . Note • You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing. and watermark.Displays the height of the custom sheet size.

The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template. a B-size drawing to a C-size. of the sheet. The watermark also appears on any printed copies. Specify a watermark if you want a watermark to be displayed. page 15 370 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 119 • Printing Drawings: An Overview. page 361 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Specify when you want the watermark to be displayed by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. Watermark . While printing . 3. H. Related Topics • Page Setup Command. While working .Printing Drawings: An Overview Standard . 2. and height. Select either Portrait or Landscape.Displays the width of the custom sheet size. specify a standard sheet size. Click File > Page Setup. If you select Custom. page 369 • Set up a Page Layout. Tip You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing. select either Standard or Custom sheet size. you can change. On the Page Setup dialog box. and the Custom option is not available for an existing drawing. that is. specify the width. W (Width) .Allows you to choose a graphic that faintly appears in the background of the drawing. • 4. If you select Standard. Choose the template size from the list.Displays the watermark only when you are printing the drawing.Displays the watermark in the background while you are working within the drawing. W. for example. Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview.Defines the sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes. page 370 Set up a Page Layout 1.

and SmartPlant P&ID. In SmartPlant P&ID and Drawing Manager you can also use the Framework menu to publish drawings and retrieve data. see the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. The software maps a plant and all its projects to a single SmartPlant Foundation URL. and Drawing Manager. access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client in order to browse in TEF and subscribe to change notifications and compare documents. and operating a plant. constructing. Registering Tools with The Engineering Framework Before you can publish and retrieve documents from any of the other authoring tools.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview The Engineering Framework (TEF) standardizes and improves the communication among the various authoring tools you use in the course of designing. When you use the Register command in any of the authoring tools. such as Zyqad. retrieving PFDs. you are registering an authoring tool plant with a SmartPlant Foundation URL and plant that you specify. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 371 . The connection allows SmartPlant P&ID to display The Engineering Framework (TEF) commands. TEF acts as a repository for data and a medium through which information is shared among other tools. SmartPlant P&D interacts with TEF by correlating items between the plant database and the SmartPlant Foundation database. After the plant is registered. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. you must register each plant in SmartPlant P&ID with a SmartPlant Foundation database. you can publish and retrieve documents. For more information. Equipment Data sheets. and the like from TEF. this action takes place in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. SmartPlant P&ID. The Framework menu commands are not available unless your plant is registered with the Framework. A SmartPlant Engineering Manager administrator typically registers a plant with TEF. and only one. INtools. and creating a set of tasks in the To Do List that you can run to update the plant database. The system administrator must register each plant in the authoring tool with TEF once. For more information about TEF commands in SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. such as Zyqad or INtools. SmartPlant Foundation plant database and its projects. which points to one. Most of the commands that provide access to TEF functionality exist in the common user interface available on the Framework menu in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

page 386 372 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. page 378 • Retrieve a Document from TEF. page 381 • Find a Document to Publish.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client.

doc. the authoring tools share data and relationships when you publish documents containing the data and relationships. For many applications. The software publishes only meaningful engineering data to TEF.xml format. Publishes associated data into TEF. If the data is approved and loaded. the software does the following things: • Creates a new master document and the first revision in SmartPlant Foundation the first time that you publish a particular document. it is used for reporting and subsequent retrieval by downstream applications. The published data is not enough to recreate the document in the original authoring tool. line lists in P&ID). for instance) publish data to TEF in . For most documents. You can submit documents published without data to workflows just like documents with data.xml files to the SmartPlant Foundation database. The viewable file can also be an Excel workbook or another viewable file type. The document types and data that you can publish depend on the authoring tool that you use. depending on workflow approval. From that point on. assigning it to a workflow when necessary. such as . After the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation. Changes in the document status of a related revision change the status of the subsequently published versions and revisions of the document. called a RAD file. see the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client User's Guide. this is an Intergraph proprietary file. • • • For more information about revisions and versions. and specifying a version and revision of the document if specified in SmartPlant Foundation. The software the loads the data from the . The publishing process involves selecting a document to publish. The software publishes some document types without the associated data. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 373 . The authoring tools (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools. you can retrieve the data from TEF into other authoring tools. the software creates new versions and revisions each time that you publish the document.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publishing to TEF: An Overview In The Engineering Framework (TEF). When you publish documents. which can be a different workflow from the original publish action. You can publish subsequent revisions into a workflow. The software relates revisions to the master document.pdf or . Publishes a visual representation of the document that you can view without the authoring tool. such as reports from authoring tools (for example. Users can review and edit the visual representation of the document using SmartPlant Markup. the software also publishes the data that is associated with the document when you publish.

To share data. allowing users to avoid creating data multiple times in multiple authoring tools To report on common data that originates in multiple tools To provide enterprise-wide accessibility to published documents To manage change.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Reasons to Publish You can publish documents and associated data into TEF for several reasons: • To exchange and enhance data among tools. limited Instrument Specification Sheet documents Instrument Process Data Sheet documents Instrument Loop Drawings I/O Assignment document Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) documents and data Line List documents P&ID generated report documents PFD documents and data Equipment Data Sheet documents and data Summary Sheet documents and data SmartPlant P&ID • • • Zyqad • • • 374 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . When you do not select a workflow for a document during publishing. the Framework Loader loads the document into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as it reaches the top of the Loader queue. Document Types for Publishing Each authoring tool publishes different documents and data. The following list contains each authoring tool that is part of the Framework. the document types that each tool publishes. including workflow history and document revision management • • • You can also publish documents to share information with users in other tools without going through a formal workflow. and information about whether data is also published with each document type. You can also publish a document by not assigning the document to a workflow but by using the default workflow from SmartPlant Foundation. INtools • • • • • Instrument Index documents and data. you can publish a document to a For sharing workflow that has only a load step so that the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as you publish the document.

such as Microsoft Word or Excel files. The PBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work properly. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 375 . or SmartSketch® files.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview SmartPlant 3D • Orthographic Drawings Work Breakdown Structures (WBS) Plant Breakdown Structures (PBS) SmartPlant Foundation • • All Authoring Tools The PBS document contains information about the physical project with the following structure: plant/area/unit. Related Topics Publishing to TEF: An Overview. The WBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work correctly. in order to publish them. the authoring tools are notified of projects and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tools. areas. These documents are always published without data. The WBS document contains information about the project and its status in a plant/project/contract structure. and allows you to send the information of the documents that you have selected to The Engineering Framework (TEF). When a WBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation. The primary reasons to publish documents without data are that the SmartPlant Foundation Change Management functionality can manage document changes and reviews using workflows and that you can view the documents electronically. page 380 Publish Command Framework > Publish Opens the Publish dialog box. and units that need to be created in each authoring tool. Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. the authoring tools are notified about the plant. page 381 • Find a Document to Publish. Publishing Files without Data You can also browse to other file types on the file system. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. When a PBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation.

and title of the document.Opens a tool-specific dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. description. which allows you to search for documents to add to the Selected documents list. page 378 • Publish Command. in the background). this list provides the name. the documents begin to be published as soon as you click OK. Rows that are gray are provided for viewing purposes only and cannot be selected. the application which last published the document. Engineering Tool . and the date that the document was last published. the revision schedule. which allows you to search for files that are of a specific type and that have been updated since they were last published to TEF. page 375 376 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box.If applicable. You can populate this list by clicking the buttons in the Add area of this dialog box. and you can specify information about the file. Find . opens the Contract dialog box. such as whether it is a new file or was previously published. This command is available only if it is defined by your project implementation team.Displays a list of the documents selected for publishing. the revision and version numbers.Indicates that the system publishes the selected documents in batch mode (that is. you open the Document Properties dialog box. File System . Contract . Selected documents . type. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. the category. and subtype of the document. and the name.Opens the Advanced Publish Options dialog box. Note • You may select rows that are in white on this dialog box.Removes the selected file or files from the Selected documents list. the type of the document. When you select a file in this dialog box. Batch publish . Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish.Opens the standard Microsoft Select File dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. Advanced . For each document.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publish Dialog Box Displays a list of documents to publish to The Engineering Framework (TEF). Remove . You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete. If this options is not selected. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Publish on the main menu bar.

Document type . This dialog box opens when you click File System on the Publish dialog box. Document type .Allows you to select a category to assign to the document.Indicates that the file has already been published to TEF at lease once before. New document . Document category .Allows you to enter the name of the file as it is known in TEF. Document subtype . Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish.Displays the name of the file that you selected on the Select File dialog box.Lists the subtype of the document. The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document type box. select one.Indicates that this document has not been published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) before.Allows you to enter the official title of the document. This description appears later to help you recognize the file.Indicates the types of documents the software considers when selecting the documents to publish. This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Publish dialog box. The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document category box. If applicable. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 377 . Selected file .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Advanced Publish Options Dialog Box Allows you to specify the type of files that you want to search for when you look for documents to publish. Published previously . page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. Descriptions . Title .Allows you to select the type of the document. page 375 Document Properties Dialog Box Provides details about a new or existing document selected for publishing. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF.Allows you to enter a brief description of the file. Note • An asterisk * next to a box indicates that the information is mandatory. Name . page 378 • Publish Command.

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. 2. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. the publishing process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. For more information. This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Click Framework > Publish. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. Add any additional documents to the Selected documents list on the Publish dialog box by using the buttons in the Add area. Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. For more information. page 378 • Publish Command. see Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. Otherwise. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Tips • This feature is also available through the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 375 Publish a Document to TEF 1. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. page 381. • Note • You can select the Batch publish option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. When you use this feature. page 371 378 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • The documents listed on the Publish dialog box when it first opens are documents that you selected in the authoring tool before you clicked the Publish command. in the background).

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Find Documents to Publish Command Framework > Find Documents to Publish Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. The information that appears in the lists on this dialog box were found on this date and time. Update . This list is specific to the authoring tool from which you used the command. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Performs a new search for documents to publish. Last search performed . which helps you select the documents that you want to write to The Engineering Framework (TEF) and specifies those documents that have been published before. Document types searched . page 378 • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. Select documents to publish .Selects all the files in the Select documents to publish list. For each file.Displays a list of files that were either updated since they were last published to TEF or files that have not yet been published.Displays a list of all the files that were previously published to TEF but were subsequently removed from the project. for instance). this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that the document was last published. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 379 . If the file has not been published to TEF. Select documents to terminate . For each file. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. page 371 Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box Allows you to search for documents that have been updated since they were last published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) or that were previously published but no longer exist in your authoring tool (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools. Select All . the Last Published box for the document displays the value New. this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that it was last published. and need to be re-published. have never been published.Displays the date when the files were last searched.Indicates what types of files were considered when the last search was conducted. The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Find Documents to Publish on the main menu bar.

• • 380 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Cancels the selection of all the files in the Select documents to publish list. indicate the documents that you want to publish to TEF by clicking the corresponding check box. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Tips • This feature is also available by clicking the Find button on the Publish dialog box. When the results of this search are available. Click Framework > Find Documents to Publish. For more information about publishing documents. From the Select documents to terminate list. see Publish a Document to TEF. • TEF communicates with the authoring tool to determine the documents that need to be published or re-published to TEF. The selected documents now appear in the Documents to Publish list on the Publish dialog box. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. the documents appear in lists in the Find Documents to Publish dialog box.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Clear All . • Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. • Tips • Documents in this list are in TEF but are no longer present in the authoring tool. but is still available in TEF. For more information. 2. page 378. indicate the documents that you want to remove from TEF. This step is necessary only if a document was deleted from the authoring tool. page 375 Find a Document to Publish 1. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. page 378 • Publish Command. From the Select documents to publish list on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. 3. and you can publish them to TEF.

Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 371 Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client Click Framework > Browser. Tip • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). subscribing to document changes. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 381 . You can update the lists by clicking Update. comparing documents. For more information. and subscribing to documents in order to receive notification of changes to the documents. Note • From the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. but this process can be time consuming. and so forth. page 371 Browser Command Framework > Browser Opens a web-based user interface that allows you to interact with SmartPlant Foundation if the active plant is registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). you can perform a number of tasks. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical. such as browsing for documents that have been published to TEF. you can perform a number of tasks. such as publishing or retrieving documents. depending on the mode you are running the applications in: synchronous or asynchronous. but the Web Client provides unique access to other features such as the Web Client To Do List and search capabilities. From this interface. Many of these tasks can be performed from the authoring tools. comparing TEF documents with the data in your authoring tool. page 381 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. using the SmartPlant Foundation To Do List to complete tasks. Related Topics • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • The lists displayed on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box are compiled at the time indicated in the Last search performed box.

• 382 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . without first selecting documents. However. and then you can select the document or documents that you want to retrieve from your Web Client To Do List or the tree view. if another more recently published document contains updates to objects in the document that you selected. You can use either the Framework > Retrieve command to open a wizard that assists you in retrieving applicable documents.Retrieves only the data the authoring tool originally published with the selected revision and version of the document. you can retrieve engineering information from a published SmartPlant P&ID. Retrieval States • As published .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieving from TEF: An Overview You can retrieve documents from The Engineering Framework (TEF) into an authoring tool for subsequent work. you can use the Framework > Retrieve command in the Web Client to start the retrieval process. you can access the Web Client through the Framework > Browser command.Retrieves the latest data associated with the selected document in the SmartPlant Foundation database. or you can find the document that you want to retrieve using the Web Client search capability. The Web Client presents a list of documents that you can choose to retrieve. With the latest data . The authoring tools provide commands that let you select a document and retrieve it into that tool. when you use the command from an authoring tool. the software searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents to retrieve. such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical. The Framework > Retrieve command in an authoring tool is slightly different from the Retrieve command available in the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. That is. or with some authoring tools. the software retrieves the most current data in the SmartPlant Foundation database for those common objects. from INtools. After you select the documents that you want to retrieve. you can configure an automatic retrieval feature. Additionally. For example. and these are presented in a list in the Retrieve dialog box.

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieval Document Types The types of documents that you can retrieve depend on the authoring tool that you are using. areas. The WBS contains information about the concepts of the project in a plant-project-contract hierarchy. created in SmartPlant Foundation and published to TEF. projects. are retrieved by authoring tools in order to provide information about the plants. The PBS and WBS. When an authoring tool retrieves it. and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tool so that the information is consistent across all associated applications. units. Notes • Retrieving the WBS and PBS into SmartPlant Engineering Manager (SPEM) creates items in the SPEM To Do List. The PBS contains information about the physical project with the following plant hierarchy: plant-area-unit. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 383 . you can retrieve Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS) and Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) documents. Create the appropriate structures by running these tasks. the WBS communicates project status. The following lists include the documents that each authoring tool can retrieve: SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Instrument Index documents Instrument I/O Assignment documents P&IDs PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Summary Sheet documents and data P&IDs P&IDs Instrument Index documents P&IDs Zyqad • • • • INtools • • SmartPlant 3D • All Authoring Tools From most authoring tools.

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview • When using SmartPlant 3D. You are not required to accept or reject changes in Zyqad. you do not have to define it. which pulls the data and correlates items. deleting. tasks to update the pump automatically appear in the To Do List. such as a stream in Zyqad that results in multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. When you change common properties for the pump and retrieve the changes into SmartPlant P&ID. page 386 384 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Zyqad. the authoring tool analyzes the impact of the newly retrieved data on the existing database. you can view the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) by using the View > P&ID command. The same process works for logical items that are a design basis for other items. and then it places tasks that instruct you to create. or modify items at the appropriate time in the design process on the To Do List. page 391 • Retrieve a Document from TEF. Design Basis Objects that tools retrieve from other authoring tools can become the design basis for objects downstream in the design process. The To Do List gives you the opportunity to view and understand potential changes before accepting. These documents cannot be retrieved into that application. you must create the PBS and WBS structures manually. In SmartPlant P&ID and INtools. The design basis is implied and based on retrieval. You must create at least one unit before you can retrieve any documents from TEF. or modifying those changes. Related Topics • Open the To Do List. When using INtools. a pump retrieved from a PFD becomes the design basis for a pump in the P&ID. delete. An object that becomes a design basis for another object can be a specific object that gets richer as it moves through the schematic or logical lifecycle of one application and evolves into a more detailed object downstream. In SmartPlant 3D. on the other hand automatically overwrites the existing database information when you retrieve data. you must create the plant-area-unit according to PBS information in SmartPlant Foundation before you retrieve either the PBS or the WBS. For example. • Data Handling After Retrieval The authoring tool that you use also determines how the software deals with changes in downstream data when you retrieve a document.

Document type . and the Revision option. You can select the documents that you want to retrieve and thereby bring in the information from the The Engineering Framework (TEF). For each document. the documents are retrieved as soon as you click OK.Indicates that the system retrieves the selected documents in batch mode. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 385 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 385 . By using the Revision option. the revision and version numbers. Clear All . the type of document. this list provides the name. Select All .Selects all the files in the Documents to retrieve list.Indicates the type of documents you can retrieve from TEF and changes the list view so that it displays only that document type. Show . Related Topics • Retrieve a Document from TEF. You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete. page 386 • Retrieve Command. for instance). the last retrieval date. the status of the document. If this option is not selected.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve Command Framework > Retrieve Opens the Retrieve dialog box. Batch retrieve . you can indicate whether you want to retrieve the document as it was published or with the latest data. page 371 Retrieve Dialog Box Allows you to specify options for retrieving information from The Engineering Framework (TEF). Related Topics Retrieve a Document from TEF. The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Retrieve on the main menu bar. and provides a list of the files that can be retrieved by the authoring tool (SmartPlant Electrical or SmartPlant P&ID.Allows you to indicate whether you want to view a list of all of the latest documents available or of only those documents that need to be retrieved from TEF.Displays a list of the documents to be retrieved from TEF.Cancels the selection of documents in the Documents to retrieve list. page 386 • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview. Documents to retrieve .

select the documents you want to retrieve by clicking the corresponding check box. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. • Notes • You can select the Batch retrieve option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. Tips • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). 2. Click Framework > Retrieve. For more information. in the background). Otherwise. TEF searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents that are ready to be retrieved into your tool. From the Documents to retrieve list. Related Topics • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve a Document from TEF 1. Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All. the retrieval process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. On the Retrieve dialog box. page 371 386 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 4. • 3. These documents can appear in the Documents to retrieve list. By using the Retrieve Option list for each document you are retrieving. When you use this feature. select the types of files that are displayed in the Documents to retrieve list by choosing either Only documents to be retrieved or All documents in the SmartPlant Foundation project or by using the Document type list. select whether you want to retrieve each document by using the As published option or the With the latest data option.

a piece of equipment defined in Zyqad usually maps to a single equipment item in SmartPlant P&ID. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 387 .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlating Items: An Overview In many cases. The Correlate Items command allows you to review and manage these relationships within the drawing environment. When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from The Engineering Framework (TEF). page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. a single stream item in Zyqad normally maps to multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. page 389 Correlate Command Framework > Correlate Opens the Correlate Items dialog box and allows you to review and edit the correlation between plant items and design basis items. the item is highlighted in the drawing. Items . a single item in the external application is associated with multiple items within the drawing software.Lists all the items associated with a single design basis item. For example. For some types of piping. page 389 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. and when selected. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. A single item can be selected from the list. a one-to-one relationship exists between an item in an external application and an item or items in the drawing software. For example. each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item from which it came. page 371 Correlate Items Dialog Box Allows you to review and edit the relationship between plant items and design basis items imported from external applications. Items in the active drawing are displayed in bold font style. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Correlate on the main menu bar. page 389 • Correlating Items: An Overview.

the drawing item is highlighted. This command is available only when one or more items already appear in the Items list.Deletes the selected item from the Items list and cancels its correlation with the design basis item. the new item inherits the properties of the item that it is correlated to rather than the design basis item. and it is added to the list. both are associated with the same design basis item. As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that has the same item type as the items in the list. Clicking this button clears the Items list. Add . the item is highlighted. page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. however. page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. If you click on an item that is already correlated to some other design basis item.Allows you to correlate an additional item to the same design basis item that the listed items are already correlated to. it is correlated with the same design basis item. When you click on a correlated item.Allows you to review a different drawing item. a confirmation message appears. When you click on a highlighted item. Right-clicking quits this command. page 389 • Correlate Command. Remove .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Select . it is added to the Items list as a primary item. If you correlate a new item with a previously correlated item. page 371 388 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

select either an item that was retrieved using The Engineering Framework (TEF) and placed in the drawing or a previously correlated item. page 371 Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items 1. the item is highlighted. Click Tools > Correlate Items. Related Topics • Correlating Items: An Overview. Click Remove. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 389 . On the Correlate Items dialog box. Tip As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated. you can highlight and select only items that were retrieved from TEF or native P&ID items that are already correlated. Tip • When the Correlate Items dialog box opens. Since items from TEF already have a correlation. Click Framework > Correlate Items. In the drawing. • 4.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item 1. 3. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. Note • When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from TEF. The above procedure is to correlate additional drawing items to the design basis item. On the Correlate Items dialog box. Select a item in the drawing that you want to correlate to the retrieved item. click Add. 2. select the item in the Items list whose correlation with the design basis you want to remove. each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item that it came from. a message appears to make sure that you want to change the existing correlation. 2. it is added to the Items list on the Correlate Items dialog box as a primary item. When you click on a correlated item. page 387 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 3.

Creates and displays a reminder. The available task types are • • • • Create . Some types of tasks have associated code and you can run them thereby causing the database or drawings to be modified. Initially. deleted. Error status occurs. Notes • When an Update task is created in the To Do List. you sort the list by the values in that column. The units of measure used for properties in Create tasks are converted to the plant defaults when the task is run. but certain information is provided for all types. the status is Open. the units of measure used in properties are automatically converted to the defaults for the plant. or delete them altogether. but the process is not completed successfully. By clicking the heading of columns on the To Do List. this feature aids in retrieving data from TEF by providing a list of all the things that must be added. You can decide when a manual task is complete and set the status accordingly.Creates a new item in the stockpile Update . You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right from the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction.Updates the selected properties of the specified item Delete . If you successfully run the task. for example. If you attempt to run a task. Additionally. From the To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Using the To Do List: An Overview The To Do List allows you to keep track of tasks required to keep P&IDs updated with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). or modified to bring the drawing into agreement with the newest information retrieved from TEF. you can perform tasks. • 390 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . A single To Do List is shared by all the users of a plant database. for instance. The information that is available is specific to the type of task that is selected: Create tasks and Update tasks. the status changes to Complete . you can view properties for each task in the To Do List. the status is changed to Error . defer them.Deletes the specified item from the plant Manual . Specifically. You can view the entire To Do List and see the tasks that have been completed and those that are pending. Each task in the To Do List has a status. if you attempt to run an Update task assigned to a drawing that is not currently open. You can also postpone running a task and change its status to Deferred .

page 402 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. defer.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 391 . you can run. page 401 • Update the To Do List Display. which lists tasks to be performed in SmartPlant P&ID. page 402 • Run a Task from the To Do List. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. and you can organize your tasks. From this dialog box. or delete tasks. page 371 Open the To Do List Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Note • This command is available regardless of whether a drawing is open or not. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 394 • Remove a Task from the To Do List. page 405 To Do List Command Framework > To Do List Opens the To Do List dialog box. page 396 • Defer a Task on the To Do List.

392 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Properties . Assign Drawing . this command activates it. This command is available only when a single task is selected. If multiple tasks are selected.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview To Do List Dialog Box Provides the ability to manage tasks that need to be run within a SmartPlant P&ID database to keep the plant current with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task. Run Task . in other words. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command. If multiple tasks are selected.Displays the Task Properties dialog box. the associated drawing is open and active. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned. and the status of the selected task is Open or Error.Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. Any drawings that are currently open.Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. and allows you to manually create a new task. New Manual Task . remain open. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria.Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task. You can assign or reassign a Create task. Zoom In .Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view. Open Drawing .Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. The commands associated with the To Do List are all on the To Do List toolbar. this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing. If multiple tasks are selected. You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings. This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active. If the drawing is not active. This command is not available for manually created tasks. This command is available when an executable task is selected. If multiple tasks are selected. the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF. This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active.

Report .Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List. This command toggles this feature on and off. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks.xls. the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated. Defer Task . Error . This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected.Displays a list of tasks that have been deleted from the To Do List in the Task list on a gray background. By clicking the heading of any of these columns. If you wish to completely delete tasks from the list of deleted tasks. you sort the list by the values in that column.Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred . View Deleted .Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. page 391 • To Do List Command. multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. This list provides information about each task. called To Do List.Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List. Delete Task . the name of the task. and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. a description of the task. the destination drawing. produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant. including. and so forth. Refresh . If there is a problem. Related Topics • Open the To Do List. the status of the task.Populates automatically when you retrieve a document from TEF. the status is updated to Completed . the status is updated to Error . You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. Doubleclicking a task opens the Task Properties dialog box for that task. This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. for example. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open. you can select them and click Delete Task again on the To Do List toolbar. page 391 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 393 . If the task runs successfully. or Deferred status. Task List . but the report template. You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right on the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • When a task runs. and so the information can change at any time.

page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. too. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing. 3. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned. page 371 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List 1. you can display drawing items from the To Do List. remain open.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Open Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Open Drawing Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. • Note • Once the drawing is open. Any drawings that are currently open. select a task that is assigned to a drawing. page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. this command activates it. 2. see View a Drawing Item from the To Do List. You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. On the To Do List. If multiple tasks are selected. For more information. If the drawing is not active. Click Framework > To Do List. Related Topics Open a Drawing from the To Do List. page 395. This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active. 394 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Open Drawing . For more information. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Tip You can assign tasks to drawings by using commands on the To Do List. This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active. page 371 • Zoom In Command Framework > To Do List > Zoom In Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view. You can assign or reassign a Create task. page 400. see Assign a Task to a Drawing.

Related Topics • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 395 .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview If multiple tasks are selected. page 396 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. 3. 2. On the To Do List dialog box. On the To Do List toolbar. Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. and only when the drawing that the item belongs to is already open. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. not for Create tasks. page 371 New Manual Task Command Framework > To Do List > New Manual Task Displays the Task Properties dialog box. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. click Zoom Tip • . page 371 View a Drawing Item from the To Do List 1. Click Framework > To Do List. page 394. • Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. For more information. and allows you to manually create a new task. The software opens a Drawing view with the drawing items that are associated with the task highlighted. Notes • The Zoom command is available only for Update and Delete tasks. page 395 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. select a task or tasks. page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 390 • View a Drawing Item from the To Do List. see Open a Drawing from the To Do List.

There are three basis types of tasks: Create. select the General tab. On the Task Properties dialog box. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 4. This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task. page 399 • Properties Command. description. Click Framework > To Do List. page 28 396 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 399 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. and status for the new task. Note • . This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box. On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. In the Notes area. You must select a task from the To Do List in order to open this dialog box. Enter a name. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Update. click New Manual Task 3. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 371 Properties Command Framework > To Do List > Properties Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task. Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List 1. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 5. 2. page 371 Task Properties Dialog Box Provides information about tasks that are defined in the task list of the To Do List dialog box. The tabs that appear on this dialog box are determined by the type of task that you selected from the To Do List. enter comments if you want to. This command is available only when a single task is selected. and Delete tasks.

which does not have an identifying icon in the Task list on the To Do List. and Error .Allows you to enter freeform text about the task.Indicates the level of completion of the task.Displays the name of the document from which this task originated (for example. a Zyqad equipment data sheet or an INtools instrument index).Displays the item tag of the drawing object from which this task originated. this box displays the name of the drawing to which the task is assigned. For Update and Delete tasks.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview General Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays properties that are common to all types of tasks. page 28 Details Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information that is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the source and destination of the information being imported as part of the task. such as the success of the procedure.Displays a longer description of the purpose of the task. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. You can also enter hyperlinks to other documents for more extensive information. this box displays the item tag of an existing item. For Create tasks. but you can use the Assign Drawing command on the To Do List dialog box to change this value. Engineering Tool . Information about the execution of the task. Status . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 397 . The following choices are available: Open. When a task is created. Description . this box displays the item tag of the item to be created. Deferred . is added to the end of any existing notes for a task. This information cannot be directly edited on this tab. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. the status is set to Open. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Name . page 399 • Properties Command.For drawing-specific tasks. Document . This information is read-only. This value is not a unique identifier for the task. Completed .Provides a descriptive string that helps you identify the purpose of the task. Item Tag . Drawing .Displays the name of the application that published the document from which this task originated. Notes .

Displays the user name that removed the task.Shows the name of each item property and its new value.Displays the type of item to be created.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Run By . modified.Displays the user name of the task creator. Run Date . Modified Date .Displays the date and time that the task was last run.Displays the user name that last ran.Displays the date and time that the task was removed. Item Properties . and so forth. Created By . modified. Catalog item . page 28 History Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information this is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the history of the task. This information includes the type of item created and the names and values of the properties of the new item. or deleted the task. 398 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Item Type . This information includes the user names and dates for the creation of an item. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 399 • Properties Command. Modified By .Displays the user name that last ran the task. page 399 • Properties Command.Displays the date and time that the task was created. modification of an item. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. Deleted By . Deleted Date . Created Date .Indicates the catalog item used to create the drawing item if the task is run.Displays the date and time that the task was last run. turn off the property by selecting it in the list. The information on this tab is read-only. or deleted. page 28 Create Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays information specific to tasks that create new items in the drawing. To prevent a value from being used if the Create task is run.

From the task list on the To Do List dialog box. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 399 . Click Framework > To Do List. you can edit the catalog item being created and turn off or on the values assigned to different properties for that item. On the Properties dialog box. click Properties Tip You can also open the Properties dialog box by double-clicking a task in the To Do List. Related Topics Assign a Task to a Drawing. page 371 Assign Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Assign Drawing Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. you can turn off or on the new values assigned to properties for the item. change the properties as necessary. select the task or tasks that you want to edit. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings. page 400 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. 4. For all types. page 399 • Properties Command. 3. On the toolbar.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. For Create tasks. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 28 Modify To Do List Task Properties 1. • . 2. This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. If multiple tasks are selected. you can edit the name and notes for the task. For Update tasks. Note • The properties available for each task depend on the type of task. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.

Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Assign Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to associate a task in the To Do List with a drawing assigned to the active plant structure. This command is available when an executable task is selected. page 400 • Assign Drawing Command. select the drawing that you want to assign these tasks to. and the status of the selected task is Open or Error. From the list on the To Do List dialog box. page 399 Assign a Task to a Drawing 1. the selected tasks are assigned to that drawing. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. If multiple tasks are selected. Related Topics • Assign a Task to a Drawing. Clear . This dialog box opens when you click Assign Drawing on the To Do List dialog box. 4. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. the associated drawing is open and active. you can assign Create or Manual tasks using this dialog box.Lists all the drawings associated with the active plant.Removes the association between the selected task and a drawing. select the task or tasks that you want to assign to a particular drawing. page 371 • Run Task Command Framework > To Do List > Run Task Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. 2. The Create tasks are not initially associated with a drawing. 400 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Assign Drawing . This command is not available for manually created tasks. On the Assign Drawing dialog box. the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF. Click Framework > To Do List. in other words. When you select a drawing and click OK. 3. Drawings . Select the drawing that you want to associate with the task or tasks you selected on the To Do List dialog box.

• Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 401 . page 371 • Run a Task from the To Do List 1. select the task or tasks that you want to run. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Defer a Task on the To Do List. 3.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview When a task runs. If there is a problem. Related Topics Run a Task from the To Do List. or Deferred status. the status is updated to Error . For more information. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open. Click Framework > To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Error . Click Run Task Notes • . page 401 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. see Open a Drawing from the To Do List. the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated. and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. the status is updated to Completed . page 371 Defer Task Command Framework > To Do List > Defer Task Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred . 2. page 394. that drawing must be open before you can run the task. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. If the task runs successfully. If a task is assigned to a drawing. On the To Do List dialog box.

select the task or tasks that you want to defer. On the toolbar. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. see Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List. Click Framework > To Do List. page 371 Delete Task Command Framework > To Do List > Delete Task Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 403. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. You can display deleted tasks in the To Do List. page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. On the toolbar. 3. select the task or tasks that you want to remove. Click Framework > To Do List. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Defer a Task on the To Do List 1. page 371 402 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. 3. On the To Do List dialog box. click Delete Task Note • . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. On the To Do List dialog box. page 371 Remove a Task from the To Do List 1. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks. 2. For more information. 2. click Defer Task . Related Topics • Remove a Task from the To Do List.

This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 404 • Using the To Do List: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List 1. On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 371 Report Command Framework > To Do List > Report Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 403 . but the report template. To return to the current task list. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. 2. Click Framework > To Do List. click View Deleted again.xls. produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced. Related Topics • Run a To Do List Report. called To Do List. click View Deleted Tip • .

page 348.xls. page 371 • Refresh Command Framework > To Do List > Refresh Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. • on the toolbar. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. and so the information can change at any time. you must choose a name and location for the current report on the Save As Output dialog box. Then the report opens in Excel. page 371 404 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For more information on running reports. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Run a To Do List Report 1. you can add a filter so that only tasks with particular properties are reported on. This To Do List report can be customized in the same ways that other reports can be customized (for instance. but the report is produced much the same way that other SmartPlant reports are produced. or you can sort the output in an appropriate order for your project). 3. Related Topics • Update the To Do List Display. 2. It is a tabular format report template. page 405 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. see Generate a Report. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. Click Report Tip This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. see Edit a Report Template. You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. For more information. Note • The report template for this report that is included with the software is called To Do List. If a To Do List report has been generated previously. page 334.

click Refresh . page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 405 . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Update the To Do List Display On the To Do List dialog box toolbar.

For more information. Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID . For more information. the default construction status is New. consistency checking and propagation. tanks. see Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID.In PDS 2D. Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation . When you place an item. page 412. construction status values. page 413. page 409. They include attributes and properties. you can set construction status before or after you place an item. see Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation. For more information. page 408. Future.PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view.Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. and using filters. design file differences. In SmartPlant P&ID. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values. relationships between placed items. see Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID. valves.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview The are many functions that can be compared between SmartPlant P&ID and the PDS product. With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. code lists and select lists. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control. see Using Filters Versus Levels. page 407 • Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation. graphics are called cells. Using Filters Versus Levels . These graphics include pumps. Related Topics • Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists. such as only the equipment or only the piping. In SmartPlant P&ID. In SmartPlant P&ID.In PDS. you set the construction status by clicking the New. page 408 • Setting Construction Status. Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID . before you place an equipment group. piping. see Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists. see Setting Construction Status. you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment.With PDS™ 2D. Setting Construction Status . For more information. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. they reside in a select list. page 407. page 410. and other items. Code Lists and Select Lists . an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed.In PDS 2D. For more information. and you can combine filters. page 410 • Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. page 409 406 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . filters show certain parts of the drawing. For more information. graphics are called catalog items.

they reside in a select list. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values. In SmartPlant P&ID. to modify select lists in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. You must have special permissions. an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed. some properties are likewise restricted to preset values. the accepted values for the attribute are defined in a code list. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 407 . see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help. That is. Some code lists and select lists contain special. you should use caution when modifying any entries already included with the product when it is delivered to you. such as PDS 3D and SmartPlant 3D. restricted values. These special values help SmartPlant P&ID communicate information to other applications. Select lists and their select entries are defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. Consequently. For more information on defining select lists and entries. frequently in the Short Value entry. Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists In PDS. Select entries are the individual members of a select list. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

Related Topics • Place Equipment.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID With PDS™ 2D. Moving components from one equipment group to another also requires that you manually regroup components so that they belong to the destination equipment. page 153 408 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment. This guideline also exists for placing equipment labels and equipment component labels. With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. before you place an equipment group.

select the item in the drawing and change the status in the Properties window. page 21 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 409 . the default construction status is New. All items that are subsequently placed in the drawing are assigned this status. If you have already placed an item.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Setting Construction Status In PDS 2D. When you place an item. you set the construction status by clicking the New. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control. • Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. you can set construction status before or after you place an item: • If you know the construction status before placing an item. In SmartPlant P&ID. click Tools > Options. and then set the status on the Placement tab. Future.

Consistency Check starts when you place or modify an item. However. Propagation determines that a drawing is not ambiguous. Available tools can help in the review of the report along with the drawing. Consistency checking is an important function in producing a useful design.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. The designer places equipment. In the SmartPlant P&ID environment. consistency checking confirms that the created drawing agrees. However. PDS 2D uses a process called propagation to verify the suitability of a design. For example. Propagation produces a report with propagation exceptions. according to settings in SmartPlant P&ID Rule Manager. routes lines between equipment. while SmartPlant P&ID uses consistency checking. pinpointing the source of the inconsistency could require time. Consistency Check continuously blends into the software product. when you discover an error. SmartPlant P&ID continuously checks for design errors as you create the drawing. In SmartPlant P&ID. with the design practices of the associated plant. After the designer completes this work. You must resolve them for an acceptable drawing. Double-click an inconsistency in a Drawing view. You can list the types of errors you want to detect. The software detects and reports the errors so you can correct them in the drawing. propagation checks for errors each time that the software populates the database. more so than the workflow associated with propagation. or is consistent. However. and the Consistency Check dialog box lists solutions to fix the errors. places components on lines. In PDS 2D. an inconsistency occurs if a designated material is connected to a different type of material. consistency checking occurs continuously as you place equipment. To check for errors in your design. PDS 2D uses propagation. and label items. the process populates the associated database if serious propagation errors do not exist. The designer places the elements that compose the overall configuration of the design in a graphical mode. SmartPlant P&ID uses predefined rules to establish relationships that verify the design. resolution can be time-consuming. instead of waiting to check for errors until after the drawing is complete. route lines. such as pipe and valve conflicts. and it automatically reports in the graphical view on junctions that do not follow these rules. and adds labels for accuracy. Also. tools or suggested error recoveries are not available. because you do not receive a list of possible solutions. Also. Errors occur when you violate the design practices for a plant. 410 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 411 . page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency.

" because they are updated as the property values of the item are updated. In SmartPlant P&ID. Most labels show item properties. which are stored in the database. SmartPlant P&ID supplies a pre-loaded set of symbols. graphics are called catalog items. and the software continuously writes this information to the database. page 184 412 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . tanks. at certain times. Then. you can record text on a label. For more information about creating symbols. In PDS 2D. In SmartPlant P&ID. These labels are referred to as "driven. you add or edit properties information for each item in the Properties window. see the SmartPlant Catalog Manager Help.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID In PDS 2D. piping. labels play a different role than in PDS 2D. valves. and other items. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. graphics are called cells. You can add and delete cells or place cells from a library into the design file. In SmartPlant P&ID. Plant administrators can create more symbols if needed. PDS 2D cells are grouped together in libraries. These graphics include pumps. you propagate or write the information on the labels to the database. which you can use to directly edit properties in the database by editing the properties of the label. SmartPlant P&ID also provides "driving" labels.

You can customize these levels. SmartPlant P&ID offers extensive flexibility in creating and editing filters. In SmartPlant P&ID. For more information about creating and editing filters. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 413 . and personal filters are stored in My Folders. you can combine a filter that displays 6-inch pipe with a filter that displays tanks more than 5 feet in diameter. such as only the equipment or only the piping. while each individual user defines personal filters. filters show certain parts of the drawing. both 6-inch pipe and tanks over 5 feet in diameter are displayed. SmartPlant P&ID filters fall into the following categories: • • Project filters Personal filters Project filters are stored in Project Folders.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Using Filters Versus Levels PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view. You can use filters along with rules to check for errors in certain filtered views. The software automatically defines levels for the various parts of process systems. see SmartPlant Filter Manager Help. You can even edit the individual properties of the filters. and you can combine them to view collective data sets. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. and you can combine filters. For example. The plant administrator defines project filters. Then.

Most databases represent an attribute by a column in a table. angle bisector A line that divides an angle into two equal parts. numbers. and so forth. notes. text string.txt. a file name. A property or characteristic of a component. beginning with the node name. access Performing actions that are required to use the SmartPlant P&ID software. angle Circular measurement of the intersection of two lines in degrees. annotations Dimensions. append To add to the end of a file. for example.Glossary Glossary A absolute path name Sequence of directories. and some special character and punctuation marks. \\MyPC\C:\temp\MyFile. archive To copy a file to a specified storage location and then delete the file from the current location. active placement point Coordinates that define the point where you place piping and instrumentation. or reports that you place in a drawing to provide information or comments. 2. A characteristic that all members of a class possess. Each property has an associated value that defines its current state. angle key-in A number that you type to specify an active angle. alphanumeric Information in the form of letter. that locates a file. symbols. 414 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You measure angles in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. attribute 1.

A set of filters can define the potential membership in a category. catalog A collection of catalog items. Boolean operator Syntax that defines logical relationships between expressions like AND (both). SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 415 . centerline Graphic representation of the central axis of an item. B batch A group of jobs to process on a computer at one time with the same program without user intervention. character Data type that stores alphanumeric character data. category A grouping of items by description. y-. OR (either). A classification of items that share common values for specified properties. branch point A point on a pipe run that separates piping segments for assignments with different segment parameters. Bill of Materials A detailed list of the items that you assemble. C cache A secure place of storage. and NOT (other than). and z-axis. break label A graphic label placed at a point in a piping line at which any property can change value. bearing The acute horizontal angle of a line with respect to a reference line.Glossary axis An imaginary line that defines the orientation of a system or item. Most orientations use an x-. which are blueprints or templates for creating an item within the model.

commodity item Standard component that you can find in a manufacturer catalog. client/server database A database system in which the database engine and database applications reside on separate. a node that accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource. The workstation for the user is the client. the processing power is split between the two CPUs. concentric Having a common center or origin point with varying radii. or select list. collection An indexed group. All network operations among two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.Glossary check in Process of moving a file from a user location to a storage location and recording that location in the database. class Blueprint for creating an item. The class defines the properties and behaviors that an item can show. concatenate To connect in a series. 416 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . intelligent computers that communicate with each other through a network. A component has database information associated with it. usually a server. to link or append. commodity option A pre-defined exception to the default settings for a component definition in the Piping Job Specification. that contains similar items. configuration Relative arrangement of parts or items. In this system. and the database runs on the server. commodity code A code that you define that provides an index to material descriptions. component A catalog item that represents a part of the P&ID. client In network operations.

consisting of database entries and select lists. points are located by traversing the x-. you can use a spherical coordinate system to define points on a sphere. Also. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. connector Item with multiple vertices. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 417 . D data Facts or raw material that you add. context-sensitive help Display of help topics that are associated with a dialog box or command. labels. For example. coordinate Location of a point along the x-. the origin of coordinate systems is 0. lines. a location for applying a relationship connectivity Linkage between items that relates because of their graphics. or z-axis. behavior of a connector relies on the two items that it connects. Other coordinate systems more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entries.0. Typical items in a data model are components. data dictionary The underlying data model of a plant. and z-axes. or delete.Glossary connect point Active point item that is specially designated in a component. coordinates Ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. Normally. SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager maintains this information.0. Proper connectivity must exist to confirm valid data integrity. like a valve and a pipe run. y-. data model Application items that populate a project. y-. change. A connect point is a location at which you can connect lines. and labels. For example. or use a cylindrical coordinate system to define points on a cylinder. coordinate system Geometric relation that denotes the location of points in the design cube. you can press F1 to learn about a dialog box. cursor See pointer. and other components to one another.

design-wide break A region of the drawing within which a single property value is defined for all the included components. a closed shape exists. database table Part of the database consisting of rows and columns and containing information about the project and design elements. design session Elapsed time from when you open a design file until you close the design file. a specific program can communicate. diameter A straight line passing through the origin of an arc or circle. 418 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . default Predetermined value of a parameter that the system or a program automatically supplies whenever the user does not specify a value. or process these files. device Non-addressable component of a network. design file File containing graphics and text data. creates new databases. digits of accuracy Number of digits used after a decimal point to display the discharge dimensions. Indicating the region. database administrator The technical support person who assigns user IDs and data access permissions.Glossary database Collection of files of comprehensive information that have predefined structure and organization. or floppy disk. examples of devices are a tape drive. removes databases no longer in use. design database Database that contains the non-graphical data for the equipment and piping models. and monitors disk storage usage of the database and performance. also called a drawing file. along with an accompanying label that shows the property value. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. ending at the points of intersection with that arc or circle. disk drive. interpret. delimiter A separating mark or space.

difference in longitude. edge-edge model Model that represents connectivity entire by edges. E easting Term used in plane surveying that describes an east. dithering Technique for achieving greater color resolution at the expense of spatial resolution. diversity Amount of deviation in airflow that a system encounters from the design conditions. scaled view produced from the model graphics. drawing file File in which you place items. also called a design file. drawing view Specific. drawing. text. drag To use the software functionality that attaches the pointer to an item so you can see the item move in dynamics. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 419 . P&ID Graphics file that contains data about one unit.Glossary directional Referring to items that depend on their orientations to directional flow for correct placement in a drawing. display-only annotation Feature that allows you to generate temporary annotation graphics for review without placing the graphics in a design file. More colors are produced with loss of some detail. directory File or folder that stores the names of other files. directional items use the direction of the line in which you located them. driving label Graphics. You can consider a drawing view like a window into a specified volume in the model. or both with their own entities and properties that you place on the P&ID to define values for properties of the components and groups to which they apply. or positive. Each drawing has a unique drawing number within the unit to which the drawing belongs.

file Collection of logical records stored as a unit. and assignment to unit. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component. event A status milestone that tracks the history of an item. Examples of events are creation. name change. exit elevation Lowest downstream elevation point on the internal diameter of a pipe. As you place equipment components. the components move along with the equipment. file name Name that a user defines for an interactively created file. 420 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . such as a tray or nozzle. the name should relate to the contents of the file. As a group.Glossary endpoint Data point that defines the end of a linear element. equipment group A single-name equipment body and any items within or attached to the body. exclusive database relationship Relationship that exists between any given instrument and the loop to which it belongs . F fences Temporary method of locating and grouping items that you need to change. For easier identification. enumerated list See select list.that is. an instrument can belong only to one loop at a time. field Interface component of a dialog box that displays information to you or allows you to type data to record. equipment components Items associated with pieces of equipment. such as nozzles and trays. file specification Path name that instructs the software for the location of a file.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 421 .Glossary filter Function that creates a subset of items. For SmartPlant P&ID. full path name Name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. from the start of the piped system. Icons attached to the pointer that provide feedback as you draw. including the filename. ISO. flow rate Quantity of fluid that flows per unit of time. to reach a downstream point. flow time Required time for the flow. See also relative path name. Icons that show the perpendicular or parallel relationships with other items in the drawing as you point over items in the drawing. group Set of components with physical boundaries and a single name . font Complete set and style of the characters and symbols of a typeface used for displaying text that you place in a drawing file.from which the software deduces the specific geometry of a commodity item. grid Network of uniformly spaced horizontal and perpendicular lines that help to identify either 2-D or 3-D relationships. geometric industry standard A select-list property that identifies the source of the data . G gap Condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the P&ID but not physically in the plant. This subset meets criteria that property values define. or company standard . glyphs identify the relationships that you are creating. glyphs 1. or DIN. fixed point A control point that usually is a locally known monument with known coordinates.that is. a group number.industry standard such as ANSI. 2.

header First items of information in a file that precede any actual data. a symbol that graphically identifies a command or task. hierarchy A classified structure with superiors. hierarchical An ordered relationship from greatest to least. or operating in a plane parallel to the horizon or to a base line. and subordinates. components. horizontal scale A scaling factor that exaggerates the horizontal scale as you draw graphics. I icon A pictorial representation or image. or dependents. these components are not represented graphically. 422 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . refers to the relationships among groups. horizontal Parallel to. horizontal angle Angle measured in the horizontal plane. for grouping files or commands. This property provides a method to represent a 3-D model when working in a 2-D drawing. in the plane of. Horizontal angles are the basic measurements needed to determine bearings and azimuths. and labels. implied piping component Piping components that the software creates in the alphanumeric database. horizontal distance Distance between two points computed using only the northing and easting coordinates of the points. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. height property Distance between the base offset and the top of the item.Glossary H handles Graphical indications that appear when you perform a valid change to an item. or roots.

inline Term used to refer to those piping or instrument components that you can insert in a piping segment. Instruments can be devices such as final control elements. In SmartPlant P&ID. interference checking Process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between items in a drawing. and other instrument components. such as butterfly valves and temperature regulator valves. Inline instruments include instrument valves. or electrical switches. instrument loops A group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can pass from one function to the next for the purpose of measuring and controlling a process variable. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 423 .Glossary import Process that transports or transfers data from one environment to another. instance A single allocation of an item class. you can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. a view in which the horizontal lines of an item are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. isometric Relating to or concerning a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. such as orifice plates and flow controllers. inline instruments Components that you can insert into a piping segment. input The data submitted to a computer for processing. import script File that the software uses to import or transfer data. computing devices. integer A whole number with no fractional part. instruments Devices that directly or indirectly measure or control a variable in a plant process. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. such as flow or temperature.

424 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and safety classes. and properties. however. L label A graphic representation that reflects the status or condition of an associated item. components. PDS 2D Intelligent graphics and text that identify a group or component. to which you can snap in the drawing . and components that all share the same attribution. connect to the item. gaps. such as equipment. line style Collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group to apply as a style of a line. A line route contains line runs.that is. such as a file in a catalog. line string A series of connected line segments. item type Distinct objects that users can manipulate in SmartPlant P&ID. a single member in the P&ID.Glossary item Unit of storage within a larger unit. label. K key Property or column in a table that is the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. layer A logical grouping of items on a drawing sheet. keypoint Point on an item. a line route does not contain any branches. J justification Point of orientation for text placement. including vertices. You can have several layers in a drawing sheet. events. Each label is an entity with properties and provides the primary means of defining property values in the P&ID task. gaps. line route Collection of ordered line runs.

northing Term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. collection of all items and their relationships to create a coherent description of a process plant. The term has a dual meaning: network can refer to the devices that connect the system. the software performs the actions or runs the commands. and so forth. Point to the manipulation handle on upper corner of an item to display the mirror handle. a line. M MTO Material take-off.Glossary line width Thickness of a displayed item. linear Having a single dimension. mirror handle Reflects an image about the horizontal and vertical axes. model A representation of graphics or a schema. Visual Basic. Nominal Piping Diameter (NPD) The approximate diameter of a pipe. macro A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 425 . or network can refer to the connected system. also called a Bill of Materials. makeup air Air brought into a space from the outside to replace exhausted air. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are VBA. When you run the macro. mirror To create the reverse image of a display set through a plane or around a defined axis. Visual C++ Delphi. nozzle A special equipment item that contains the connection point to piping. N network Interconnection of host computers and workstations that allows them to share data and control.

orientation fixed A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation in which you created them. See also orientation by user. offline instruments Components that you do not insert into a piping segment. y-. orientation by system A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation that you created them. such as digital control stations (DCS) or computers. See also orientation by system. Typically. and system functions. and orientation fixed. origin In coordinate geometry.Glossary O occurrence A row within a relational database table. orientation by user A type of orientation in which you define the orientation of an item when you place it. if you place the items in free space or in a horizontal line. You can change the default orientation at placement time. 426 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the point where the x-. orientation Position of items in the design plane relative to the origin. and z-axes intersect. Examples are equal to and greater than. For example. offline Term that refers to those instrument components that are not inserted in a pipe run. Offline instruments include temperature regulators. operator The part of the Structured Query Language (SQL) syntax that defines relationships between data. You cannot change the orientation at placement time. Oracle A relational database management system. level gauges. these components are the instruments that monitor and control inline instruments. the software automatically rotates the item 90 degrees counterclockwise from the orientation in which you created it. if you placed the item in a vertical line. The default orientation of this item is identical to items that the software orients. See also orientation by system and orientation fixed. See also orientation by system and orientation by user. orientation by user. regardless of the method or location that you used for placement.

the collection of pipe runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical. The drawing relates critical processrelated information. Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) Primary drawing for maintaining a plant. piping. and identifies physical components in the plant. peak flow Maximum flow rate of water through a specific size pipe. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 427 . P PFD Process Flow Diagram. such as process conditions for temperatures and pressures. A pipe run has a beginning and an end. Also.Glossary orthogonal view A view that is a projection of the drawing onto a plane along lines that are orthogonal to the plane. The P&ID includes three primary groups of items: equipment. parametric item Item that contains geometry constrained together using relationships. pipe run A line run that has piping properties. It does not branch or contain spaces between components. The P&ID is the basis for both the construction of the physical plant and further specification of instrumentation components. A pipe run segment may have identical properties as a pipe run from which it branches but is not considered part of the pipe run. branch points and gap components. Also. path name Sequence of directories leading to a file. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. a contiguous set of pipe run segments separated only by inline components. See also absolute path name and relative path name. pipeline Set of connected piping segments and their associated piping items. and instrumentation. parameter A property with a value that determines the characteristics or behavior of an item. P&ID See Piping and Instrumentation Diagram. with driving dimensions that are defined as adjustable parameters.

PFD Process Flow Diagram. primitive commands The most basic graphic command such as placing a line or placing a circle. process line Ordered collection of connectors and inline components with an equal set of core properties . a pipe cap. In drawings.Glossary piping components Graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment.for example.for example. such as a line or circle. and safety components. 428 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . piping components are connected with multiple line segments. utility connector. position angle Defines the angle between the horizontal axis. piping segment A line string with two or more vertices that defines the centerline geometry of the pipe run and contains the non-graphic data associated with the pipe run. Piping components include valves. reducers. Piping Materials Class (PMC) Classification of components by service or specification .typically. or one-point piping component . pointer On-screen tool that allows you to indicate an item or area. items with the same line number. A network terminates at a nozzle. and the rotate handle. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. a 150-pound carbon steel specification. as drawn through the anchor point. off-page connector. piping network Series of connected pipe runs and inline components. a representation of the piping that transfers process fluid. One company can have several plants located at different geographical locations. Specifically. flanges. plant A group of facilities and equipment that performs one or more material processing functions within a given geographical area. primitive items An item. strainers. that you place by a primitive command.

Glossary process point A tool that defines the operating conditions at a particular place during a process. The properties of an item can include display properties and properties stored with the item. commodity libraries. probably in separate geographical locations and having limited communication among them. project 1. or document. Several projects can be under design at one time. You can establish relationships as you place new items or between items already on the drawing sheet. and flow rate. and other information of a similar theme. lines extending from the boundaries of an item and between which dimensioning data for the area marked by the projection lines is placed. Term used for convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. cost. Properties stored with the valve symbol are displayed in the Properties window when the valve symbol is selected. reference file A drawing file attached to another drawing file for reviewing reference. and width. A project is not necessarily specific to an application. graphics symbology. Other properties stored with the valve symbol can include the manufacturer. the properties of a valve symbol can include display properties such as color. density. a graphic representation attached to a drawing view. property A unique characteristic of an object. reference data A collection of information containing facts relative to industry design codes. item. This connection indicates that some form of communication of behavior or state occurs. label descriptions. line style. relationship A condition that exists between items. catalog data of vendors. For example. or material. report formats. Examples include defining temperature. projection lines Witness lines. A directory file created in an application environment that contains design files and subprojects. job specifications. R RAD 2D Draft Platform 2D graphic platform developed from the product core functionality of SmartSketch. 2. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 429 . symbol. the project may contain design files from multiple applications.

and to the orientation of any graphic item to which they are attached at placement time. You can select a user-level or a project-level template to create a new report template. Point to the manipulation handle on either side of an item to display the rotate handle. 430 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Glossary relative mode A placement mode in which symbols respond to their orientation definition at creation time. Relative placement mode is more flexible then absolute. report template An online outline for a new report that you need to define. revision triangle A numbered triangle placed in the P&ID to indicate the drawing revision when the change occurred. it appears in the stockpile for later placement. row A unit of related information in a table. A rule defines a valid context for two items to communicate their behavior or state. but much more difficult to predict. See also absolute path name and path name. revision cloud A set or arcs used to enclose changes that have occurred since the last revision. whether they are defined in the P&ID reference data as orientation fixed. orientation by system or orientation by user. one collection of column values for a table. relative path name Sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. rotation angle Defines the angle of change between the old and new positions of a rotated element. rotate handle Turns a selected item around its anchor point. rule Standard mechanism for creating relationships. If you delete a required item from a drawing. rubberbanding Animation dynamic that allows you to specify the position of a data point while the item changes as you move the pointer. An item is required if the Tag Required Flag property is set to True for the item in the Properties window of Catalog Manager. required item Item that the plant model needs.

All network operations between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. schema Description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. and piping. branches. search criteria Set of values used to scan a database or object library. schematic file Schematic drawing or diagram of a particular item in the plant. the node that maintains common data or performs a common task that clients need. signal lines 1. signal run A line run with signal properties. Specifically. off-pace and utility connectors. select set A group of more than one drawing item. 2. segment Contiguous piping and piping components between two points in the network at which properties change value. Intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. Segments terminate by property break labels. Point to the manipulation handle on any corner of the item to display the scale handle. nozzles. and by the terminal ends of piping lines. 3. See also pipe run.Glossary S scale To enlarge or reduce the size of a defined item. server In network operations. Scale Handle Changes the size of a selected drawing item. modifying only the dimensions but not the ratio among the pieces. a representation of the wiring used for transferring electrical or software signals. An ordered collection of connectors. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 431 . inline instruments. and inline components with an equal set of core properties: typically. items that share the same line number. A collection of signal runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical.

style 1. symbol name Descriptive phrase that names a symbol that resides in a folder.Glossary slider Interface component of a dialog box that displays values along a range. stockpile View of the data model. displaying items that you have not yet placed in the graphic model. and width. The style types include: fill. A value of 0 degrees allows free rotation. When you apply a style to a selected item. step angle Specifies the increment of rotation for a selected item. surface of revolution Surface formed by the revolution of a curve about an axis in its plane. modifying. Standard Query Language (SQL) Language developed by IBM for creating. color and line weight of an element. 2. The appearance of geometry and annotations on the drawing sheet. Usually. See also neutral file. In Options Manager. relative to the anchor point of the item. The default Step Angle is 0 degrees. graphic Permanent association of items that you can store and place as a group but cannot manipulate as individual items. symbol. and text. source file Uncompiled version of a parametric definition or other data table. and querying relational databases. symbology provides graphical clarity to a drawing by differentiating among various items by their appearance. the software applies all the formats or properties in the style to the element. line. For example. and so forth. Symbology refers to the color. text libraries contain source files. line weight. A collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group. pattern. style. symbology 1. dimension. Display style of an item. including color. specific energy Depth of flow plus velocity head. 2. the font used in a text box. 432 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and style associated with items in a particular filter.

The identifying number of the unit is unique within the project and within the plant. In SmartPlant Engineering Manager. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. used as a starting point or blueprint for a particular application so that the format does not have to be recreated each time it is used. use the concept of unit.Glossary T table Collection of data for quick reference. user name Name that provides access to an account on the system. task Grouping of related design activities. transaction Nongraphic record of any additions. a template serves as an outline or blueprint for you to create a new drawing. and changes that you request during job posting activities. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 433 . time stamping Process that prompts the software to generate a record when you change an property. V validation program User program that verifies data integrity in the database. In SmartPlant P&ID. data dictionaries or other database schemas. Same as username. tabular data Non-graphic. utility Program that provides a commonly used service. a file used to create a drawing with a set of default parameters. Most companies. U unit Group of parts of the schematic and individual worlds of a plant that together perform a given process function. either you can enter this data or the software determines the value. deletions. values Data stored in a property. but not all. alphanumeric information. template A document or file having a preset format. a file used to create roles.

A work session is not limited to worth in the drawing file. 434 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can manipulate vectors geometrically. work area Individual parts of a single process function that. window A control in the software that is the physical outline that contains a view. A coordinate triple (x. witness lines Dimensioning items that extend from the dimension points to the dimension line. the foresight point. vertical angle Angle above or below a horizontal plane through the line of sight. also called Z scale or Z factor. and the measured angle. W width Line thickness of a displayed item. vertical scale Scaling factor that exaggerates the vertical scale of graphics when you draw. vertical Located at a right angle to the plane of a supporting surface. The visual contents of a window displaying an aspect of the application model. workflow Method of selecting processes and performing tasks. when considered as a whole. generally represented as a line. z) represents a vector. The format that you type for vertical angles is the occupied point.Glossary variable Quantity that can assume any one of a set of values. view Defined area of vision on a screen or window. vector A quantity that has both magnitude and direction. work session All operations performed in the period between opening and closing a database partition of the task. constitute a unit. y.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 435 . For example. working units can be defined in terms of feet and inches.Glossary working units Real-world units that you can group into the design plane.

133. 178. 132. 80 stockpile items. 138. 395. 399. 131. 322 approved warnings. 169. 284. 67. 269 lines.Index Index AABBCC codes assigning. 122 sizes. 270 automation item tag formats. 94. 267. 94. 96 pipe runs. 237 instruments. 121. 172. 210 placing. 329 tasks. 28. 321. 319 approving warnings. 297 multi-sided. 122 linking. 88 attaching commands. 400 associating plant groups. 211 applying rules. 280 lines. 161 piping specifications. 280 objects. 61 AutoFilter customizing. 95 items. 113 AutoCAD exporting. 173 reports. 182. 172. 175. 30 embedding. 316. 60 tabular views. 171. 119 bounding box 436 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 76 actuators aligning. 95 filter tabs. 111 Web Client. 242 adding buttons. 247. 18 borders displaying. 169 access control. 66. 141 placing. 261 piping specifications. 184 aligning labels. 269 using. 212 arranging windows. 162 alternate symbology. 173 tasks to drawings. 313. 161 menus. 286 explained. 396 toolbars. 267. 80 catalog items. 323. 381 activating symbol toolbars. 131 filters. 158 Alter Segment routing lines. 262. 238 annotations labels. 27 affixing labels. 277 shortcut buttons. 60 autogapping activate. 80 author documents. 287 saving. 260. 329 assemblies creating. 317 area breaks claiming. 159 altering segment. 126 OLE objects. 343 shortcut buttons. 281 Save As. 189 alter segment. 261 item tags. 64 options. 12 recent drawings. 125 autofilter Engineering Data Editor. 179 insulation specifications. 102. 175 items. 36 Aspen Zyqad importing. 212 rectangular. 171. 208 axes mirror. 105 accessing Help. 241. 140 anchor point rotating. 260. 285 assigning insulation specifications. 70 commands. 242 backgrounds customizing. 169. 265.

69 buttons. 14 Navigation menu. 73 cloning items. 84. 187. 191 breaking lines. 83 sources. 90 brief properties pasting. 82 opening. 28. 157 linked objects. 124 change details. 88 bulk properties copying. 278 mirror items. 258 relationship properties. 256 branching lines. 141 placing items. 80 Catalog Explorer. 283 pipe runs. 94 calendar using. 157 properties. 248 lines. 198 OPCs. 277 labels. 188. 90 Catalog Explorer add to stockpile. 255 selecting. 283 catalogs cells and graphics. 70 list view. 412 CGM file format. 66 displaying buttons. 304 changing embedded objects. 79. 197 removing items. 276 links. 82 views. 304 change groups. 216. 166 breaks area. 250 inserting objects. 82 File menu. 84. 398. 276. 82 catalog items. 319. 68. 84. 72 deleting items. 166 links. 78. 114 update symbols. 83. 70. 368 pipe runs. 76 command buttons. 65. 79. 73 closing. 198 Offset Distance property. 156. 282 list views. 215. 197 brief properties. 412 symbols. 75 deleting nodes. 199 linking objects. 86. 80. 182. 196. 254. 67 browsing for catalogs. 345. 33 checking inconsistencies. 80 View menu. 87. 48. 65. 54. 197 branches connecting. 325 unit of measure. 396. 76 catalog nodes. 66 shortcut buttons. 282 table properties. 212 labels. 90 process. 72 overview.Index labels. 283 items. 245 symbol properties. 410 child SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 437 . 89 browsing for catalogs. 134 cascading windows. 86 case data control. 83. 48. 399 view properties. 68. 281. 36 case data. 82 finding items. 341. 78 navigating. 82 toolbars. 89 buttons adding. 78 page setups. 217. 238. 281. 78 catalog items cloning. 81. 199 leader lines. 397. 412 checking paths. 165. 68. 54 tasks. 202 placing labels. 165. 273 cells graphic. 187. 156. 77. 75 cloning. 69 bulk properties. 74 displaying. 83 report templates. 246 deleting items. 72. 82 custom catalogs. 338. 197. 162 break labels. 69. 73 Catalog Manager Cut command. 74. 282 items. 348 select set properties.

309 options. 303 exclusive. 73 catalog items. 82 customizing. 293. 306 example. 255 lines. 206 open partner drawing. 300 To Do List. 407 colors customizing. 156. 172 changing. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 280 pasting items. 43 gaps. 289. 309 component handles. 148 connected items. 293 and deleting. 76 drawings. 147. 43. 289. 254. 45. 45. 299 TEF. 105. 300. 253 Cut command. 295 multiple representations. 202 stockpile. 241. 17 commands buttons. 296 lines. 244 rotating using handles. 310 version. 390 validating properties. 304. 293. 146 tool. 188 piping. 251 moving. 292. 297 labels. 289. 308. 250. 298 and replacing items. 173 compare. 293. 293 Compare and Refresh column headings. 105. 381 connectors deleting. 302. 306 Engineering Data Editor. 246 Paste an Item. 291. 303 access. 301. 238. 124 P&IDs. 19 setting. 410 consistency check PDS 2D propagation. 406 consulting services. 293. 32. 313. 293 status. 42. 118 code lists. 304. 293 shared. 297 area breaks. 206 placing. 238 components inline. 289. 293 items. 297 related items. 205 consistency checking. 297 invalid claims. 154 claim modes. 289. 9 commodity codes adding. 44. 21 Colors tab Options dialog box. 149 tools. 293. 147 Clipboard copying. 109 to plant structures. 308. 44. 247 pasting. 305 drawings. 32. 43. 143 construction status. 167 composite formats. 293. 308. 166 to databases. 20 storing. 300 to do list. 305. 9 contents of reports. 68. 293. 216 stockpile items. 305. 341 compound filters. 352 continuation 438 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 289. 256 connecting items. 166 pipe runs. 299 clearing selections. 293 releasing claims. 309 versions. 293 claiming. 73 closing Catalog Explorer. 247 cloning Catalog Explorer. 207. 310 comparing. 316. 137 configuration PickQuick tool. 315. 409 construction status placed items. 292. 251 labels. 32. 18.Index representations. 297 claim mode. 109 to TEF. 28 inserting. 204. 308 Compare and Refresh dialog. 207 opening partner. 293. 95 comments on documentation. 135. 291. 406 constraints databases. 301.

17 display properties. 127. 130. 189 mirrored items. 357 reports. 28 catalog nodes. 95 filter tabs. 206 continuation drawings how to. 351. 83. 254. 341 select sets. 331. 30 environments. 334. 52. 28. 21 instrument loops. 256 shortcut buttons. 273 inline component values. 94. 253. 92. 337. 396 toolbars. 107. 17 toolbars. 95 with macros. 389 creating area breaks. 208 menus. 357 report template contents. 237 item tags. 82. 21. 28. 50.Index drawings. 91 reports. 71. 93. 322 using the select tool. 138 formats. 356. 352. 114 defaults construction status. 29. 135. 90. 110 placement. 88. 96 deferring tasks. 137. 90 bulk properties. 46 tasks. 14 data files importing. 250 OPCs. 389 correlations removing. 84 customizing appearance. 216 inconsistencies. 402 defining brief properties. 129 graphical operations. 207 copying bulk properties. 344. 254 labels. 131 filters. 27. 53 deleting. 17 setting. 27. 47. 132. 387. 321. 68 compound filters. 83. 137 custom catalogs. 340. 91 colors. 72 customer support. 96 P&IDs. 409 Properties window. 410 correlating items. 335. 352 table layouts. 354. 92. 133. 245. 21. 77. 86. 213 report templates. 349. 88. 331. 102 drawing templates. 92. 72 documents. 138. 217 error conditions. 338. 81. 136. 331 tabular views. 401. 21 compare options. 91. 409 restoring. 92 custom catalogs. 9 customization Options dialog box. 59. 35. 175 properties. 331. 286 buttons. 18. 246 Data Dictionary Manager customized properties. 78 menus. 356. 91 Catalog Explorer. 89. 134 decimal places. 105. 174 list views. 80 tables. 43. 346. 284. 80. 340. 91. 19. 141 opening. 89 files. 246. 56. 308. 395. 354. 91 cutting equipment components. 21 buttons. 240 pipe run values. 119. 122 drawings. 93. 64 toolbars. 343. 143 dates defining. 341. 13 correcting actions. 131. 109 databases constraints. 102 filter tabs. 96 Open dialog box. 26. 89 heat tracing. 95. 354 report templates. 245. 212 assemblies. 120. 78. 353. 254 copyrights software. 360 report items. 164 report contents. 102. 273 items. 121. 91. 293 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 439 . 141 packages. 247 files. 309 display options. 255. 324 database connecting to. 93. 350 and claiming. 175 items.

86. 386 dragging items. 207. 14. 251 instruments. 115 Engineering Data Editor. 30 tabular views. 245. 32. 207. 107. 98. 35 new. 350. 382. 198 display filters. 248. 62 grids. 28. 308. 111 440 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 32 customizing. 81. 259 OPCs. 64 distances offset. 251 correlations. 246. 110 printing. 22. 314 labels. 87. 251 inline components. 246. 371 filters. 207. 304. 42. 17 stockpile. 402. 13 as printed. 197. 303 claims. 102 Engineering Framework. 301. 48 tables. 94. 130 using filters. 57 tasks. 30 nulls. 335 reports toolbar. 77 claim status. 82 case data. 74. 15. 26 using zoom. 105. 66 catalog items. 30 leader lines. 90 Catalog Explorer. 76 table views. 86. 250 shortcut buttons. 30 brief properties. 218. 13 inconsistencies. 207 creating. 248 report templates. 102 history. 41 subnodes. 162 Digital Print Room driver. 112 recent. 30. 75 catalog nodes. 95 connectors. 309 continuation. 80. 65. 62. 30 different symbols. 104. 121 drawings comparing. 203 properties. 333. 11 print options.Index assembly items. 21. 363. 30. 214 templates. 309 in use. 251 lines. 254 drawing revision clouds. 367 templates. 41. 69 document properties. 122 views. 389 from model. 130 displaying about SmartPlant P&ID. 304. 64 filters. 263 tabular views. 147 Design window. 108. 367 properties. 24 windows. 131 properties. 63 status bar. 17. 305. 180 items. 115 documentation comments. 9 documents retrieving. 112. 130 overview. 100 OPCs. 331. 26 displays customizing. 261 deselecting items. 250. 89 reports. 403 views. 361 Disable Flip Text labels. 348 settings. 198 document properties. 35 opening. 30. 250. 78 diagonal mode. 34 new views. 45. 23. 207. 99. 28. 34 Details command. 351 select sets. 59. 121. 251 model orphan items. 81 stockpile items. 365 borders. 305. 284 catalog items. 31 Help. 89 properties. 119. 74 commands. 385. 15 Drawing Manager change drawing name. 85. 35 toolbars. 29. 106. 57 descriptions adding. 302. 102. 110 symbol toolbars. 84. 249. 190 notes. 251. 90 buttons.

273 images. 403 modifying properties. 397. 34. 54. 375. 261 items. 373. 345 select set properties. 385 running a task. 221 properties. 87 equipment components. 254 editing drawing templates. 83 report templates. 398 publishing. 267. 282 hyperlinks. 276 links. 392. 282 filters. 51. 396. 380 refresh. 39 stockpiles. 396 deferring tasks. 263 Stockpile. 43 removing views. 38 filters. 121. 129 errors checking. 43 editing items. 381 correlating items. 120 views. 35. 134. 399 embedding borders. 129 consistency checking. 43. 122 documents. 356. 376. 345. 353. 129 refreshing. 394 properties. 386 retrieving files. 50 table properties. 127. 382. 34. 395 assigning tasks. 188 duplicating items. 397 opening drawings. 390. 273. 282 pipe run properties. 394 entering free text. 354. 391. 275. 87. 127. 118 exploring SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 441 . 350. 152 groups. 341. 329 executing macros. 276 items. 398. 378. 40 autofilter. 399. 316 conditions. 38 tabular views. 402 deleting tasks. 395. 34 displaying. 276. 402 using. 111 exiting Catalog Explorer. 337. 408 placing. 305 saving. 237 insulation specifications. 60 caption.Index recreating. 87. 398 creating tasks. 220. 379. 131. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 405 reporting. 401 existing drawings. 41 table layouts. 181. 277. 273 editing. 371 zooming. 127. 58 Engineering Framework accessing Web. 35 driving labels. 40. 258 properties of pipe runs. 221 relationship properties. 45. 20. 346. 46 table views. 400. 15 display. 348. 400 Browser. 152. 397. 47 pasting. 47 views. 357 reports. 273 Engineering Data Editor. 97. 387. 349. 46 tasks. 389 correlations. 389 creating properties. 41 editing. 125 templates. 403. 317. 400 To Do List. 404 retrieving documents. 129 recreating errors. 381 adding tasks. 377. 281. 276. 249 error conditions. 122 drawings. 153 erasing items. 57 selecting items. 43 defining. 181 linked objects. 217 labels. 396. 401. 83 sources. 68 P&IDs. 119. 404 refreshing. 260. 84. 214 embedded objects. 102. 319 Excel. 280 objects. 55. 338. 331 importing. 282 table items. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 34. 396. 216. 394. 220. 118. 124. 44 shortcut menu. 101 tasks. 48 copying. 278 URLs.

131 Design window. 373. 136 properties. 354. 379. 390. 398 creating tasks. 394. 133. 17 report templates. 230. 130 drawings. 70 catalogs. 387. 21 Filter tab. 401. 51. 194. 25 fixed format. 397 opening drawings. 392. 375. 357 gapping AutoGap. 225. 373. 385 running a task. 139. 135. 385. 398 publishing. 391. 234. 396. 215 fonts printing. 403. 380 retrieving. 230 new. 47. 381 Framework accessing Web. 404 Retrieve command. 376. 132. 341 Foundation SmartPlant. 132 tables. 385 retrieving documents. 377 checking paths. 138 Paste. 64 from and to data reports.Index elsewhere. 377. 29. 396 deferring tasks. 373. 382. 399. 131 tabular views. 60. 138. 64. 226. 381 adding tasks. 346 reports. 338. 226. 378. 229. 227. 231. 60 filters autofilter. 234 replacing. 400 Browser. 234. 29 filtering. 405 reporting. 131. 110. 186. 389 correlations. 389 creating properties. 46. 400 To Do List. 126 objects. 380 drawing items. 413 display. 237 customizing. 343. 394 properties. 377. 137 creating. 340. 404 refreshing. 356 rules. 22 stockpile. 340. 136. 191. 54 tabular views. 226. 138. 258 reports. 283 manipulating. 130 setting. 402 deleting tasks. 169 fields reports. 267. 378. 229. 380 refresh. 69 documents to publish. 386 retrieving files. 386 Files tab Options dialog box. 52. 130 tab. 379. 61 compound. 201 fluids code values. 24. 361 formats fixed. 15 definition. 394 freezing panes. 397. 228. 269 Gap Now. 376. 377. 379. 131 Filter tab customize. 281 stockpile items. 335 reports. 381 correlating items. 396. 197 connectors. 341 report templates. 137. 237 inconsistencies. 375. 376. 382. 228. 139 Properties. 131. 375. 235 fitting views. 270 lines. 172 relationships. 104 publishing to TEF. 371 zooming. 91 defining. 269 442 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 352 files. 402 using. 403 modifying properties. 395. 136. 69 exporting drawings. 225. 68. 329 fabrication categories. 378. 47 Filter Manager Add Filter command. 140 finding items. 352. 131 displays. 64 finding catalog items. 395 assigning tasks. 340 flow arrows. 173 fabrication categories assigning. 273 opening. 69.

270 General tab. 18 component. 150 properties. 244 mirror. 280 lines. 273 from reports. 261 heat tracing inline instrument. 112 General tab Options dialog box. 276 inserting. 278 icons customizing. 325 stream data. 26 highlights colors. 304. 78 display. 341 graphics cells. 270 using. 316 errors. 305 hyperlinks adding. 163 tools.Index manually. 17. 313 overview. 12 user's guides. 156 headers defining for reports. 244 scale. 329 using reports. 268 pumps. 273. 175. 268 inconsistencies checking. 273 images. 238 rotate. 328 items. 238. 335. 33 snapping. 238. 277. 88 handles colors. 248 vertex. 241. 17 generating item tags. 275. 20. 314 finding. 95 documents. 259 defining. 141 properties. 178. 359. 317 inline components and validation. 31 displaying. 94. 226. 324 from SmartSketch. 77 images embedding. 275. 30 indices. 31. 157. 161 objects. 152 plants. 30. 408 groups equipment. 321. 410 display. 324. 12 programming. 242 parametric. 324 drawings. 276 instruments into loops. 315 resolving. 150 grouping equipment. 18 hints consistency check. 31 placing. 179 items. 358. 267. 329 log. 351. 32. 238. 313 histories. 78 displaying small. 340 reports. 265. 316 correcting. 28 commands. 164. 30. 144 using. 262. 240. 323. 67. 216 displaying. 268 SmartSketch files. 331. 276. 370 Help accessing. 319. 322 inconsistency indicators. 324 overview. 175 offline instruments. 247. 273 hyperlinks. 208 reports. 13 hiding toolbars. 325 files. 338. 13 support. 31 tabs. 273 inserting. 276 importing data. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 443 . 325. 31 views. 334. 234 inconsistency indicators. 12 World Wide Web. 323 pipe runs. 31 styles. 177 height printing. 239 selecting items. 78 large. 175 inserting buttons. 151 spacing. 238. 412 grids densities. 360 heat tracing. 265. 333.

210 breaks. 199 mirrorable. 197 item types. 186 legal notices. 190 labels. 197. 254. 125 PDS 2D. 197 Catalog Manager. 44 joining lines. 186. 289. 13 levels exporting. 338 saving. 293. 180 loops. 389 replacing. 291. 370 layers AutoCAD. 300. 164. 22 tables. 44. 198 modifying. 80 stockpile items. 48 Page Setup. 184. 194. 329 with Aspen Zyqad. 161 viewing items. 50 options. 30 Installation Guide overview. 166 labels. 211 properties. 196 rotatable. 182. 412 driving. 157. 126 layouts default. 338. 413 libraries 444 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 186. 42 implied. 300. 329 Internet viewing drawings. 191. 186 OPCs. 54 leader lines connectors. 175. 190 landscape printing. 262 insulation heat tracing. 179. 199 flipped text. 188. 197 components. 179. 267. 340. 178. 199 property breaks. 194. 186. 166 pipe runs. 256 correlating. 292. 202 piping. 46 setting. 293 removing correlations. 32. 156. 329 using Aspen Zyqad. 188. 184. 302. 301. 406 using filters. 412 fitting text. 174. 141 invalid claims. 190 placing. 291. 369 report templates. 201 descriptions. 197 terminator types. 198 title blocks. 273 vertices. 188. 124 intranet bypassing. 67 URLs. 189 annotations. 188 types. 175. 182 placement. 182. 191. 30 driven. 182. 125 exporting. 161. 189 displaying. 199 targeting. 174 loop. 303 item tags. 302. 199 displaying. 199 aligning. 389 deleting. 260 Insulation Manager overview. 208 validation. 191. 178. 197 leader lines.Index pipe runs. 190. 175. 196 moving. 47. 232. 182. 198. 186. 45. 262 revisions. 197 types of terminators. 198 one-point placements. 301. 200 text display. 126 MicroStation. 45. 32. 292. 191. 161 shortcut buttons. 302 generating. 165. 323 importing. 198 offset source. 182. 11 integration Aspen Zyqad. 44. 258 offset distance. 191. 387. 200 updating. 255. 188 placing. 233 selecting. 182. 188. 261 specifications. 195. 156. 161. 177 properties. 198 flow arrows. 11 instruments inline. 265 offline. 182. 341 reports. 197 two-point placements. 208 items claiming. 187 placements. 201. 259. 51. 53. 303 connected. 197 copying. 196. 182. 181.

283 changing. 240. 301. 78 locating catalog items. 159 update settings. 180 macros adding. 135 maximum units. 125 migration rules. 100 modifying claimed items. 87. 256 starting. 131 shortcut buttons. 278. 146. 91. 242 handles. 52 Match Any filters. 281 links breaking. 162 routing ribbon. 169 menus creating. 284 borders. 145. 241. 102. 65. 238 leader lines. 412 licenses notices. 357. 338. 165. 126 OLE objects. 282 filters. 98. 282 table properties. 175. 190 lines. 271 lines branching. 158. 281 editing. 248. 351. 407 views. 281 pipe runs. 25 windows. 303 embedded objects. 101 making buttons. 238. 157. 145. 121. 273 lines. 80 manipulating assemblies. 281. 281 Save As. 265 stockpile. 281 files. 272 line settings updating. 52 Match All filters. 159. 15 MicroStation exporting. 251 gapping. 95. 282 properties. 218. 198. 272 linking assemblies. 360 Match all defining filters. 178. 156. 166 objects. 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 445 . 265 links. 68 inconsistencies. 202 pipe runs. 241 items. 77 tags. 160. 265 relationship properties. 44. 99. 255. 156 weight and color. 166 routing. 119. 302. 135 Match any defining filters. 84. 242 mirroring axes. 13 line routing ribbon. 54. 328 mirror axes. 276. 25 mapping attributes. 219. 179. 92. 166 properties. 221 OPCs. 97. 207.Index cells. 132 items. 122 changing. 258. 238. 341. 240. 271. 242 items. 287 equipment. 91 executing. 165 deleting. 96 default. 226 loops instrument. 217. 15 models orphan items. 300. 216. 174. 96 shortcuts. 220 selecting. 92 customizing. 161. 241 modeler displaying windows. 160. 254. 292. 78 lists select. 162 breaking. 282 list views. 96 restoring. 28 filter tabs. 153 items. 325 SmartSketch. 166 updating. 93. 45. 325 migrator importing. 163 joining. 83 sources. 345 select set properties. 221 views. 83 report templates.

254 selecting. 216 window. 206 opening Catalog Explorer. 396. 12 Web Client. 190 lines. 65 navigating. 35. 186 labels. 204 storing partner. 190 leader lines. 223 multiple drawings printing. 397. 72 continuation drawings. 222. 75 compound filters. 221 OPCs. 86 offline instruments placing. 204. 201. 137 drawing views. 219. 399 title blocks. 189. 218. 198. 35. 216. 79 networks connecting. 186. 105. 408 items. 35 drawings. 205. 205. 205 open partner drawing. 220. 137 drawings. 331 report templates. 204 properties. 184.Index tabular views. 222 pipe runs. 156. 182 moving. 198 source. 46 user's guides. 367 multiple representations child and parent. 12 macros. 207 databases. 221 piping components. 223 stockpile items. 216. 111. 111 symbol set. 184. 177 off-page connectors. 184. 182 one-point placement. 105. 169 defining. 167 select sets. 206. 343. 172 notes displaying. 75 nominal diameters assigning. 104. 207. 203 storing. 394 files. 204 equipment. 277 one-point placement. 187. 344 toolbars. 14 rename. 222 moving partners. 186 how to. 251 matching OPC label. 186. 207 opening partner OPC. 27 views. 206. 197. 201 OLE files. 30 properties. 51 templates. 104 Help. 156. 265 to another drawing. 138 report items. 34 nodes Catalog Explorer. 69 tables. 253 labels. 102. 27 Navigation Catalog Explorer. 188. 195 OPCs deleting. 20. 186 properties. 108. 261 nozzles placing internally. 132. 126 filters. 46 tasks. 204. 398. 238. 121 plant structures. 105. 273 insert an object. 109 drawing views. 220. 343 tables. 120 toolbars. 110. 217. 12 filters. 263. 268 moving. 153 null property value. 202. 353 report templates. 106. 136 report items. 89 setting to display. 184 labels. 35 drawings. 222. 173 defning. 72 renaming. 381 options codes. 154 naming catalog nodes. 194 using reports. 107. 201 offset distance. 42. 223. 202 off-page connectors. 256 new compound filters. 108. 101 new drawings. 264. 173 446 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 206. 206 placing. 121 features. 97. 136. 265. 215. 255 creating. 109 recent drawings. 222. 20.

122 panes freezing. 370 orphan items deleting. 102 filters. 141 design window. 160 runs. 239 parent representations. 409 setting. 245 report templates. 162 breaking runs. 273 items. 406 construction status. 284. 413 PickQuick configuration tool. 181 one-point. 331 P2C2 Web forum. 161 joining. 17 Options Manager connectors. 408 errors. 162. 17 placements construction status. 146 placement. 182. 15 drawings. 280 properties. 213 stockpile. 254. 409 labels. 172.Index colors. 313 solving inconsistencies. 167. 365. 25 parametric handles. 247. 172. 166 routing. 268 joining. 246. 188 placing annotations. 149 selecting items. 141 database. 211 area breaks. 98 overview SmartPlant P&ID. 212 assemblies. 277. 256 selecting runs. 391 orientations drawings. 271 organizing tasks. 181 reports. 17 Options dialog box. 283 linking files. 11 removing items. 273 PDS 2D cells. 18 construction status. 159. 89 files. 255 PipeSpec assigning. 256 specifications. 19 two-point. 148 pipe runs inline components and validation. 121 Page Setup. 114 deleting items. 156. 368 layouts. 173 selecting. 167 inserting vertices. 154 pasting bulk properties. 369 printing. 165. 369 printing. 175 item tag. 165 components. 184. 166 properties. 147. 186 tolerances. 272 overview. 202 Cut command. 42. 13 packages creating. 215. 158. 171. 182. 370 templates. 271 symbology changes. 238 parametrics resizing. 250 line settings. 287 catalog items. 159. 280 paths checking. 278. 410 using filters. 166 selecting. 62 panning views. 77. 253. 43 special. 369 Page Setup. 265 page setups changing. 280 objects. 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 447 . 175 placing items. 272 update symbology. 169 piping branches. 363. 246 default units. 409 equipment groups. 412 comparing to SmartPlant. 333 symbology. 130 labels. 88. 10 overviews creating a drawing. 169. 171 using. 173 Placement tab Options dialog box.

289. 88. 114. 86 documents. 368. 368 range. 30. 86. 301. 84. 363 selected areas. 293. 97. 361. 368 fonts. 265 plant structures opening. 363. 300 enabling. 361 to a file. 364. 264 items on a grid. 89. 292. 321. 202. 162. 361. 195 OPCs. 300 prompts status bar. 363. 213 pipe runs. 44. 363 overview. 87 448 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Index component labels. 300. 66. 333 plant item groups examples. 410 properties. 182. 195 connectors. 259 and claiming. 288 overview. 109 plants groups. 237 formatted. 169 points center. 232. 149. 42. 91 importing. 363 scale. 177 OPCs. 295. 158. 88 PMC assigning. 167 revision clouds. 171 using. 158. 367 drawings. 154 offline instruments. 90 bulk. 89 copying. 322 customizing. 77 inline instruments. 187. 367. 204 packages. 43. 361. 88. 194 plant reports. 263. 291. 48. 175 internal nozzles. 248 labels. 33. 370 positioning assemblies. 211 lines. 298. 84. 172. 288 to do list. 233. 28. 141 files. 175 in stockpile. 294. 169 programming customization. 369 page setups. 406 PDS 2D. 90 display. 153 flow arrows. 45. 169 printable user's guides. 365. 221 piping components. 329 macros. 116 drawings. 288 statuses. 337 portrait printing. 153 items. 201. 144 end. 87 displaying alphabetically. 302. 361 multiple drawings. 141. 370 settings. 184. 66. 402 precision units. 188. 303 claiming items. 87. 215. 152. 175 instruments. 114 pressure maximum. 85. 173 property. 367 origin. 131. 112. 264 title blocks. 84. 366. 284 catalog items. 363. 66 equipment. 150 labels. 367 time. 182. 113. 367 process case data assigning. 84. 361. 296. 153 items. 186. 401. 177 instruments with heat tracing. 299 break labels. 367 setting options. 88. 84. 204 equipment. 32. 144 portable reports. 367 documents. 175. 162. 297. 17 propagation comparing. 146. 12 printing copies. 299. 115. 101 projects. 84 adding descriptions. 201 postponing tasks. 221 multiple representations. 194 heat tracing. 144. 105. 141 Page Setup. 370 files. 196 brief. 112. 90 displaying. 214 stockpile items. 363. 258 explained. 48. 114 filters. 86 displaying categorially. 112 editing.

75 drawings. 378. 379. 340 headers. 233 report templates contents. 345 editing items. 94. 40 quitting Catalog Explorer. 220. 58 To Do List. 229. 403. 235. 358 reporting contents. 249. 225. 375. 357 defining layouts. 379. 376. 319 instruments. 389 inline components. 28. 305 tabular views. 305 drawings. 341 defining template layouts. 75 catalog nodes. 346. 159. 118 reapplying rules. 232 replacing and claiming. 376. 375. 51. 371 with SmartPlant Foundation. 248. 352 creating. 358 spacings. 333 importing items. 305 registering projects. 350 shortcut buttons. 402. 58 refreshing. 340. 350 table. 29. 89 OPCs. 293 items. 28. 221 notes. 166. 46. 231. 14. 221 piping components. 233. 31 inconsistencies. 76 catalog nodes. 127. 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 449 . 354 options. 380 to TEF. 232. 151 Properties window. 341 deleting templates. 396. 165. 354. 334. 165. 246. 378. 42 tasks. 43 releasing claims. 354 deleting. 129 reflecting items. 376. 299 views. 250. 75. 89 proxy server. 83 report templates. 338. 343. 98. 95 correlations. 341 contents. 335. 337 defining items. 306 example. 228. 337. 333 to do list. 74 commands. 141 publishing documents. 201. 159. 43 pipe runs. 268 lengths. 350 editing. 331 editing. 371 relationships using. 166. 379. 81 stockpile items. 259. 399 validating. 237 mode. 302. 230. 44. 262 labels. 398. 331. 354. 397. 251 OPCs. 167 printers. 358 including select lists. 99. 83 releasing claims. 102 Replace Mode catalog items. 90 tasks. 292. 377. 261 nulls. 175. 341 creating templates. 378. 215. 88. 76 SmartPlant P&ID. 375. 380 queries Engineering Data Editor. 373. 373. 240 refresh Compare and Refresh dialog. 248 report templates. 284 buttons. 404 version. 35. 198. 405 versions. 321 recreating drawings. 345 composite. 403 views. 180 items. 300. 45. 68. 234. 100. 199 lines. 380 files. 68. 351 displaying. 245. 57 renaming catalog items. 80 catalog items. 203 pasting. 251 instruments. 303 removing assembly items. 301. 315. 310 views. 404 reports changing templates. 68. 335. 74.Index grids. 377. 333 creating. 368 relationship. 344. 377. 356 defining contents. 373. 346 formats. 310 To Do List. 350.

386 reviewing properties. 382. 285. 262 ribbons line routing. 360 toolbars. 214 links. 20 handles. 218 piping. 369. 351. 341. 87 revising drawings. 158. 199. 248 connected items. 345 sources. 228 segment alter. 340 template items. 238 scaling drawing items. 321. 340. 346. 340. 22 retrieving documents. 147. 156. 156. 349. 256 450 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 343 headers. 21 fixed formats. 22. 148. 386 files. 145. 358 template properties. 124. 265 items. 162. 343 representations child. 337. 118 settings. 243 select tool. 382. 42. 225. 220. 144 selecting all. 359 tabular. 220. 161. 359 overview. 385. 356 layouts. 32 migration. 141 portable. 284. 221 Rule Manager consistency checking. 157. 154 parent. 322 running macros. 337 sort orders. 359. 338. 146 rotate handles. 118. 239 parametrics. 400 saving assemblies. 217. 353 template options. 101 tasks. 340. 160. 321. 352. 343 options. 226. 160. 56 templates. 354. 343. 360 types. 244 routing lines. 42. 159. 345. 154 required items. 385. 221 pipe runs. 221 mirror. 357. 251 resetting toolbars. 345 naming templates. 254. 286 drawings. 341. 130 overview. 157 insert. 239 resolving inconsistencies. 217. 156. 157. 117. 124. 352 filters. 55 scale handles. 42. 154 multiple. 255. 325 reapplying. 335 modifying. 352 source templates. 227. 28 views. 370 parametrics. 319. 317. 220. 341 template formats. 344. 241 move. 243. 341 formats. 157. 350. 125 views. 354. 348. 239 searching for drawing items. 358 fields. 352. 240. 28 resizing drawings. 37. 315. 351. 237 for items. 11 rules inconsistencies. 102. 348. 130. 126 P&IDs. 162. 125. 157 select sets. 96 toolbars. 244 items. 350 templates. 346. 214 revisions text. 282 report templates. 338 lengths. 356. 216. 161 rotation. 44. 37 tabular views. 385. 160. 338. 386 from TEF. 382. 344 spacings. 343 new. 239 embedded objects. 352 find directory.Index editing templates. 238 rotating handles. 359 importing items. 242. 313 filters. 322. 352. 159. 410 restoring menus. 282 revision clouds.

105 settings labels. 131. 17 showing brief properties. 77 Engineering Data Editor. 223 spreadsheets adding items. 256 sets. 329 starting lines. 271. 329 importing. 121. 407 filters. 122. 255. 43. 201 report templates. 22 tabular views. 81. 255. 146. 53 sources offset. 130 importing. 30 items. 356 tables. 254. 112 properties. 147. 201 Cut items. 41 filters. 20 stockpiles adding items. 101 networks. 261 splitting drawings. 86. 371 SmartPlant Foundation interfacing with. 97. 63 shortcuts buttons. 367 saving. 256 inserted items. 264 removing items. 42. 272 printing. 145. 245 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 451 . 17 stockpile claiming items. 371 SmartPlant Migrator importing. 146. 302 specifications insulation. 246 deleted items. 255. 248. 18 servers open site server. 90 inconsistencies. 83. 248. 179. 84. 254. 67 adding to. 281. 254. 237 inline components. 369. 248. 263. 67 Aspen Zyqad. 81 case data. 66. 256 lines. 256 lists. 91 Catalog Explorer. 77 connectors. 250 displayed items.Index entries. 90 buttons. 15. 277. 370 SmartPlant Engineering Manager using. 159 statistics current document. 46 drawings. 325 SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. 223. 317. 86. 65. 109 Open Site Server. 260. 144. 11 overview. 267. 80. 255. 254. 44 runs. 158. 11 SmartSketch migration. 105 sizing drawings. 248 deleting items. 256 properties. 79. 10 Rule Manager. 202 overview. 62. 65 menus. 109 Open Site Server. 410 sorting report items. 299 setting partner locations. 112 setting options. 148. 325. 265 OPCs. 218. 293. 256 tool. 222. 190 sites open server. 44. 151 solving inconsistencies. 287 SP_ID. 198. 158. 178. 255. 254. 381 using. 278. 328 snapping grids. 283. 333. 264. 32. 409 status bar prompts. 254 selection criteria. 43. 222. 145. 329 moving items. 116 status construction. 254. 314 leader lines. 114 for a drawing. 159 P&IDs. 11 Options Manager. 344 symbol file. 215. 265. 282 symbols. 335 selections colors. 407 macros. 141 packages. 255. 141 pipe runs. 319. 86. 82. 190 lines. 265 placing items. 11 Insulation Manager.

38. 45 tags required. 404. 403. 396 deferring tasks. 265 tasks adding. 333 view. 396 assigning to drawings. 301 accessing Web. 401. 293. 47 tabular views editing. 402 ing items. 398 creating tasks.Index reporting. 45 modifying. 41 storing partner OPCs. 54. 204. 53. 399. 60. 392. 403. 46 view settings. 400 creating. 54 italic items. 390 updating. 12 World Wide Web. 301. 38 editing items. 62 filters. 375. 387 modifying properties. 46. 397. 62. 402 executing. 394 properties. 396. 38 items. 57 displaying views. 397 opening drawings. 399. 111 windows. 292. 405 reporting. 377. 43. 64 deleting. 51 properties. 400 To Do List. 47. 63 Tabular Editor filters. 278. 395. 112 setting options. 391. 116 support Help. 402 using. 401. 404 refreshing. 36 symbol sources. 60. 389 creating properties. 38 layouts. 47 table views. 399 refreshing. 44. 400. 399 opening drawings. 404. 113 for a drawing. 69 sources. 55. 396. 401 To Do List. 35. 404 retrieving documents. 402. 62 updating views. 398. 90 tabs customizing. 277. 262. 46. 245. 401 modifying. 46. 400 Browser. 111 views. 63 views. 41. 205 stream data importing. 39. 329 summaries current document. 376. 15. 394 types. 46. 35. 34. 333 saving. 303 updating. 271. 47. 389 correlations. 57. 20. 385 running a task. 396. 373. 263 tools. 371 zooming. 395. 381 correlating items. 138 tabular customizing views. 398 publishing. 405 zooming. 395 assigning tasks. 50. 395. 392. 292. 382. 394 properties. 391. 394. 48. 246. 35. 58 view displays. 258 filters. 12 switching drawings. 387. 287 toolbars. 52. 390. 56 stockpiles. 63 view filters. 398. 405 removing. 76 symbology alternate. 61 format reports. 9 TEF. 400. 403 reporting. 395 technical support. 32. 46 view layouts. 338 freezing panes. 69. 386 retrieving files. 208 XML. 390. 396. 58. 54 new. 71. 140 claims. 281 toolbars. 396 deferring. 394 452 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 59. 289. 397. 76 tables bold items. 397. 272 symbols displaying. 14 viewing. 46 reporting. 248 validation. 381 adding tasks. 404 running. 378 refresh. 40. 38 editing properties.

19 pointer. 27. 351. 194 to and from data reports. 121. 370 terminators types of.Index temperature maximum. 83. 184. 190 line settings. 357 to do list tasks. 343. 217 units for a drawing. 404 remove a task. 405 zooming. 71. 390 updating drawings. 121. 349. 20. 272 links. 403. 394. 17 PickQuick. 354. 394 properties. 143 tiling windows. 92 customizing. 402 reporting. 397 opening. 348. 344. 28 creating. 95 default. 359. 76 symbology. 120 creating for drawing. 19 toolbars adding buttons. 267. 350 saving. 65 two-point placement. 71 Properties window. 58 to do list. 28 displaying. 112 precision. 281 properties. 17. 71 tools Customize. 329 symbol toolbars. 402 deleted tasks. 404 running a task. 93. 404. 21 gapping. 204 validation item tags. 169 templates creating. 200 testing databases. 21 Select Tool. 191 title blocks labels. 114 To Do List. 188. 395 tolerances placement. 91. 216 assemblies. 397. 92. 84 reports. 254 tree views. 182 two-point placement labels. 214 items. 169 version numbers. 271. 399 refresh. 119 reports. 202. 396 deferring items. 13 versions compare. 26 project specific. 119. 396. 122. 310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 453 . 398 creating tasks. 346. 338. 195 undoing actions. 400 creating properties. 391 opening drawings. 94. 208 piperun and inline components. 36 title blocks. 394 modifying properties. 329 label settings. 345. 360 symbol. 26. 353. 197 placing. 352. 403 dialog box. 105 user's guides printable. 392 user specific. 391. 102 drawings. 175 values dates. 395 assign drawing. 122 included sizes. 341. 405 user access. 392 how to. 399 assigning tasks. 146 reports. 369. 272 tabular views. 130. 271. 390 To Do List adding tasks. 285 changes. 96 customizing. 76 To Do List. 398. 125 sizes. 270 General tab. 400 updating. 402 removing tasks. 28. 12 utility connectors. 134 short. 401 deferring tasks. 340. 27. 187.

258 warnings approve. 370 Web forum. 25 properties. 308. 309 refresh. 83 switching. 51. 24 tasks. 34 fitting. 115 report templates. 161 inserting. 88. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 150 inconsistencies. 53 tables. 237 properties of documents. 35 drawings. 265 zooming areas. 22 table layouts. 381 What's New for this release. 36 overview. 304. 111 tabular. 54. 32 consistency checking. 102 list. 350 reports. 22 Engineering Data Editor. 41. 90. 23 in. 34. 35. 35 tabular. 33 claims. 77. 26. 13 Catalog Explorer. 23 windows. 12 viewing drawings. 22. 15 drawing views. 39 switching. 161 viewing about SmartPlant P&ID. 29. 333. 30 grids. 124 XML tags. 36 displaying. 32 lists. 78 manipulating. 23. 78 changing properties. 367. 57 Design. 35 document properties. 259 support. 39. 329 454 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 66 catalog items. 303 deleting. 13 Web Client accessing. 22 saving. 14. 367 properties. 13 links to. 335 settings.Index comparing. 22 printing. 84. 317. 17. 369 printing. 325 World Wide Web forum. 15. 190 properties. 395 Zyqad importing. 77 defining filters. 25 grids. 85. 22. 35 General tab. 258 Engineering Data Editor. 305 vertices. 394. 319 watermarks Page Setup. 12 width printing. 14. 34 displaying. 35 using zoom. 23 out. 314 leader lines. 305. 89. 370 windows arranging. 55 settings. 15 drawing. 25 previous. 131. 24. 36 views arranging. 37 stockpile. 46. 22. 15. 310 refreshing. 28. 48. 24 using zooming. 31 inconsistencies. 115 drawing. 36 wizards migration. 36 Catalog Explorer. 47. 141 panning. 52 Design view. 36 panning. 34 drawings. 151 restoring. 36 cascading.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful